Section VII – Scope of Works

Table of Contents

1. DESCRIPTION OF THE WORKS ................................................................................... 2-3

2. DRAWINGS ...................................................................................................................... 2-3
3. CAMP ESTABLISHMENT, POWER SUPPLY AND OTHER SERVICES ................... 2-3
4. CONSTRUCTION IN CONFINED AREAS .................................................................... 2-4
5. MANAGEMENT OF THE ENVIRONMENT ................................................................. 2-4
6. CHANGES TO SCOPE OF WORK ................................................................................. 2-4
1. DESCRIPTION OF THE WORKS

Kyaka Ilabwa Bus Terminal and Bukoba Central Market are under Bukoba Municipal in Kagera
Region. Construction of Kyaka Ilabwa Bus Terminal and Bukoba Central Market in Bukoba
Municipal Council, Kagera Region comprises the Construction of infrastructures with major work
items as listed on the Table below:

A. Table 1: Estimated Quantities for Major Items of Works

SN GENERAL DESCRIPTION OF ITEMS UNIT QUANTITY

1 Excavation and earthwork cu.m 25306
2 Hardcore Sq.m 8750
3 Imported filling material cu.m 21152
4 Concrete grade 25 cu.m 15510
5 High yield reinforcement Ton 611283
6 Roofing Sheets Sq.m 7149
7 Structural Steelwork Ton 142
8 Formwork Sq.m 26244
9 Floor finish Sq.m 19498
10 Blockwork Sq.m 18564
11 Plastering Sq.m 52788
12 Painting Sq.m 52788
13 Paving Sq.m 13244

The scope of works includes the works as specified on the drawings and the other Bid Documents. A
number of existing services, both overhead and underground, such as sewer, water, electrical and
telecommunication may be affected by the works, the same have to be removed or relocated either by
the service owners or during construction by the contractor under the guidance and supervision of the
service owners.

Existing structures, if any, such as graves, and religious monuments affected by the upgrading are to
be demolished by the Municipality under the Resettlement Action Plan (RAP) process prior to
commencement of construction works.

2. DRAWINGS

Only figured dimensions may be used, drawings should not be scaled unless so instructed by the
engineer. The engineer will supply all figured dimensions omitted from the drawings. The levels
given on the drawings are subject to confirmation on site, and the contractor shall submit all levels to
the engineer for confirmation before he commences any construction work.

It is the contractor’s responsibility to check all clearances given on the drawings and to inform the
engineer of any discrepancies.

3. CAMP ESTABLISHMENT, POWER SUPPLY AND OTHER SERVICES

The contractor will have to make his own arrangements for a suitable site for his camp and for
accommodating his labour. The contractor is to make his own arrangements concerning the supply of
electrical power and all other services. No direct payment will be made for the provision of electrical
and other services. The cost thereof is deemed to be included in the rates and amounts tendered for the
various items of work for which these services are required.

4. MANAGEMENT OF THE ENVIRONMENT

The contractor will be responsible for construction in accordance with an Environmental and Social
Management Plan (ESMP) as detailed in Volume 2B, Section XIV of the Bidding Documents. The
contractor must take the utmost care to minimise the impact of his establishment and other
construction activities on the environment and must adhere to the requirements as set out in the
ESMP. Where the contractor fails to adhere to these requirements the estimated cost liability of
remedy will be determined in accordance with the amounts given in the ESMP for sub-projects.

5. CHANGES TO SCOPE OF WORK

It is a condition of this contract that the employer reserves the right to limit the total expenditure on
the Works due to possible budget constraints. Should the tender sum exceed the budgeted amount, the
scope of the works may be reduced at any time before or during the contract period to ensure that the
final contract amount does not exceed the budgeted amount.
Section VII – Standard Specifications
GENERAL SPECIFICATION FOR BUILDING WORKS
 GENERAL SPECIFICATION

A. Generally

C. Demolitions and Alterations

D. Excavation and Earthworks

F. Concrete Work

G. Walling

K. Roofing

M. Carpentry and Joinery

N. Structural Steelwork

P. Metalwork

Q. Plumbing Installations

R. Electrical Installations

S. Floor, Wall and Ceilings Finishings

T. Glazing

U. Painting and Decorating

V. Drainage

W. External Works

X. Termite Treatment

Specification
Generally
(2/1)
 GENERALLY
LIST OF CLAUSES

A.1 Standard of materials

A.2 Alterations or qualifications

A.3 Contractor to check

A.4 Details to be Private and Confidential

A.5 Method of Measurement and Notes

A.6 Standard Measurements

A.7 Dimensions and Details

A.8 Drawings

A.9 Shop Drawings

A.10 Preambles of Rates and Prices

A.11 Pricing

A.12 Examination of Rates and Prices

A.13 Abbreviations etc

A.14 Queries during tendering

A.15 Preparation of Tender

A.16 Bills of Quantities not to be used for ordering

A.17 List of Drawings

Specification
Generally
(2/A/1)
 GENERALLY
A.1 Standard of materials

Throughout this document, products, materials and workmanship have been specified to be in accordance with relative
British Standard Specifications or British Codes or Practice.

If products or materials which comply with these standards are no longer locally available or not imported and the
tenderer, if awarded this contract, intends to use other materials which do not comply with these standards, then tenderers
must allow in their prices for the best quality of such materials s in locally available.

In the event of the tenderer allowing in his prices for using alterative standards of materials to those specified, his tender
must be qualified by listing the various alternatives to be used. The successful tenderer must then subsequently submit
samples of the alternative materials to the Architect as soon as practicable after the award of the contract, and must obtain
his written approval before purchasing the particular materials.

Where alternative materials are not listed with the tender, the tenderer will be deemed to have allowed in his prices for
the standard of materials specified.

A.2 Alterations or qualifications

No alteration addition or qualification of any kind whatsoever may be made by the Tenderer to the text of the Bills of
Quantities.

If any alteration addition or qualification is made by him it will be ignored and the text as prepared by the Quantity
Surveyor will be rigidly adhered to.

Tenderers must tender strictly on the basis of the terms and conditions of contract specified in this document. Tenderers
wishing to put forward alternative conditions may only do so by submitting an alternative tender under the terms and
conditions which they wish to substitute for the conditions given in this document. Tenderer submitting an alternative
tender must however also tender on the conditions given in this document, otherwise their tender will be automatically
disqualified.

A.3 Contractor to Check

The Contractor is required to check the page numbers of the Bills of Quantities and should any be found missing or in
duplicate or other figures or writing indistinct, the Contractor must notify the Quantity Surveyors at once and have the
matter rectified before the Tender is submitted. No liability whatsoever will be entertained in respect of any claim for
errors in the Contractor’s Tender resulting form failure to comply with the foregoing.

A.4 Details to be Private and Confidential

The Drawings, Bill of Quantities and Contract Documents applicable to this Contract are restricted by copyright.

The Contractor shall treat the details of this Contract as Private and Confidential for his own information only and shall
not publish or disclose the details of the Contract in any trade or technical paper or disclose the details of the Contract in
any trade or technical paper or elsewhere (except as necessary for the purpose hereof) without the previous consent in
writing of the Employer.

A.5 Method of Measurement and Notes

The whole of the work contained in these Bills of Quantities is measured in accordance with the Standard Method of
Measurement of Building Works for East Africa – metric edition October 1970 published by the Architectural
Association of Kenya, Chapter of Quantity Surveyors, and such measurements and descriptions contained in these Bills
shall be deemed to be full and sufficient for the purpose of this Contract, subject to the correction of omissions and errors
in accordance with Clause 12(2) of the Conditions.

Specification
Generally (2/A/2)
A.5 Method of Measurement and Notes (Contd)

Notwithstanding the provision of SMM Clause A.6 (a),(b) and (c), fractions of a unit or of a kilogramme less than half
which would cause an entire item to be eliminated have been regarded as whole indicating a reference e.g. BS, type,
grade.

The following abbreviations have been used:-

Number No
Metre M
Lineal metres LM
Square metres SM
Cubic metres CM
Kilogrammes KG
Millimetre amm
Centimetre cm

A.6 Standard Measurements

All units of weights and measurements shall have the meaning ascribed to them by the Weights and Measures Ordinance,
CP. 426.

A.7 Dimensions and Details

Figured dimensions on the drawings shall be followed in preference to scaled dimensions and drawings to a large scale
shall be followed in preference to those of a smaller scale except for reinforced concrete drawings and details in which
case only figured dimensions shall be followed.

A.8 Drawings

Before tendering the Contractor should examine the drawings which may be seen at the offices of the Architect during
normal office hours, and shall satisfy himself regarding their detail as no claim by reason of ignorance in this connection
will be entertained.

A.9 Shop Drawings

Shop Drawings of all fabricated work to be done by the Contractor shall be submitted to the Architect for approval, and
no work shall be fabricated by the Contractor, save at his own risk, until approval has been given.
These shop drawings shall be submitted in quadruple.

The Contractor shall submit 4 copies of shop drawings sufficiently in advance of requirements to afford the Architect
ample time for checking them; including time for correcting, resubmission and rechecking if necessary, and no claim for
extension of the Contract period will be granted to the Contractor by reason of his failure in this respect. Two final
corrected, certified copies shall be filed with the Architect.

All shop drawings submitted must bear the stamp of approval of the Contractor as evidence that the drawings have been
checked by the Contractor. Any drawings submitted without this stamp of approval will not be considered and will be
returned to the Contractors for proper resubmission.

If the shop drawings show variations from the requirements of the Contract because of standard shop practice or other
reason, the Contractor shall make specific mention of such variation in his letter of transmittal in order that, if accepted,
suitable action may be taken for proper adjustment, otherwise the Contractor will not be relieve of the responsibility for
executing the work in accordance with the Contract even though such shop drawings have approved.

Where a shop drawing as submitted by the Contractor indicates a departure from the Contract which the Architect deems
to be a minor adjustment in the interest of the Employer not involving a change in the Contract Sum or extension of time,
the Architect may approval the drawing.

Specification
Generally (2/A/3)
A.9 Shop Drawings (Cont’d)

The approval of shop drawings will be general and shall not relieve the Contractor from the responsibility for adhesive to
the Contract, nor shall it relieve him of the responsibility for any error which may exist.

A.10 Preambles to Sections

To avoid long description and repetition, certain descriptions of measured items refer to the preambles by quoting the
clause prefix or by using the words “as described”. Whether so referred to or not all instructions and information
contained in the preambles clauses shall be deemed to have been taken into consideration in pricing the whole of these
bills.

A.11 Pricing

A pricing or rate is to be entered against each item where provision is made in the Bills of Quantities whether quantities
are stated or not. Items against which no rate or price is entered shall be deemed to be covered by other prices or rates in
the Bills and no other adjustment will be made in respect of such omission

A.12 Examination of rates and Prices

The priced Bills of Quantities will be examined prior to the appointment of the Contractor and the signing of the Contract
in order to ascertain that the quantities are correctly extended and that the summations are in order.

In the event of any error being found in the computation of the tender Sum, such error will be notified to the tenderer,
who will then have the opportunity of confirming or withdrawing his tender. If the tender as submitted is confirmed, all
rates and prices (excluding preliminary items, contingencies, prime cost sums and any profit and attendance added
thereto by the tenderer and Insurance and Surety costs) inserted therein are to be considered reduced or increased or
increased in the same proportion as the corrected total of priced items exceeds or falls short of the original total of such
items.

A.13 Abbreviations etc.

Words importing the singular only also include the plural and vise versa where the context requires.

The term “and the like” used in these bills shall mean analogous work to that described in accordance with the groupings
indicated in the Standard Method of Measurement.

The term “the works” shall mean the whole of the works envisaged by this Contract, including, unless expressly stated
otherwise, the works of Nominated Sub-Contractors, Nominated Suppliers, Local Authorities and Public Undertakings.

The followings have been used in the description of items in these bills:-

B.S. British Standard Specification

B.S.C.P. British Standard Code of Practice
SMM Standard Method of Measurement of Building
Works for East Africa (First Edition)
Metric October 1970
Cl Preamble clause number
P.C. Prime Cost
(m.s.) (measured separately)

A.14 Queries during tendering

Any doubt or obscurity as to the meaning or intention of the Contract Documents, or any question arising, shall be taken
up in writing, before the Tender is submitted, with the Architect who will upon request, set out the intent and meaning of
any Part.

Specification
Generally
(2/A/4)
A.15 Preparation of Tender

No claim will be allowed for traveling or other expenses which may be incurred by the Contractor in visiting the site or
preparing the Tender for Works.

A.16 Bills of Quantities not to be used for ordering

The Quantities stated in these Bills of Quantities shall not be used for the ordering of materials.

Specification
Generally
(2/A/7)
 DEMOLITION AND ALTERATIONS

LIST OF CLAUSES

QUALIFICATIONS OF THE RULES OF THE SMM

C.1 Shoring and scaffolding

DEMOLITIONS

C.2 Generally

C.3 Credit for materials

C.4 Old materials to be re-used

C.5 Temporary screens

C.6 Making good

C.7 Existing services

C.8 Adjoining property

Specification
Demolitions and Alterations
(2/C/1)
 DEMOLITIONS AND ALTERATIONS
QULIFICATION OF THE RULES OF THE SMM

C.1 Shoring and scaffolding

Notwithstanding the provisions of SMM Clause C.1 (b), the descriptions of all items of demolitions and alterations shall
be deemed to include all incidental shoring and scaffolding.

DEMOLITIONS

C.2 Generally

Whenever materials are stated to be taken down, demolished or removed, prices shall, unless otherwise stated, include for
carting away the said items along with all other debris arising to a tip to be provided by the Contractor. Debris is to be
carted away daily as it accumulates so as not to clutter up the site. The location of the tip shall be to the approval of the
Architect.

Masonry and concrete structure shall be sprayed with water before demolition to reduce the resultant nuisance from dust
to a minimum.

C.3 Credit for materials

All materials arising from the demolitions shall become the property of the Contractor unless described as set aside for
re-use or as to become the property of the Employer or such similar expression.

C.4 Old materials to be re-used

Where described as to be set aside or stored for re-use, old materials shall be cleaned, repaired and serviced as necessary,
to render them, in the opinion of the Architect, perfectly suitable for re-use, and shall be properly stored until required for
such re-use.

C.5 Temporary screens

If required by the Architect moveable screens shall be placed in the positions instructed by him and shall be repositioned
throughout the Contract as directed by him.
The prices entered against items of demolitions and alterations shall be deemed to include any temporary screens
required by the Architect other than those for which measured items have been included hereinafter.

C.6 Making good

Where described as making good, this shall include making good finishings up to, and to match exactly, old finishings.
Decoration shall be deemed to be included when specifically mentioned.

C.7 Existing services

In the disconnection and sealing of services the Contractor is to comply with the requirements of the Authorities
concerned and is to allow in his prices for serving all notices and paying all fees as necessary. The Contractor must take
all necessary precautions and will be responsible for damage caused to any underground cables or services which exist on
site.

C.8 Adjoining property

In the Execution of the demolition work the Contractor is to ensure that adjoining public and private properties, roads,
pavements, drains etc., are not damaged and the Contractor will be entirely responsible for any injury or damage to
persons or property resulting from the works in his contract.

Specification
Demolitions and Alterations
(2/C/2)
 EXCAVATION AND EARTHWORK
LIST OF CLAUSES
DEFINITIONS

D.1 Removing trees, hedges or the like

D.2 Surface level

D.3 Clearing site

D.4 Rock

GENERALLY

D.5 Levels

D.6 Bore holes and nature of the soil

D.7 Unauthorized excavations

D.8 Borrow pits

MATERIALS

D.9 Blinding

D.10 Hardcore

D.11 Approved filling for filling under floors

D.12 Soil for backfilling around foundation

WORKMANSHIP

D.13 Generally

D.14 Removal of obstructions

D.15 Bottoms of excavations to be approved

D.16 Disposal of excavated material

D.17 Excavation below required levels

D.18 Timbering, planking and strutting, etc.

D.19 Timbering, planking and strutting etc, left in

D.20 Filling

D.21 Consolidation of hardcore

D.22 Existing services

D.23 Protection

Specification
Excavation and Earthwork
(2/D/1)
D.24 Anti termite treatment

D.25 Method of measurement

Specification
Excavation and Earthwork
(2/D/2)
 EXCAVATION AND EARTHWORKS

DEFINITIONS

D.1 Removing trees, hedges and the like

The removal from site of trees, stumps and roots, hedges, bushes, scrub, undergrowth and the like shall be
deemed to be included with the items for cutting down and grubbing up roots.

D.2 Surface level

The term “Surface level” shall mean the ground level after clearing site.

D.3 Clearing site

The description of clearing site shall be deemed to include clearing and removing from the site of all loose
debris and rubbish, bushes, scrub, undergrowth, vegetation and small trees (i.e. not exceeding 600 mm girth),
and grubbing up their roots.

D.4 Rock

The term ‘rock’ shall mean any natural material which cannot be dislodged by a pick and which can only be removed by
the use of compressors or by blasting or wedging. This classification does not include materials such as loose rock,
concrete or other materials that can be removed by means other than drilling and blasting or drilling and wedging, but
which for reasons of economy in excavating; the Contractor prefers to remove by drilling and wedging.

Unless specifically stated hereafter, the Contractor must assume that permission to use explosive to remove rock will be
refused and he must therefore price for removing rock by compressors etc. only.

GENERALLY

D.5 Level

The levels shown on the various drawings relate to the ground floor finished floor levels.

The Contractor shall be responsible for setting up and maintaining a site datum level accurately ascertained from this
work. Immediately following the issue of the Order to Commence, the Contractor shall carry out and record a check level
grid of the site which shall be agreed between the Architect and the Contractor within one week of the above Order being
given, no alteration of levels shall be undertaken until agreement has been reached and the Architect’s instructions has
been received.

D.6 Bore holes and nature of the soil

It will be deemed that the Contractor has inspected the drawings and site and has consulted all available
information concerning subsoil conditions before submitting the Tender. In making information available on
subsoil conditions, the Employer does not in any way absolve the Contractor from his responsibilities, nor is it
guaranteed that similar conditions apply to any specific part of the site.

Specification
Excavation and Earthwork
(2/D/3)
D.7 Unauthorized excavation

The Contractor is prohibited from making excavations other than those approved by the Architect as necessary for the
works.

D.8 Borrow pits

No borrow pits will be allowed to be opened on the site.

MATERIALS

D.9 Blinding

Blinding shall be of the same materials as the hardcore be, crushed and graded from 4 mm upwards, free from clay,
chemical or other pollution, pests, weed roots and rubbish.

D.10 Hardcore

Hardcore shall be good, clean, hard, broken stone broken placing to pass a 100 mm ring and free from all rubbish.

D.11 Approved filling for filling under floors

Approved filling for filling under floors shall be clean, dry pit or river sand excavated material or subsoil free from clay,
roots and any impurities.

D.12 Soil for backfilling around foundations

Soil for backfilling around foundations shall be dry, clean subsoil free from clay, vegetable soil, roots and rubbish.

WORKMANSHIP

D.13 Generally

The Contractor shall control the grading around the building so as to prevent water running into excavated areas and int o
completed sections of the works.

D.14 Removal of obstructions

In the event of any derelict foundations, walls, slabs, kerbs, etc., being discovered upon the site of the works, they shall,
if below new foundations are completely removed to a level of 150 mm below the level of the excavation indicated on
the drawings. For graded or planted areas any such obstruction shall be removed to a depth of 600 mm below the finished
grade.

Filling voids caused by removal of such obstructions shall be executed in accordance with Clause D.20 herein

D.15 Bottoms of excavations to be approved

The Contractor shall give the Architect at least 48 hours notice (this time shall be doubled if the site of the works is more
than 100 kilometres from the nearest permanent office of the Architect or Engineer) when the excavations will be ready
for inspection. The bottom of every excavation will be inspected by the Architect and the level thereof agreed between
the Architect and the Contractor. If a good bearing bottom is not obtained at the level shown the Architect is to be
informed. No concrete is to be laid until the bottom has been approved and the level thereof taken. Any concrete work or
other work done before such approval, shall, if so directed be removed and new work substituted after excavations have
been approved, all at the Contractors expense.

Specification
Excavation and Earthwork
(2/D/4)
D.15 Bottoms of excavations to be approved (Cont’d.)

Notwithstanding such approval, any bottom which becomes waterlogged or otherwise spoilt after approval, shall be
cleaned out and reformed to the Architect’s approval before any concrete is placed.

D.16 Disposal of excavated material

Vegetable soil shall be spread and leveled where directed by the Architect on site. Surplus excavated material where
directed or required shall be removed from the site to a tip, the location of which shall first be approved by the Architect
in writing. All fees and charges in connection there with shall be deemed to be included in the Contract Sum.

D.17 Excavation below required levels

Should any excavation be taken below the required levels or the depths necessary to obtain a suitable bottom, the
Contractor will be required to fill in the excavation to the proper level with concrete of the same specification for the
foundations at his own expense.

D.18 Timbering, planking and strutting, etc

The Contractor shall provide all necessary timbering, planking and strutting, etc., to uphold the faces of excavations,
which shall only be removed when it is safe to do so.

D.19 Timbering, planking, strutting, etc., left in

Where the Architect instruct or agrees that it is necessary for the safety of the works to leave in certain timbering,
planking and strutting, etc., such timber shall be measured and agreed before covering up.

D.20 Filling

Return filling around foundations and filling to make up levels under floors and pavings shall not be deposited until the
formation level has been approved by the Architect. In no case shall fill be deposited on a muddy formation. Filling shall
be deposited in layers not exceeding 250 mm in depth before compaction and shall be compacted by rolling, pneumatic
temping or other approved means over the whole of the area. If necessary the filling shall be allowed to dry or be
moistened to the correct moisture content before compaction. The finished surface shall be approved by the Architect
prior to further Construction work thereon.

The Contractor shall afford every assistance to the specialist executing site sterilization to enable each layer to be treated
separately.

Filling around foundations in layers shall not proceed without each layer being so treated.

No excavation or foundation work shall be filled in or covered up until all measurements necessary for the adjustment of
variations have been made. Walling shall not be built upon the foundations until four days after depositing of concrete.

D.21 Consolidation of hardcore

Hardcore shall be consolidated with a roller, vibrating roller, or mechanical punner to a compaction equivalent to that
obtained with a 2.5 to 3 tone roller, care being taken that no damage is done to the foundation walls.

Hardcore shall be blinded and have the interstices filled to receive concrete beds and the like with blinding as described
herein. Before placing concrete hardcore beds shall be well watered through a sprinkler rose, and rolled, to prevent water
absorption from the concrete. (Cont’d.)

Specification
Excavation and Earthwork
(2/D/5)
D.21 Consolidation of hardcore (Cont’d.)

Where described as blinded to receive building paper or polythene or any other membrane the blinding shall be finished
and compacted with fine material which will not cause the membrane to puncture under wheel or foot traffic or by the
placing of concrete thereon.

D.22 Existing services

Active existing services shall be adequately protected from damage. Where active services are encountered but not
shown on the drawings, the Architect shall be notified by the contractor.

Where inactive services are encountered upon the site of the works, they shall be removed or sealed off in accordance
with the direction of the Architect.

D.23 Protection

The Contractor shall protect all graded and filled areas from the actions of the elements. Any settlement or washing that
occurs prior to acceptance of the works shall be repaired and grades re-established to the required elevations and slopes.

D.24 Anti termite treatment

Anti termite treatment shall be carried out using ‘Gladiator 1.0%’ solution or other chemical approved by the Architect in
writing, diluted to a water emulsion containing a minimum of 1.0% of the chemical.

The treatment shall be applied to the whole area of the hardcore bed immediately prior to the placing of the concrete floor
slab at the rate of 7 litres per square meter, and to the backfilling on both sides of all perimeter walls at the rate of 80
litres per cubic meter of backfilling on both sides of all perimeter walls at the rate of 80 litres per cubic meter of
backfilling. Each compacted layer of backfilling shall be separately treated.

Treatment shall not be applied whilst it is raining or to surfaces of backfilling which are wet.

The Contractor’s attention is drawn to the fact that ‘Gladiator’ is toxic to animal and human life, and he shall prevent
contamination of water supply systems, shall cover up and protect treated areas immediately after treatment and post
written notices informing of the treatment at prominent points on the site of the building.

Immediately following treatment, the Contractor shall provide to the Architect for onward transmission to the Employer,
a written five year guarantee which guarantees

(a) that the chemical used complies with this specification and has been used in the concentrations stated herein,

(b) the guarantee shall be continuous for a period of five years from the date of treatment,

(c) that should infestation by any termites appear before the end of the five year period, the Contractor will return and
retreat as necessary to eliminate the infestation entirely and at his own cost on each occasion that infestation appears
within the five year period,

The Contractor shall carry out annual inspections commencing three months after treatment and continuing to the
end of the guarantee period to ascertain the presence of termites, and should any presence be found, the Contractor
shall retreat as necessary to eliminate any infestation entirely and at his own cost on each occasion that infestation is
found.

Specifications
Excavation and Earthwork
(2/D/6)
D.25 Method of measurement

The prices throughout this Document are to include for digging in any type of ground including loose or compacted
hardcore, rubble debris and the like, roots, or normal obstructions, with the exception of rock as defined herein and
excluding any existing foundations, walls and similar hard substances. The Contractor must give notification to the
Architect or his representatives as soon as he considers rock as defined herein or existing foundations are encountered so
that its extent can be agreed with the Architect, Clerk of Works, or Quality Surveyor before the work is carried out or
covered up. Payment for such excavation will not be allowed unless this procedure is followed.

The formation and removal of temporary spoil heaps and multiple handling or excavated material shall be deemed to be
included in the prices for returning excavated material around foundations, earth filling and removing surplus excavated
material from site.

Excavation for plain concrete foundation has been measured to the net sizes required by concrete dimensions. Formwork
has been measured to the sides of all reinforced concrete foundations or bases, together with the necessary working space
allowance required under the provisions of SMM Clause D5(f). should the Architect direct or approve the pouring of
concrete to reinforced foundations or bases against the face of excavations, such adjustment will be measured and valued
in accordance with the Conditions of Contract.

Rates for excavation shall be deemed to include for leveling, trimming and compacting bottoms and any additional
excavation required for planking and strutting.

Specification
Excavation and Earthwork
(2/D/7)
 CONCRETE WORK

LIST OF CLAUSES
QUALIFICATIONS OF THE RULES OF THE SMM

F.1 Beds or the like laid in bays

F.2 Steel bar reinforcement

F.3 Wrought formwork

F.4 Formwork to grooves, chases, chamfers and mould

F.5 Making good

DEFINITIONS

F.6 Designations of concrete mixes

F.7 Tamping

F.8 keying

F.9 Precast concrete units

GENERALLY

F.10 Standards

F.11 Bar bending schedules

MATERIALS

F.12 Samples

F.13 Cement

F.14 Aggregates

F.15 Reinforcement

F.16 Expansion joint material

F.17 Expansion joint sealer

F.18 Wall ties

F.19 Water

F.20 Storage of materials

F.21 Proportions of concrete mix

F.22 Testing of materials generally

Specification
Concrete Work
(2/F/1)
F.23 Testing of cement

F.24 Testing of aggregate

F.25 Testing of reinforcement

F.26 Testing of concrete in the field

F.27 Damage or unsatisfactory materials

WORKMANSHIP

F.28 Plant and method

F.29 Measurement and Mixing

F.30 Reinforcement

F.31 Inspection of reinforcement

F.32 Formwork

F.33 Tolerances

F.34 Placing and compaction

F.35 Column plinths

F.36 Blinding concrete

F.37 Waterproof concrete

F.38 Construction joints

F.39 Striking times

F.40 Curing

F.41 Holes and chases and casting in

F.42 Tests of completed structural members

F.43 Protection

F.44 Precast finishes

F.45 Surface finishes

F.46 Method of measurement

Specification
Concrete work
(2/F/2)
 CONCRETE WORK
QUALIFICATIONS OF THE RULES OF THE SMM

F.1 Beds or the like laid in bays

Notwithstanding the provisions of SMM Clause F.5 (c) the descriptions of work laid in bays shall be deemed to include
formwork between the bays.

F.2 Steel bar reinforcement

Notwithstanding the nomenclature of SMM Clauses F.16 (b) and F.17 (a), the description of steel bar and fabric
reinforcement shall be deemed to include bends, hooks, tying wire, distance blocks and ordinary spacers, unless
otherwise described.

F.3 Wrought formwork

Notwithstanding the nomenclatures of SMM Clause F.19 (f), formwork required to produce fair concrete surface is
herein qualified by a description of the finish required.

F.4 Formwork to grooves chases, chamfers and moldings

Notwithstanding the provisions of SMM Clause F.23 (b), the descriptions of formwork shall be deemed to include
forming chamfers not exceeding 50 mm wide and forming splayed internal angle not exceeding 25 mm wide.

F.5 Making good

Withstanding the provisions of SMM Clause F.50 the descriptions of holes and mortises shall be deemed to include
making good concrete.

DEFINITIONS

F.6 Designations of concrete mixes

The various mixes of concrete are designated in the subsequent measured items by the following criteria:-

Nominal mixes: By the weight proportions of whole bags of ordinary Portland cement to fine and coarse aggregates and
by the maximum size of coarse aggregate. The Contractor shall regularly submit details giving specific gravities and
moisture content of aggregate.

F.7 Tamping
The term “tamping” as used herein in conjunction with the phrase “treating surfaces of unset concrete” shall mean the
final compaction and surface finish to be applied to unset concrete beds, or the like, with a steel shod beam tamper, either
manually or mechanically operated unless otherwise stated. The resulting surface finish shall have a slightly ribbed
appearance.

F.8 Keying
The term “keying” as used herein in conjunction with the phrase “treating surfaces of unset concrete” shall mean the
preparation of beds, or the like to receive insitu pavings by raking with a standard horticultural rake whilst the concrete is
still green and when the concrete is set and cured, protecting the raked surfaces with a layer of clean sand and removing
the sand immediately before the insitu paving is laid.

Specification
Concrete Work
(2/F/3)
F.9 Precast concrete units

Unless otherwise described in the measured items, precast concrete units are deemed to be basically rectangular in cross
section and rough on exposed faces. Reinforcement bars shall have hooked ends. Bedding and pointing mortar shall be
either cement-sand or cement-lime mortar, as appropriate, and units be deemed to be fixed by hoisting, bedding and
building in unless otherwise described.

Nominally non-reinforced units shall contain any reinforcement the Contractor may wish to introduce for handling
purpose.

GENERALLY

F.10 Standards

The whole of the concrete works and testing thereof shall comply with BS 8110 parts 1, 2 & 3 and with the subsequent
clauses of this Document and shall be carried out in strict accordance with the working drawings and instructions of the
Architect and or the Consultant Structural Engineer.

A competent person shall be employed whose first duty it will be to supervise all stages in the preparation and placing of
the concrete. All cubes should be made and site tests carried out under his direct supervision. This person shall also be
responsible for keeping an accurate record of the dates on which concrete is poured.

F.11 Bar bending schedules

The Consultant Structural Engineer will prepare and provide all necessary bar bending schedules and explanatory details.

MATERIALS

F.12 Samples

Samples of all materials are to be submitted for approval of the Architect at least one week before it is desired to
commence deliveries. All condemned materials are to be removed from the site within 24 hours.

F.13 Cement

Cement shall comply with British Standards as follows:

Portland cement - B.S. 12
Rapid hardening cement - B.S. 12
Except as regards the addition of colorant to BS 1014 which should not exceed 5% of cement by weight

Sulphate resisting Portland cement complies with BS 4027.

Rapid hardening cement may be used in lieu of ordinary Portland cement only with the prior approval of the Architect or
Engineer provided that all conditions applying to its use are strictly observed. Any additional expenses in connection
with the use of such cement shall be borne by the Contractor.

The use of high alumna cement will not be permitted. All cement shall be delivered to the site in sealed bags bearing the
mark of the manufacturer. Re-bagged cement, cement in torn bags will not be allowed on the site.

Each consignment of cement shall be accompanied by the manufacturer’s certificate showing that a representative sample
of the consignment has been tested and complies with the appropriate specification. From time to time as requested by
the Architect/Engineer, copies or the cement manufacture’s test certificates shall be delivered to the Architect/Engineer
or his representative on the site promptly, but such documents shall not preclude the Architect or Engineer from rejecting
any cement which does not in every way comply with the specification.

Specification
Concrete Work
(2/F/4)
F.13 Cement (Contd)

Any cement, which has failed to pass the tests or has been damaged by water or contaminated in any way on site, shall
immediately be put into bags and removed from the site.

F.14 Aggregates

Aggregate shall comply with British Standard as follows:

Fine - B.S. 882 Table 2 Zones 1 to 3 only

Coarse - B.S. 882 Table 1
“All in” - B.S. 882 Tables 3

Each type of aggregate shall be obtained from one approved source, capable of maintaining adequate supplies of
consistently graded material throughout the Contract. Aggregates for exposed concrete shall be free from all impurities
likely to cause discoloration and shall be on consistent colour throughout the work.

Fine aggregates and sand shall be clean, sharp, coarse, hard material and equal at all times to the samples, which shall be
deposited with and approved by the Engineer. The caustic soda test for organic impurities shall show a colour not deeper
than that of the standard solution. The settling test for natural sand shall be made and after being allowed to settle for
three hours the layer of silt deposit on the coarse material shall not exceed 10%.

The Contractor shall supply all necessary equipment for the testing of fine aggregates and sand for the use of the
Engineer.

Coarse aggregates shall be hard, clean gravel or broken stone from approved quarries and shall be free from earth,
decomposed stone, and extraneous matter. They shall conform to B.S. 882 Table 1 and shall be “Grade Aggregate” 19
mm to 5 mm. Thin, elongated, friable, flaky or laminated pieces; mica or shale shall only be present in such small
quantities as not to affect adversely the strength and durability of the concrete. The amount of fine particles occurring in a
free state or as loose adherent shall not exceed 1% when determined by the laboratory sedimentation test. After twenty-
four hours in water, a previously dried sample shall not gain more than 10% in weight.

Each grade of aggregate shall be stored in the works in separate heaps so that there shall be no possibility of any inter-
mixing. Any materials which have become inter-mixed shall be removed from the site forthwith by the Contractor.

If, in the opinion of the Engineer, the aggregate is dirty or adulterated in any manner, it shall be washed and/or screened
by the Contractor to the satisfaction of the Engineer.

F.15 Reinforcement

Reinforcement shall comply with the following standards:

a. Mild steel rod reinforcement shall be hot rolled grade 250 complying with B.S.4466 and B.S.4449

b. (i) hot rolled deformed high tensile bars having a guaranteed minimum yield stress of 460 N/mm2 and other
physical properties complying with B.S. 4466 and B.S.4449.

Or

(ii) Cold worked steel bars complying with B.S.4466 and B.S. 4449

c. Welded steel fabric reinforcement shall comply with B.S.4483

All reinforcement shall be in the “diameter” and metric range and the substitution of “square twisted” or imperial
range shall be allowed but only at no extra cost to the Employer

Specification
Concrete Work
(2/F/5)
F.15 Reinforcement (Cont’d.)
.
The Contractor will be required to submit at his own expense certified test data of the following characteristics; ultimate
tensile stress, yield point stress, elongation, cold bend test. Should such certificates not be submitted by the manufacturer,
the contractor shall have the requisite tests made at his own expense at an independent testing laboratory.

F.16 Expansion joint materials

Expansion joint material shall be “Flex cell” or other approved bitumen impregnated fibre board.

F.17 Expansion joint sealer

Expansion joint sealer shall be “Sealestik” or other approved cold, gun or knife applied mastic, or “Plastijoint”, or
“Plastic” grade 88 applied hot. All manufactured by Expandite Ltd. All sealer shall be applied strictly in accordance with
the manufacturer’s instructions.

F.18 Wall tiles

Where block walls abut columns or solid concrete walls two 6 mm diameter steel reinforcement bar ties are to be cast
into the concrete at vertical intervals of 450 mm. Ties to be 300 mm long and project 150 mm into blockwork.

F.19 Water

Water shall be from the mains and kept free of any impurities and acid or alkaline substances in suspension or in
solution, and shall be stored in proper storage tanks to the approval of the Architect.

F.20 Storage of materials

Cement shall be kept dry and used in rotation of deliveries. If delivered in bags these shall be stored off the ground in a
well ventilated and weatherproof shed used exclusively for this purpose.

The shed is to be sufficiently large to contain a working stock and provided with partitions or such other means as may
be necessary, to ensure the effectual separation of the various consignments and type of cement. Stacking of cement in
bags over a height of ten bags will not be permitted. Cement may be delivered in bulk containers provided additional
suitable arrangements are made for bulk storage on site to the approval of the Architect/Engineer.

Aggregates shall be stored at mixer positions on drained concrete paved areas, with stout dividing walls between
different sizes and types of aggregates. It shall be allowed to stand for at least 24 hours before being used.

Reinforcement shall be stored by type, size and length, either off the ground or on clean surfaced areas, and shall be kept
free from rust
.
F.21 Proportion of concrete mix

The quantity of cement shall be measured by weight and each batch of concrete is to use one or more whole bags. The
quantity of fine aggregate and coarse aggregate shall be measured separately by weight batching plant. Volume mixing
will not be permitted.

For grading tests the Contractor shall supply and deliver at his own cost to the Nominated Testing Authority,
samples of the aggregates which the Contractor proposes to use, consisting of not less than 50 kilograms
weight in coarse aggregate and not less than 25 kilograms weighting fine aggregate. (Cont’d.)

Specification
Concrete Work
(2/F/6)
F.21 Proportion of concrete mix (Cont’d.)

It is the Contractor’s responsibility to ensure that the subsequent deliveries of aggregate conform to the grading analysis
of the approved samples.

The proportions of materials to be used for the preliminary cube tests, and subsequent batching, shall be ascertained by
calculation from the results of the aggregate grading tests carried out by the Nominated Testing Authority.

Preliminary concrete cubes shall be made by the Contractor on site, as required by the Engineer, and tested by the
Nominated Testing Authority. As a result of these definite weights of each material for batching shall be ascertained and
agreed with the Engineer. Thereafter these proportions shall be adhered to throughout the works and may be varied only
by instructions given by the Engineer.

The weights of damp aggregates must be adjusted to take into account the weight of water in the aggregates, and this in
turn will affect the amount of water to be added to the mix.

Through the carrying out of the Contract, “Works Cube Tests” are to be made from concrete drawn from newly laid
concrete or concrete about to be placed in position, such cubes being made when directed by the Engineer and in his
presence. Such cubes shall be made in 150 mm cube steel or cast iron moulds and shall be marked and cured strictly in
accordance with the Appendices of the code of practice, and shall be forwarded carriage paid in time for testing at the
required age to a testing laboratory to be nominated by the Engineer. Four cubes shall be made on each occasion,
concrete for each cube being from a different batch. Two cubes shall be forwarded in time for testing at the age of seven
days from casting and two cubes in time for testing in twenty eight days.
Each cubes shall be marked with the date of casting and a distinctive reference number in accordance with a system
agreed by the Engineer. A record shall be kept of the position from which the concrete for each set of cubes was drawn,
or to which it was about to be placed

At least three sets of cubes shall be cast during each week concrete is being cast including sets of cubes for each quality
of concrete used during the period

Concrete is required to have the properties and give the strength in Newton per square millimeter as follows:-

Class Quality Max. size Max water Min crushing strength

of coarse cement of Works Test Cubes
Aggregate ration by
Weight
7 days 28 days

31.5/20 1:1:2 20 mm 0.45 23 31.5

26.5/20 1:1.5:3 20 mm 0.50 19 26.5

21./20 1:2:4 20 mm 0.58 15.5 21

21/13 1:2:4 13 mm 0.58 15.5 21

13.5/25 1:3:6 25 mm 0.60 9 13.50

1:4:8 !;4:8 40 mm 0.60 - -

1:10 1:10 “All – in” aggregate - -

Specification
Concrete Work
(2/F/7)
F.21 Proportion of concrete mix (Contd)

The above properties and crushing strengths are to be considered as the minimum standard that will be accepted in the
finish at works. The average crushing strengths should be at least 15% higher than the minimum permissible values given
in the above table.

If the strength required in the table are not attained and maintained throughout the carrying out of the contract, the
contractor will be required to increase the proportion of cement or substitute better aggregates at his own cost so as to
give concrete which does comply with the requirements of this clause. The contractor may be required to remove and
replace at his own cost any concrete which fails to attain the required strength as ascertained by the works cube tests.

F.22 Testing of materials generally

The Contractor shall include in his Tender prices for the execution of his part of operations specifications specified for
testing herein and for supply of the requisite equipment. After specified initial testing and approval of materials, it is the
Contractor’s responsibility to ensure and to demonstrate by the submission of further similar samples when so required
that subsequent deliveries conform to the quality, grading and (where applicable), colour of the approved samples.

F.23 Testing of cement

Before work commences and when subsequently directed, the Contractor shall take 6kg samples, in accordance with B.S.
12 procedure, of cement and deliver these in tins approved by the Engineer to an approved Testing Laboratory for testing.

Each consignment of cement to the site, which shall be accompanied by the manufacturer’s advice note and forwarded
without delay to the Engineer, shall be delivered to the site at least 7 days before it is intended to be used in the works so
that the required tests may be carried out without retarding the progress of the works.

F.24 Testing of aggregate

Before work commences and when subsequently instructed, the Contractor shall take site sample, by methods given in
B.S. 812 and deliver these to the nominated Testing Authority for testing.

Such samples shall be submitted for approved at least 7 days before they are intended to be used in the works.

F.25 Testing of reinforcement

Should the Engineer require reinforcement to be tested, it shall be tested at the Contractor’s expense and representative
test pieces of such reinforcement to be used in the work are to be sent to an approved laboratory for testing.

Manufacturer’s test reports of reinforcement shall be supplied to the Engineer for all reinforcement to be used in the
works.

If such tests reveal the steel not meeting the specified standards, the Contractor will carry out the rectifications in the
reinforcement to the direction of the Engineer at his own expense.

F.26 Testing of concrete in the field

(i) Trial mixture

Prior to the commencement of the actual concreting work, a trial mix of the required concrete, as described herein
shall be made by the Contractor and tested by an approved laboratory at the Contractor’s expense, in order to
check and establish the actual working crushing strength of the required concrete mix.

Specification
Concrete Work
(2/F/8)
(ii) Workability

The total water content in the mixture determines its consistency and once a consistency of a trial mix has been
approved it must remain constant throughout the Contract. In order to help the concrete maintain the desired
consistence the slump of an approved trial, mix shall be measured, thereafter all mixes must give the slump as the
approved trial mix. The slump shall be determined by test as described in B.S 1881 Parts 102-104,106,107 and DD
83 mm Part 2. In general the approved slump shall be in the order of 75 mm for hand compacted concrete and 35
mm for vibrated concrete. The slump test shall be made on concrete actually being placed in the works at the
commencement of each period of concrete and at such other times as instructed.

(iii) Testing specimens

The moulds for test cubes shall be of metal and true to shape to give a 150mm and shall be oiled before filling.
The mould shall be filled with concrete taken from that actually placed in the works, the concrete being selected
by the Engineer from a point as near as possible to the position of placing. The filling of the moulds shall be done
immediately after the selection of the sample concrete and in such a way that the concrete in the moulds be truly
representative of that in the works.

The concrete shall be placed in the moulds in three layers of equal thickness, each layer being rammed with 25
strokes of a steel bar 40 mm diameter, (or equivalent), weighing 2 kg. If the concrete in the works be consolidated
by mechanical vibration, the test cube moulds shall be likewise vibrated after filling. Each cube shall be inscribed
with the date of manufacture and identification mark.

A record shall be kept for each batch of cubes showing the position in the works which the concrete represents, the
date of manufacture, the mixture and slump of the concrete, particulars of the cement and aggregate used, a
statement of whether or not the cubes are vibrated and other information relating to the subsequent history of the
cubes.

The moulds containing the test cubes shall be stored for 24 hours on the site in a damp place free from vibration.
At the end of this period the cubes shall be taken from the moulds and stored in damp sand for 20 days if they are
to be tested at 28 days or for 4 days if they are to be tested at 7 days.

The Contractor shall be instructed about the dispatch of the cubes to an approved laboratory and will pay all costs
relating to the tests. A set of four cubes will be required for not more than every 60 cubic metres of concrete
placed in the works.

(iv) Quality of specimens

The test specimens shall have the compressive strength specified for each quality of cement at the appropriate age
as given herein.

If the required strength is not obtained at 28 days, the Contractor will be required to cut out and reconstruct all
work represented by the test specimen at his own expense with all dispatch, always provided that the Engineer
may first permit further tests, at the Contractor’s expense, to prove the quality of he deposited concrete.

In the case of seven day works cube tests proving unsatisfactory, the work may be stopped, but shall not be liable
to rejection until the result of the twenty eight day test is known.

In the event of the results of the twenty eight day works Cube Tests proving unsatisfactory, the work represented
shall be immediately liable to rejection. The contractor may, however, be given the option of cutting three
specimens from the completed work subject to the direction of the engineer, and preparing there from test cubes or
cores which shall be sent to the Testing Laboratory for testing as for works cube tests

Should the average strength of these specimens attain the specified minimum twenty eight day strength, the work
will, subject to the Engineer’s discretion, be accepted. (Cont’d.)

Specification
Concrete Work
(2/F/9)
 (v) Quality of specimens (Cont’d.)

Alternatively, the Engineer may instruct the Contractor to make a loading test as described hereinafter. The cost
off all cutting, preparation of specimens shall be borne by the Contractor. The cost of all delays on site due to
concrete not attaining the desired strength, or caused by investigation of defects, cutting away and making good,
shall be entirely the Contractor’s responsibility

F.27 Damaged or unsatisfactory materials

All materials, which have been damaged, contaminated or have deteriorated, or which do not comply in any way with the
requirements of the specification, shall be rejected and shall be immediately removed from the site.

No materials shall be stored or stacked on suspended floors without the Engineer’s prior approval.

Should any of the samples tested be found, in the opinion of the Engineer, in any respect unsatisfactory or likely to
produce unsound work, the whole parcel, consignment or load from which samples were taken will be rejected, and the
contractor shall forthwith remove it from the site. Notwithstanding that any sample of the material may have passed the
test, the Engineer may later reject such parcels, consignments or loads if he shall decide that the quality has deteriorated.

The contractor at his own expense shall remove from the site, without delay, all rejected material. Any delay caused by
such rejection will not in any way relieve the contractor from his responsibility with regard to the completion within the
time limit (s) specified. Any bag of cement that is opened shall be used on the same day or be discarded from the work.

WORKMANSHIP

F.28 Plant and method

Before the commencement of any work, the contractor shall submit the following for the Engineer’s written approval:-

(i) The concreting method, including the size and type of machines for weighing and mixing concrete and the
methods of transporting, placing and compacting.

(ii ) Details of formwork proposals, clearly indicating the general method of construction and assembly, the methods of
achieving surface finishes required herein, including linings, fixing of linings together with positions of
joints and the make and type of mould oil proposed.

(iii) The proposed position and type of every construction joint not already shown on the Engineer’s drawings.

Such approval by the Engineer shall not be deemed to relieve the Contractor of his obligations to comply with any of the
provisions herein.

Concrete mixing and discharge from mixers shall be under permanent cover to the Engineer’s approval.

F.29 Measurement and mixing

All cement is to be measured by weight, the 50 kg bag of cement being used as a unit.

Specification
Concrete Work
(2/F/10)
F.29 Measurement and mixing (Cont’d.)

The amount of water shall be the minimum required to produce a dense cohesive concrete of adequate workability, to be
determined by trial mixes. This amount shall be accurately gauged and adjusted from time to time to compensate for
variations in moisture content of the aggregate by an approved method.

All concrete shall be mixed in a batch type mechanical mixer of approved type having a drum rotating about a horizontal
or inclined axis. The speed of the drum is to be not more than twenty and not less than fourteen revolutions per minute.

Each mixer is to be fitted with a water measuring device capable of accurate measurement to five litres for one cubic
meter mixers and prorata for smaller sizes and so arranged that the accuracy is not affected by variations in the pressure
of the water supply line. The fine and coarse aggregate and the cement shall be mixed for at least four turns, after which
the required amount of water shall be added gradually while the mixer is in motion and the concrete mixed for not less
than one and a half minutes to uniform colour and consistency.

The volume of concrete mixed in any one batch is not to exceed the rated capacity of the mixer.

The whole of the mixed batch is to be removed before materials for a fresh batch enter the drum.

Concrete as mixed in accordance with the foregoing shall not be modified by the addition of further water or in any other
manner. On the cessation of work, including all stoppages exceeding twenty minutes, or any change of type of cement
used in the mix, the mixer and all handling plant shall be washed out with clean water.

At least one slump test shall be made each day concreting is in progress, under the supervision of the Engineer.

F.30 Reinforcement

Reinforcement shall be free from all loose mill scale, loose rust, oil, grease or similar defects, immediately fore
placing the concrete. It shall be bent cold exactly to detail using an approved bending machine. Hooks, bobs,
bends, etc. where not, specifically detailed, and are to be in accordance with B.S. 4466 and B.S. 4449. Each bundle
of bent bars shall be clearly tagged with the bar list number.

Reinforcement shall be placed in the exact position shown on drawings with all inter-sections tack welded or
securely tied with 16 gauge soft iron tying wire. The designated cover shall be maintained by approved spacers,
chairs, bolsters or ties fixed to the reinforcement. These shall be dense concrete left with a wire brushed surface or
be dipped in grout before fixing. These blocks are particularly important where the surface of the concrete is
exposed to the weather or dampness. The contractor must ensure that the bars are securely fixed so as to maintain
their indicated positions during the progress of pouring, tamping or vibration of concrete. Six chairs are to be
provided around each column to hold top steel in position and chairs are to be made up of mild steel bars of
adequate diameter. The cost of providing and fixing these steel chairs must be allowed for by the contractor in his
rates for reinforcement generally. No laps or splices in bars shall be made except for those detailed on the
drawings without prior approval of the Engineer.

The size and position of the reinforcing bars or mesh shall be approved by the Engineer before concreting commence.
The insertion of reinforcement into concrete already placed the lengthening of bars by welding and the rebinding of
incorrectly bent bars will not be permitted.

For concrete having exposed surfaces, reinforcement shall be assembled and placed in such a manner as to avoid any
damage to formwork faces.

Where reinforced concrete slabs or walls are constructed against tanking, care shall be taken in positioning reinforcement
to avoid damage to tanking.

Unless otherwise shown upon the Engineer’s drawings, or specified in BS 8110, the reinforcement bars shall be given the
following cover to concrete. (Cont’d.)

Specification
Concrete Work
(2/F/11)
F.30 Reinforcement (Cont’d.)

In floor slabs, walls and similar thin paneling, a cover of 20 mm, or the size of the bar, whichever is the greater. In
beams and other such members, a cover of concrete of 30 mm to the main reinforcement, or the size of the bar,
whichever is greater.

In columns, a cover of concrete of 35 mm to main reinforcement, or the size of the bar, whichever is greater.

In foundations and column bases, a cover of 50 mm (in dry soil) to main reinforcement or the size of the bar,
whichever is greater. Where subsoil water exist a cover of 75 mm to main reinforcement or the size of the bar,
whichever is greater.

F.31 Inspection for reinforcement

When the placing of the reinforcement for particular section of the works is completed and before concreting
commences, the reinforcement will be inspected by the Engineer and no concrete shall be placed until the
Engineer’s approval has been given. The contractor shall give the Engineer 48 hour notice of the time when the
reinforcement will be ready for inspection. Where the distance of the site of the works is more than 100 kilometers
from the nearest office of the Engineer, this time be increased to 96 hours.

F.32 Formwork

Formwork shall be true to line, level, face and profile and be of robust construction adequately framed, braced,
strutted, cramped, tied and propped to restrict deformation due to constructional loads to not more than 3 mm, and
to entirely eliminate deformation of the form faces by warping or buckling. Wire ties will not be permitted.
Formwork shall be grout – tight under all conditions including vibration when specified or used.

Formwork shall be designed to allow prefabrication of conveniently sized elements to facilities ease of handling
and assembly, to permit striking without force shock or any damage whatever to the concrete member or
formwork faces and to permit the removal of sides without disturbing soffits and soffits without disturbing
necessary props. Propping shall be carried down to an approved bearing, shall not be supported by timber floors
and shall be arranged that formwork may be lowered smoothly.

Re-propping will not be permitted. Provision shall be made for cleaning out and draining.

Formwork shall be constructed of material or lined with material as may be necessary to achieve the finishes
specified herein and in such a manner as to eliminate screw or nail imperfections.

Before each use, form faces shall be treated with the minimum amount of approved mould oil necessary to obtain
a clean release. Mould oil shall not come into contact with the reinforcement.

The use of cement retarders will not be permitted except where a key for other finishes is required.

Before placing of the concrete, bolts and fixing shall be in position and cores and other devices used for forming
openings, holes, pockets, recesses, ducts or other cavities shall be fixed to the shuttering. Immediately prior to
concreting, formwork shall be thoroughly cleaned out and re-checked. No placing shall commence until the
Engineer has inspected the formwork and given his consent for concreting to proceed, but such consent shall not
relieve the contractor of his responsibility for its sufficiency. After striking, formwork shall be cleaned, stacked
and protected and before re-use shall be serviced, made good or replaced with new as may be necessary to
maintain the finish and standard.

Specification
Concrete Work
(2/F/12)
F.33 Tolerances

The maximum tolerances within concrete work shall be constructed are as follows:-

1. All setting out dimensions, and dimensions

Horizontally and vertically +/- 5 mm

2. Sections of concrete member +/- 3 mm

3. Levels of floor slabs, beams, lintels etc

(top and bottom) +/- 5 mm

4. Plumb of columns and walls in storey height +/- 5 mm

5. Plumb of columns and walls in full building

Height +/- 20 mm

6. Inside faces of lift shafts in storey height +/- 5 mm

7. Inside faces of lifts in full building

Height. +/- 15 mm

8. Concrete cover to reinforcement +/- 3 mm

No surface intended to be horizontal or vertical shall slope more than 2 mm in 1 meter.

Any rectification of work not constructed to the tolerance set out above, shall be entirely at the responsibility and
expense of the contractor.

F.34 Placing and compaction

No traffic whatsoever, wheeled or foot, shall take place over reinforcement or placed concrete and the contractor
shall provide all necessary stools, walkways, platforms and barrow runs. Concrete shall be placed in its final
position as rapidly as practicable by methods which preclude segregation or loss of ingredients and in any case,
within 30 minutes from the time that water is added to the mix; compaction shall be completed before initial set
commences. Partially set concrete shall not be re-worked or used. “Flowing” in formwork shall be avoided by
placing and compacting in shallow layers in quick succession.

Concrete shall be placed into the forms as less a height as possible and shall in no case be dropped from a height
of more than 1500 mm except with the approval of the Engineer.

When chuting is used, the inclination of the chute must be such as to allow the concrete to flow without the use of
excessive water and without segregation or loss of the ingredients. Details of any proposed chuting plant must be
approved by the Engineer before the plant is delivered to the site.

If the contractor wishes to distribute concrete by means of pumps, full details of the system must be made
available to the Engineer for approval.

Concrete shall be thoroughly compacted and carefully worked, with suitable tools, into formwork and round
reinforcement and fixtures so as to avoid displacement. A competent steel fixer shall attend throughout concreting
to correct any unavoidable displacement.

Compaction shall be by means of vibrations, these shall be of an approved pattern, of the immersion type, and
clamp-on external vibrators in adequate numbers shall be used only where the density of reinforcement precludes
immersion.

Attachment to reinforcement is expressly forbidden and accidental contact with reinforcement (Cont’d.)

Specification
Concrete Work
(2/F/13)
F.24 Placing and compaction (Cont'd.).

shall be avoided. Vibration shall be executed by a competent operative and shall not be carried out to the detriment
of adjacent partly hardened concrete.

An accurate record is to be kept by the contractor showing dates and times when various portions of the work were
concreted. The concrete foreman must not vary the approved mix or water content without the permission of the
representative of the Engineer. It may occasionally be found that in constricted structural members or where the
proportion of reinforcement to concrete is high, the workability of the concrete must be increased locally in order
to effect full compaction. Such increase in workability shall be achieved by an increase in the mortar content of
not more than 10% of the concrete by weight in any single batch and must be made only with the approval of the
representative of the Engineer.

The workability of the concrete must never be altered by the use of additional water or sand stone.

Foundations shall be placed their full depth in one operation and the top surface carefully leveled.

Concrete placed in timbered excavations shall be well rammed closed against the excavation face as the timber is
withdrawn.

Where the design of the work demands the placing of reinforced concrete against the sides of excavations without
the use of formwork, the earth face in such locations shall be prevented from crumbling or washing into the
concrete during placing and compaction by any efficient means, and care shall be taken to maintain the correct
cover to the reinforcement.

All concreting shall be continuous to completion or to an approved construction joint.

Methods of placing and vibration generally are to comply with the specifications for vibrated concrete as laid
down by the Cement and Concrete Association or the manufacturer of the vibrators used on the works.

During placing of all concrete a workman shall be in constant attendance with a hose pipe to wash off any cement
slurry which appears on the face of any previously poured concrete immediately it occurs.

Concrete shall not be poured in forms to a depth exceeding 1500 mm without the prior approval of the Engineer.

F.35 Column Plinths

Column kicker plinths not cast monolithically with the beam or slab will be allowed only at the discretion of the
Engineer and special precautions must be taken if permission is granted especially in regard to the quality of the
mix used, and the curing of the concrete.

F.36 Blinding concrete

No casting of any concrete on the ground shall take place until the ground has been passed as satisfactory by the
Architect. All ground to carry reinforced concrete shall be covered with a blinding layer of concrete 1:10 of the
thickness shown on the drawings, or if not so shown, a minimum of 50 mm.

F.37 Waterproof concrete

Wherever waterproof concrete is shown on the drawings it shall be mix 1:1.5:3 nominal and it shall be compacted
by mechanical vibration so that a dense and homogeneous mass of concrete is obtained throughout every pour of
the structure.

The Contractor shall be allowed at his own cost to add an approved waterproofing additive to the mix using it
strictly according to makers’ instructions.

Specification
Concrete Work
(2/F/14)
F.37 Waterproof concrete (Cont’d.)

All permanent construction joints shall be constructed in accordance with the drawings and specifications to
achieve complete water tightness.

It shall be the Contractor’s responsibility to ensure that all structures required to be constructed in waterproof
concrete are completely watertight and any work found to be defective shall be made good to the Architect’s
satisfaction at the Contractor’s expenses.

Where waterproof concrete forms a water retaining structure it is to be tested by filling with water for a period of
not less than four days. Any percolation or porous concrete or leaking joint is to be made good at the Constructor’s
expense. Tanks and pools constructed below ground level are not to be backfilled prior to the satisfactory
completion of this test.

F.38 Construction joints

All contraction joints shall be straight, truly vertical or level, as the cast may be, of the profile shown and formed
in the exact positions shown on drawings or if not shown on the drawings, with prior approval of the Engineer.
Vertical joints shall be formed against adequately secured rigid stop boards having splayed fillets, designed to pass
the continuous steel reinforcement without temporary bending or displacement.

The rate and method of placing concrete and the arrangement of constructions joints shall be placed in a
continuous operation.

Joints in reinforced slabs, joists and beams, shall be perpendicular to the axis or surface of the member jointed and
at the center of the span. If an intersecting member occurs at that point, the joint shall be located at a point of
minimum shear.

Construction joints in columns shall be as shown on the drawings. Whenever it becomes necessary to stop work,
such stops shall be located at center of slabs and of beams or as directed by the Engineer.

An adequate and acceptable key for succeeding work shall be formed by using stop boards which shall be
constructed tightly to prevent any grout leak. As early as possible boards shall be removed and the surface
thoroughly hacked and brushed to remove all laitance. Any leakage past stop boards shall be hacked off as soon as
the concrete has set. The surface shall be left clean and dry. Immediately prior to further concreting the joint face
shall be soaked with water and covered with sand cement mortar of proportions identical to that in the concrete to
be placed, punned into the body of the set concrete.

For exposed finishes, care shall be exercised to preserve an unbroken line at the exposed edge of the joint.

In no circumstances shall the concrete be allowed to finish at a break running down a rough slope. Such cases, if
found, will be treated as contrary to the specification and the Contractor will be required to cut out the member
and re-cast. In the case of horizontal joints, any excess water and laitance shall be removed from the surface after
the concrete is deposited and before it has set.

Before casting slabs the haunching or seating for the slab shall be thoroughly hacked, sourced and washed and
covered with at least 5 mm of mortar immediately before the slab is cast.

Any necessary construction joints in foundations shall be stepped and lapped 600 mm. Joint faces shall be
prepared and treated as described, above

Specification
Concrete Work
(2/F/15)
F.39 Striking times

It shall be the Contractor’s responsibility that no distortion, damage overloading or undue deflection is caused to
the structure by the striking of formwork, but the Engineer reserve the right to delay the time of striking in the
interest of the work. Formwork shall not be struck until the concrete has sufficiently hardened. Approval of the
Engineer shall not relieve the Contractor of his liability to make good any concrete damaged by premature
removal or collapse of forms. In no circumstances shall forms be struck until the concrete reaches cube strength of
at least twice the stress to which the concrete may be subjected at the time of striking. The following striking times
given in (24 hours) are the absolute minimum that will be permitted:-

Forms Ordinary Rapid

Portland Hardening
Cement Portland
Cement
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Wall
Columns (unloaded) } 2 2
Beam sides

Slabs –props left under } 4 2

Beam soffits - } 7 5
Props left under

Slabs – props } 10 5

Beams – props } 18 8

The time for removal of forms as set out shall not apply to slabs and beams spanning more than 10 meters. For
such spans appropriate times shall be recommended or advised by the Engineer.

F.40 Curing

The curing of the concrete must receive particularly careful attention. The concrete shall be covered with a layer of
sacking, canvas Hessian or suitable absorbent material, and concrete, formwork and covering kept constantly wet
for the first seven days after casting.

F.41 Holes and chases and casting in

No holes or chases shall be cut in reinforced concrete works. The Contractor shall ensure that all necessary holes
and chases, including fixing for railings and balustrades etc., are carefully formed in the correct position by
requisite measures prior to the placing of concrete.

All conduits, pipes, tubes and the like shall unless otherwise detailed, be run on top of the bottom reinforcement of
the concrete work. It shall be the Contractor’s responsibility to ensure full co-ordination with Sub-Contractors in
the setting out for this purpose.

Generally conduits, pipes and special fixtures shall be concreted in where required and in the exact positions
demanded.

Concrete fixing blocks shall not affect the strength or cover of the structure nor affect finished work due to
movement or other cause.

Details of the positions of all holes, chases and fixing blocks shall be submitted to the Engineer for his approval
prior to putting the work in hand.

Specification
Concrete Work
(2/F/16)
F.42 Tests of completed structural members

The engineer shall instruct that a loading test be made on the works, or any part thereof, if in his opinion such a
test be deemed necessary for one or more of the following reasons:-

(a) the site-made concrete test cubes failing to attain the specified strength
(b) the shuttering being prematurely removed
(c) overloading during construction of the works, or part thereof.
(d) Concrete improperly cured.
(e) Any other circumstances attributable to alleged negligence on the part of the Contractor which, in the
opinion of the Engineer, may result in the works, or part thereof, being less than the required strength.

If the loading test be instructed to be made solely, or in part, for one or more of the reasons mentioned above, the
test shall be made at the Contractor’s own cost. If a test be instructed to be made for any other reason than
specifically stated above, the contractor shall make the test and shall be reimbursed for all costs relating thereto.

Leading tests are to be in conformity with clause 605 of British Standard Code of practice CP114/1969.

If the result of the loading test be not satisfactory, the engineer shall instruct that the part of the works concerned
shall be taken down or removed and reconstructed to comply with this specification, or that such other remedial
measures shall be taken as to make the works secure.

If the test be instructed to be made for one or more of the reasons (a) to (e) inclusive as hereinbefore specified, the
contractor shall take down or remove and reconstruct the defective work, or shall take the remedial measure
instructed, all at his own cost.

F.43 Protection

All insitu and precast concrete shall be protected from rain and during hot, dry and windy weather approved
Hessian covering kept constantly damp shall be used to prevent premature drying out. All insitu and precast
concrete shall be protected from damage by disturbance, shock vibrations, early loading or overloading. In
addition, all exposed finishes shall be constantly protected from mechanical damage to arises or face and damage
due to dropping, splashing and staining from any source including rusty scaffolding or reinforcement.

No materials or equipment of any kind shall be stored or stacked on suspended floors without the Engineer’s prior
approve.

F.44 Precast concrete

Concrete shall all be cast in properly made strong moulds to form shapes required. For work described as “finished
fair” the moulds shall be lined with sheet iron or other approved materials.

The coarse aggregate for precast concrete shall be of the sizes described.

The concrete shall be of the mixes described and shall be thoroughly tamped in the moulds and shall not be
removed from them until seven days after placing the concrete, but the sides may be removed after three days
providing the moulds are such that the sides are easily removable without damaging the concrete.

The precast work shall be cast under sheds and shall remain under same for seven days in the moulds and a further
seven days after removal from the moulds. During the whole of this period the concrete shall be shielded by
sacking or other approved material kept wet. It shall then be removed from the sheds and stacked in the open for at
least seven days to seasons. (Cont’d.)

Specification
Concrete
(2/F/17)
F.44 Precast concrete (Cont’d.)

Precast units shall be true and smooth on all faces (except where a key is required for applied finishes) all arrises
shall be true and clean with no broken edges.

All units shall be marked during manufacture to indicate

(a) the date of casting
(b) identification lettering in accordance with the drawings
(c) where necessary, the way up for building in

Ends of bar reinforcement shall be 25 mm from internal faces. Nominally non reinforced units may contain
reinforcement at the contractors’ option for handling purposes, the cost of which shall be deemed to be included in
the contract sum.

F.45 Surface finishes

After removal of shuttering, unless instructed to the contrary, the face of exposed concrete is to be rubbed down
immediately to remove fins or other irregularities. In the events of parts of the concrete being honeycombed, such
portions are to be cut to a depth and shape required by the Architect and made up with fine concrete of equal
quality in such a manner as shall be directed. The faces of concrete for which shuttering is not provided, other than
slabs are to be smoothed with a wooden float to give a finish equal to that of the rubbed-down surface where
shuttering is provided.

The top face of a slab which it is not intended to cover with other materials is to be leveled and floated before
setting to a smooth finish at the levels or falls shown on the drawings or elsewhere. The floating must be carried
out in a way as will prevent an excess of mortar being brought to the surface of the concrete. The top of a slab
intended to be surfaced with mortar, granolithic, or similar materials is to be brushed with a stiff broom while still
green to remove any laitance and to provide a roughened surface.

(a) Samples

Before the execution of any specified finish, the contractor shall prepare 1200 mm square samples for the
Architect’s approval. No concreting in finish shall be attempted until the approval of a sample. Approved
samples shall be retained until the completion of all such work and closely adhered to throughout the
work. Rejected samples shall be demolished and removed.

(b) Rendered or plastered surfaces

Concrete surfaces to be rendered or plastered shall be thoroughly hacked to form a good key.

(c) Fair faced surfaces

Fair faced surfaces shall be free from honeycombing, stains, fins, lip pings, nail hole or excessive air
holes and shall be of a uniform colour and texture. This surface shall be obtained by the use of:-

(i) wrot forms, i.e. timber planed smooth on the surfaces in contact with concrete (ii) forms lined with
hardboard or plywood or other approved material: or (iii) smooth steel forms.

All imperfections shall be cut, made good in cement mortar and rubbed down with carborundum stone
and finally bag rubbed with cement slurry to finish to a high standard without trace of shuttering marks,
joints or other disfigurements.

(d) Board marked finish

Where so described or measured, faces of concrete shall be finished fair by means of 100 mm or 150 mm
(nominal) width tongued and grooved boarding of 25 mm (minimum) thickness. The edges to all boards
shall have a nominal 2 mm chamfer to form controlled fins. (Cont’d.)

Specification
Concrete Work
(2/F/18)
 (d) Board marked finish (Contd)

Such formwork to column faces shall be continuous length boards between constructions joints.

End joints will be permitted to beam faces, etc. and shall be tongued, staggered and well distributed.

The resulting concrete shall clearly show grain and individual board marks, be free from honey-combing
and excessive air holes, of uniform colour and to the entire satisfaction of the Architect.

F.46 Method of measurement

Prices are to include for working concrete around pipes and electric conduits or cable, including provision for
support of same while concrete is placed.

The prices for insitu work are to include for filling into, or on to, formwork where necessary, and where concrete
is described as reinforced for well tamping reinforcement. Unless otherwise described, all formwork and
reinforcement are measured separately.

Prices for precast concrete work; including items described as precast or insitu, shall include for all moulds, for
hoisting and for placing in position, bedding, jointing or building in with cement mortar.

All reinforcing bars are of round section unless otherwise stated and no allowance has, or will be, made for rolling
margin.

Prices for holes shall include for them being on rake where so required and shall include the necessary holes
through formwork.

The cost of all construction joints, as described herein and not specifically shown on the drawings and measured
separately in this Document, shall be deemed to be included in the rates set against the other items in this
Document.

The cost of providing all samples described herein shall be deemed to be included in the contract sum.

The cost of performing all tests described herein shall be deemed to be included in the contract sum except the net
invoiced cost of testing items or samples at authorized testing laboratories as instructed by the Architect or
Engineer, which costs will be reimbursed from the Provisional Sum included elsewhere in this document.

Timber purchased for the fabrication of formwork will be regarded as construction plant and will not be paid for as
materials on site.

Specification
Concrete Work

(2/F/19)
 WALLING
LIST OF CLAUSES

GENERALLY

G.1 Testing

G.2 Samples and sample panels

MATERIALS

G.3 Cement

G.4 Fine aggregate

G.5 Coarse aggregate

G.6 Limes

G.7 Sand for mortar

G.8 Concrete blocks

G.9 Load bearing hollow concrete blocks

G.10 Precast concrete lourvre or screen blocks

G.11 Clay bricks

G.12 Hollow clay screen blocks

G.13 Stone for pitching

G.14 Stone for walling

WORKMANSHIP

G.15 Storage of materials

G.16 Wetting blocks and bricks

G.17 Bonding walling

G.18 Generally

G.19 Wall reinforcement

G.20 Mortar mixing

G.21 Bedding and pointing

G.22 Laying lourvre or screen blocks

G.23 Filling of blockwork cavities

Specification
Walling
(2/G/1)
G.24 Stone pitching

G.25 Stone walling

G.26 Putlog holes

G.27 Chases

G.28 Method of measurement

Specification
Walling
(2/G/2)
 WALLING

GENERALLY

G.1 Testing

The Contractor shall, as and when required by the Architect, submit and deliver samples of any materials for
testing in accordance with the relevant current B.S. Specification. Samples of mortars, when required, are to be
delivered in water tight boxes provided by the Contractor.

G.2 Samples and sample panels

Samples of all types of blocks, bricks and stone required for the works shall be produced to the Architect for his
prior written approval before any orders are placed. After approval of samples, the Contractor shall erect a 1200
mm x 1200 mm sample panel of any brickwork, stone work or fair face block work required by the Architect. No
work shall be commenced until written approval has been given to sample panels, which shall be maintained for
the duration of the execution of the works to which the sample applies. The work executed shall not be inferior in
any respect to the approved by the Architect. The cost of providing samples and sample panels shall be deemed to
be included in the Contract Sum.

MATERIALS

G.3 Cement

Cement shall be as described in Concrete Work.

G.4 Fine aggregate

Fine Aggregate for concrete blocks shall be as described in Concrete Work.

G.5 Coarse aggregate

Coarse Aggregate for concrete blocks shall be good, hard, clean aggregate from approved quarries. It shall be free
from all decomposed materials and shall be graded up to 10 mm and all as described for coarse aggregate in
Concrete Work.

G.6 Limes

Hydrated limes for cement/lime mortar shall comply with B.S. 890, semi hydraulic type 3 calcium limes.

Lime for lime/sand mortar shall comply with B.S. 890 and shall be eminently hydraulic.

G.7 Sand for mortar

Sand for mortar shall comply with B.S. 1200.

G.8 Concrete blocks

Concrete blocks for walling shall be provided by the Contractor complying with B.S. 6073 Type A, and made in
approved block making machines of a composition as follows:-

Portland cement 1 cubic metre

Fine Aggregate (graded up to 5 mm) 3 cubic metres
Coarse aggregate (graded up to 10 mm) 6 cubic metres
(Cont’d.)

Specification
Walling
(2/G/3)
G.8 Concrete blocks (Cont’d.)

Blocks shall be solid or two-hole type as specified and are to be made under sheds erected by the Contractor to the
directions and approval of the Architect. Samples shall be approved by the Architect before any walling work is
commenced.

The compressive strength of Type A blocks (non loading bearing) shall be not less than:-

Average of 10 blocks 3.5 N/sq.m gross area

Lowest individual block 2.8 N/sq.m gross area

When load bearing, the compressive strength of blocks shall be:-

Average of 10 blocks 7.0 N/sq.m gross area

Lowest individual block 5.6 N/sq.m gross area

All testing shall be in accordance with B.S. 6073.

The concrete is to be put into the machine’s moulds in thin layers and all properly tamped therein. On removal
from the machines the blocks are to be carefully deposited on racks under sheds erected by the Contractor to the
direction and approval of the Architect and there left for three days and kept thoroughly wet the whole time, after
which they shall be put out in the open on racks and protected with approved matting, sacking or straw and kept
wet for a further five days, then kept in the same position and under same mat cover, but without wetting, for a
further two days and then left in the open without matting or wetting for a further seven days to season.

The blocks must be left with good sharp edges. The blocks for use in the works shall be 225 mm high and may
vary in length form 300 mm to 450 mm and no variation above or below these lengths will be allowed except
where required to form proper bonding at corners, around openings, sills, lintels, beams, etc., and the like positions
and the Contractor must make or cut blocks to all the varying sizes required for these purpose and include this in
his price.

Blocks to be subsequently covered with an insitu finishing may be slightly rough in texture. Fair face blocks shall
be perfectly smooth.

G.9 Load bearing hollow concrete blocks

All load-bearing hollow concrete blocks shall be 225 mm thick x 450 mm long of the two hole type of approved
manufacture. The blocks are to have a minimum resistance to crushing at twenty eight days of 4 Newton per
square millimetre on their net area.

The volume of the cavities shall be not less than 45% and not more than 50% of the gross volume, and the
dimensions of the cavities arranged so that each cavity is vertically continuous when the blocks are bonded.

G.10 Precast concrete lourvre or screen blocks

Precast concrete lourvre or screen blocks shall comply in all respects with the specification for precast items
contained in the preambles to ‘Concrete Work’, and shall be constructed to the dimensions and form shown in the
drawings.

G.11 Clay Bricks

All clay bricks shall be obtained from a manufacturing source specified by the Architect in writing, or where not
so specified, approved by him in writing, and complying with BS 3921.

All bricks incorporated into the works shall be properly burnt, clean, and hard, of well defined arris, uniform in
shape and as near uniform in colour as possible. Bricks to be used for face work shall be selected to the Architect’s
approval.

Specification
Walling
(2/G/4)
G.12 Hollow clay screen blocks

Hollow clay screen blocks shall be from an approved manufacturer to the pattern and dimensions described, free
from flaws, chips etc., with completely clean arrises incorporated into the finished work.

G.13 Stone for pitching

Stone for pitching shall be hard clean sound local stone to the approval of the Architect, of size and shape to give a
230 mm x 230 mm bearing surface when placed.

G.14 Stone for walling

Stone for walling shall be hard clean and sound local stone from an approved quarry to the approval of the
Architect.

WORKMANSHIP

G.15 Storage of materials

Cements and limes shall be stored off the ground, under cover and away from damp, and in such manner to enable
then to be used in rotation in order of delivery.

Sands shall be stored separately according to type on clean, hard dry standing and protected from contamination.

Sands for pointing shall be stored separately, away from other sands and shall be obtained in sufficient quantity at
one time to enable materials or the approved colour to be used for the whole of the work.

Precast concrete blocks and lourvre or grille blocks and clay bricks and blocks shall be open stacked to permit
ventilation and protected from the sun, rain and rising damp.

G.16 Wetting blocks and bricks

Concrete blocks and lourvre or grille blocks and clay bricks and blocks shall be wetted as necessary before and
after laying. Walls shall be kept wetted for three days after building.

G.17 Bonding walling

The blocks shall be properly bonded together and in such manner that no vertical joint in any one coarse shall be
within 115 mm of a similar joint in the courses immediately above or below. Sufficient through bonders shall be
provided as directed by the Architect. Alternative courses of walling at all angles and intersections shall be carried
through the full thickness of the adjoining walls. All walling shall be built up entirely solid in blocks, without
voids, allowance being made for joints 10 mm thick only. All perpends; reveals and other angles of the walling
shall be built strictly true and square.

G.18 Generally

The Contractor shall provide all setting out rods.

All surfaces on which blockwork or brickwork is to be built shall be clean. All blockwork and brickwork shall be
built uniform, true and level, with all perpends vertical and in line. No work shall rise more than 1 metre above
adjoining works and all such risings are to be properly racked back in long steps to prevent cracks arising, and all
walls shall be leveled around at each floor.

Joints generally are not to exceed 10 mm in thickness. Cutting of blockwork against concrete soffits, etc., shall
include for cutting to give normal 10 mm joints and compete filling thereof with mortar. (Cont’d.)

Specification
Walling
(2/G/5)
G.18 Generally (Cont’d.)

All walls built in hollow concrete blocks, where finishing with an open top edge, (i.e. not against ceiling, beam,
etc.), or at the underside of sills, shall be finished with a solid concrete block top course.

Where walling is to be fair faced in blocks, the blocks shall be selected and shall all have clean arrises.

G.19 Wall reinforcement

Where so specified hollow block walls shall be reinforced vertically with 10 mm diameter mild steel bars or 6 mm
square twisted bars at 450 mm centres unless otherwise specified, the bars being tied in with the reinforcement of
the floors at the top and bottom in an approved manner.

No scheduled for steel in walls will be provided.

G.20 Mortar mixing

All materials shall be accurately gauged by gauge boxes and mechanically mixed and used within 30 minutes of
first mixing. Proportions shall be cement and sand (1:6) by volume.

Re-tempering of mortar will not be permitted. Gauge boxes and mixers shall be kept clean.

G.21 Bedding and pointing

All blocks shall be bedded on a solid bed of mortar; vertical faces of all blocks shall be well buttered before being
laid and the whole well grouted at each course. Joints to blockwork to be plastered shall be roughly raked out to
form a key. Joints to fair face blockwork shall be either finished flush or finished recessed 6 mm as hereafter
specified.

G.22 Laying lourvre or screen blocks

Lourvre or screen blocks shall be built in mortar with all joints flushed up, surplus mortar wiped from the face of
the blocks and finished fair.

G.23 Filling of blockwork cavities

All cavities where specified and shown above ground and all cavities below ground level shall be filled in solid
with concrete of the mix described and placed and consolidated in sections not exceeding 1125 mm in height.

G.24 Stone pitching

The ground to receive pitching shall be well compacted and the stone; which shall be flat bedded and not less than
230 mm either way along the bearing surface, shall be punned to the required falls and inclinations so that neither
wedges nor spalls are required to keep the pitching rigidly in place. The joints shall be no more than 13 mm thick
solidly filled with 1:3 cement mortar and pointed.

G.25 Stone walling

The stone shall be well bonded with a minimum of one good bond or through stone evenly spaced to each square
metre. All cavities and joints in stonework are to be filled in and flushed up solid with mortar.

Jointing and pointing is as detailed or instructed.

G.26 Putlog holes

Putlog holes shall be carefully, properly and completely filled up on completion of walling work.

Specification
Walling
(2/G/6)
G.27 Chases

Where walling is cut, holed or chased for conduits, pipes or the like, all such chases shall be filled in solid with
cement mortar mix (1:4) prior to the application of finishes. In no case shall the vertical chase be deeper than one
third the thickness of the wall and in no case shall the horizontal chase be deeper than one sixth the thickness of
the wall.

G.28 Method of measurement

Prices for holes and chases shall include for cutting or leaving such holes or chases as may be required and the
prices shall include for holes being on rake where necessary.

Specification
Walling
(2/G/7)
 ROOFING
LIST OF CLAUSES

TILE ROOFING

K.1 Bituminous felt underlay

K.2 Saflok700 metal sheets

K.3 Mbezi interlocking tiles

K.4 Examine roof coverings

CORRUGATED OR TROUGHED SHEET ROOFING

K.5 Sheet roofing generally

K.6 Profiled aluminium sheet roofing

K.7 Asbestos cement sheet roofing

BITUMINOUS FELT ROOFING

K.8 Approved subcontractor

K.9 Guarantee

K.10 Samples

K.11 Preparations of surfaces

K.12 Pipes to be laid beforehand

K.13 Built – in roofing

K.14 Air pockets and stains

K.15 Test for falls

K.16 Protection

Specification
Roofing
(2/K/1)
 ROOFING
TILE ROOFING

K.1 Bituminous underlay

Bituminous felt underlay to ridges etc., to be self finished felt weighing not less than 14 kg. Per 10 square meter
with 600 mm laps at joints and nailed with galvanized steel nails as above.

K.2 Examine roof coverings

Before delivering up the works, examine the roof covering and leave the roofs clean, watertight and drop dry.

CORRUGATED OR TROUGHED SHEET ROOFING

K.3 Sheet roofing generally

All sheet coverings shall be laid away from the prevailing weather i.e. the exposed edge of the top most sheets to
be on its leeward side.

K.4 Saflok700; Profiled metal sheet roofing

(i) Profiled metal sheets are to comply with BS 4868 and are to be colour coated by the manufacturer after
formation and of the gauges specified, laid with one and a half corrugation side laps and 150 mm ends laps.
Sheets are to be properly stacked inclined to facilitate run-off rainwater.

(ii) Fixing corrugated steel sheeting is to be by means of 14 gauge drive screws in the case of a timber roof
supporting structure, and 6 mm galvanized hook bolts in the case of a steel supporting structure.

Both types of fixing to incorporate a bituminous felt washer backed by a cranked diamond shaped
aluminium washer immediately below the screw or nut whichever the case may be.

Each sheet is to have a minimum of two fixings and the holes for the bolts or screws are to be drilled
through the crown of the corrugation and be of such size so as to give a 0.80 mm clearance on the bolt or
screw.

(iii) Colour coated roofing sheets are to be finished to an approved colour by spraying and oven at the
manufacturer’s works. Care is to be taken to avoid damage to the finish and small scratches and blemishes
are to be touched up on site with paint supplied by the manufacturer of the sheets. Sheets with large
scratches are to be returned to the supplier for refinishing or are to be replaced.

(iv) Accessories are to be obtained from the same supplier as the roof sheeting and are to properly match the
colour of the roof sheeting.

K.6 Asbestos cement sheet roofing

(i) Corrugated asbestos cement sheets, accessories and fixings shall comply with BS 5247 and be as
manufactured by Asbesco Ltd. Sheets are to be stacked on a smooth, level foundation, under cover, on
cross battens, two per sheet up to 1500 mm long and three for sheets over 1500 mm. Stacking is not to
exceed 1200 mm high without battens and a maximum of 3000 mm with battens every 500 mm.

(ii) Fixing asbestos cement sheeting is to be by means of bolts, hook bolts or roofing screws with PVC caps
and “Seal washers”, all to be obtained from Asbesco Ltd.

All sheets are to be drilled and no other method for forming the holes through the crown of the
corrugations will be allowed.

Specification
Roofing
(2/K/2)
 No fixing whether for a roof sheet or an accessory should be nearer than 40 mm to any edge of the
member.

(i) In order to provide close fitting of the sheets two diagonally opposite corners of each sheet are to be
mitred. For sheets laid from left to right, miter the bottom right hand and top left hand corners, and for
sheets laid from right to left, meter the bottom left hand and to right hand corners.

BITUMINOUS FELT ROOFING

K.7 Approved Subcontractor

The Contractor is required to arrange for the work to be executed complete and to the entire satisfaction of the
Architect by an approved Subcontractor.

K.8 Guarantee

The Contractor shall obtain from the approved Subcontractor for roofing work and deposit with the Architect, a
written guarantee and undertaking to the effect that during a period of twelve calendar months from and after the
certified date of completion of the whole of the works such subcontractor shall at his own expense make good to
the satisfaction of the Architect all and any defects in the work which shall be attributed to improper materials or
faulty workmanship and shall bear the cost of any consequential damage as shall be provided for in such
guarantee.

K.9 Samples

The contractor shall, when required by the Architect, submit samples of any materials for testing

K.10 Preparation of surface

All surfaces to receive roofing are to be dry, rough and finished to the requirement and to the entire satisfaction of
the Subcontractor from whom the Contractor shall obtain, for submission to the Architect, a signed statement that
such finish is satisfactory.

K.11 Pipes to be laid beforehand

The contractor must ensure that all necessary plumbing, outlets, etc., and pipes, passing through roofs are fixed in
position before laying is commenced.

K.12 Built-up roofing

(i) The built–up felt roofing shall be in accordance with B.S 747. Applied to a screeded base and shall comprise
the following applications laid strictly in accordance with the manufacturer’s printed instructions and the
code of practice 144 of 1961.

K.12 Built–up roofing

(ii) Rolls must be transported and stored on end one roll high and adequately protected from the sun.

(iii) One layer finish

(a) Priming Prime screed with P.F.4 primer.

(b) Finishing one layer of heavy duty self finished felt

Coat (Class 1C) weighing not less than 25 kg/10 SM

(c) Jointing one application of hot bituminous compound weighing not less
than 30 kg/10 SM

Specification
Roofing
(2/K/3)
 (iv) Two layer finish

(a) Priming Prime screed with P.F. 4 prime

(b) First layer one layer of heavy duty self-finished felt Weighing not less than 14
(Class 1B) kg14/10 SM laid loose on prepared screed.

(c) Jointing one application of hot bituminous compound

Compound weighing not less than 30 kg/10 SM.

(d) Second layer one layer of heavy duty self finished felt
(Class 1C) weighing not less than 25 kg/10 SM.

(v) Three layer finish

(a) Priming Prime screed with P.F.4 primer.

(b) First layer one layer of heavy duty self finished felt weighing not less (Class 1B)
than 14 kg/10 SM. laid loose on prepared screed.

(c) Jointing one application of hot bituminous compound weighing not less
compound than 30 kg/10 SM.

(d) Second layer one layer of heavy duty self-finished felt

(Class 1B) weighing not less than 14 kg/10 SM

(e) Jointing as described in (c) above.

(f) Third layer one layer of heavy duty self finished felt
(Class 1C) weighing not less than 25 kg/10 SM.

(vi) Stone chipping finish. The entire surface to be mopped with not bituminous compound and felt overnight and
followed with a layer of 6 -12 mm white stone chippings bedded in mastic applied to the entire area and lightly
rolled.

(vii) Flashings, skirting etc., are to be painted two coats bituminised aluminium paint on completion.

K.13 Air pockets and stains

Air pockets and stains will not be permitted and the finished work shall not ring hollow over any part of its
surfaces.

K.14 Test for falls

To ensure that the finish has been truly laid to falls, (minimum 1:200), the Contractor shall arrange for the roof
areas to be flushed with water in the presence of the Architect. Any defects or depressions shall be rectified and
retested for approval.

K.15 Protection

The Contractor shall take all necessary precautions to ensure that no damage is caused to be the roofing after
completion of laying by further building operations, storage of heavy objects, traffic or any cause whatsoev

Specification
Roofing
(2/K/4)
 CARPENTRY AND JOINERY

LIST OF CLAUSES

QUALIFICATIONS OF THE RULES OF THE SM.M

M.1 Holes in timber

M.2 Fixing by bolting, etc

M.3 Fixing ironmongery

DEFINITION

M.4 Plugging

M.5 Finished sizes

M.6 Selected

M.7 Hardwood or the like

MATERIALS

M.8 Terminology

M.9 Timber generally

M.10 Approval

M.11 Species of timber

M.12 Plywood

M.13 Chipboard

M.14 Block board

M.15 Fibreboard

M.16 Hardboard

M.17 Laminated plastic

M.18 Pressure impregnation treatment

M.19 Screws, nails, bolts etc

M.20 Adhesive

WORKMANSHIP

M.21 Generally

M.22 Contractor to check discrepancies

Specification
Carpentry and Joinery
(2/M/1)
M.23 Storage

M.24 Priming

M.25 Arrises

M.26 Fabrication

M.27 Fixing fiberboard, hardboard and chipboard

M.28 Fixing laminated plastic

M.29 Plugs

M.30 Nailing and screwing

M.31 Joints in structural timbers

M.32 Lapping to block board

M.33 Fixing panels with beads

M.34 Flush doors

M.35 Inspection and testing

M.36 Casing and protection

M.37 Clearing up

IRONMONGERY

M.38 Generally

M.39 References

M.40 Fixing

M.41 Keys and labels

M.42 Method of measurement

Specification
Carpentry and Joinery
(2/M/2)
 CARPETRY AND JOINERY

QUALIFICATIONS OF THE RULES OF THE SMM

M.1 Holes in timber

Notwithstanding the provisions of SMM clause M.38 (a), where work is described as fixed with screws, holes in
timber shall be deemed to be included.

M.2 Fixing by bolting, etc.

Notwithstanding the provisions of SMM Clause A.3 (B) (iii), the term ‘fixing up’ used in conjunction with any
method of fixing shall not be definition of fixing with bolts or other devices shall be deemed to be included where
these are normally supplied with the ironmongery concerned.

DEFINITIONS

M.4 Plugging

The term ‘plugging’ shall mean the provision and fixing or approved proprietary plugs of the correct grade,
hardwood plugs cut to twist, or dovetailed plugs mortised into the walls.

M.5 Finished sizes

All members shall be finished to the size stated or shown on the drawing. The prices inserted by the contractor
shall be deemed to include for the nominal sizes necessary to produce the finished sizes stated.

M.6 Selected

The term ‘selected’ shall be deemed to include keeping the material so described clean for staining, polishing, or
any similar finish.

M.7 Hardwood or the like

The term ‘hardwood or the like’, which is used a statement of background to which ironmongery is to be fixed,
shall be deemed to include plywood and other manufactured materials, except where these materials are faced with
metal, laminated plastics or the like.

MATERIALS

M.8 Terminology

All technical terms shall be as defined in the relevant timber ordinances.

M.9 Timber generally

Timber shall be from an approved sawmill, be sound, well conditioned, properly seasoned to suit the particular
use, straight grained, and free from defects or combination of defects rendering it unsuitable for the purpose
intended, and containing not more than 15% moisture for joinery work or 18% moisture for carpentry work.

Structural timber is to be approved local softwood or hardwood as specified of strength grade two supplied in long
lengths, with a tolerance of 5mm on scantlings, but of uniform width and thickness. Boards and scantings which
are specified as 25mm or less in thickness are to hold up to full size. Structural timber shall be deemed to be sawn
on all faces unless otherwise stated as wrot. (Cont’d.)

Specification
Carpentry and Joinery
(2/M/3)
M.9 Timber generally (Cont’d.)

Joinery timber shall be approved prime selected grade local hardwood as specified and shall be held to be wrot by
machine dressing unless otherwise stated.

All timber for the works is to be purchased immediately the contract is signed and is to be open stacked for as long
as possible before use or kiln drying. All timber and assembled woodwork shall be protected from
weather and stored in such a way as to prevent attack by termites, insects or decayed fungi.

M.10 Approval

Any timber brought to the site and rejected by the Architect, shall be removed from the site at the Contractor’s
expense.

Should any timber be found to contain disease, pest, borers, termites, or any other defect after incorporation in the
work, and until the expiration of the maintenance period, notwithstanding that the timber may have been approved
by the Architect when brought to the site, such timber shall be removed and replaced, together with all works
disturbed, at the Contractor’s expense.

No timber is to be incorporated in the building which has been used for formwork, planking, strutting, scaffolding,
or any other form of plant.

M.11 Species of timber

The following timbers shall be used where specified and the common names used throughout this document
correspond to the botanical names as follows:

Common Name Botanical Name

Pine Pinus Patula

Cypress Cypressus lusiticana
Podocarpus Podocarpus spp
African Mahogany Khaya nyasica
Mninga Pterocarpus Angolensis
Mvule Chlorophora excelsa

The following may also be used where “hardwood’ or “hardwood” is specified, with the Architects prior written
approval; Adina, East African Afromosia, East African Afzelia, Mgando, Banda Wanga,Muhuhu, Camphor and
Burkea.

M.12 Plywood

The plywood shall be from a manufacturing source approved by the Architect and shall comply in all respects with
the requirements of B.S. 66566.

Grade 1 veneer plywood shall be used visible surface is to be wax polished, varnished, plastic lacquered or left
untreated.

Grade 2 veneer plywood shall be used where subsequent painting is intended.

All plywood shall be WBP bonded, and of marine quality when specified.

Routine tests will be required from time to time to check the quality of plywood manufacture.

Specification
Carpentry and Joinery
(2/M/4)
M.13 Chipboard

Chipboard shall comply with B.S. 5669

M.14 Block board

Block board shall be from a manufacturing source approved by the Architect and shall comply in all respects with
B.S. 3444. The grade of the veneer shall be as described in the measured items.

M.15 Fiberboard

Fiberboard shall be Celotex, or other equal and approved make, of the thickness specified and complying in all
respects with the requirements of B.S. 1142 Part 3.

M.16 Hardboard

Hardboard shall comply with B.S. 1142 Part 2 and be tempered.

M.17 Laminated plastic sheet

Laminated plastic sheet shall comply with B.S. 3794 Class 1; from an approved manufacturer. Prior to fixing
laminated plastic sheet the Contractor shall obtain the Architects written approval to a sample.

M.18 Pressure impregnated treatment

All timber used in carpentry, grounds for fixing joinery, etc., is to be vacuum pressure impregnated with Tanalith
C preservative to a dry salt net retention of 10 kg of Tanalith C per cubic meter of timber and stacked until the
moisture content returns to 18% or 15% as above described.

Timber to be machined to finished sections and cut to component length before impregnation.

Cut ends, notching, boring, and faces of timber sawn after treatment are to be swabbed liberally with Wolmanol
end grain preservative, allowed to dry, and then applied in a similar manner a second time. The Contractor’s prices
for such timber must allow for this treatment.

M.19 Screws, nails, bolts, etc.

Screws, shall comply with B.S. 1210 and nails with B.S. 1202. Bolts shall be generally cup square with large
washers and nuts.

Other fixing accessories are to comply with B.S. 1494.

M.20 Adhesive

Adhesive shall be synthetic resin type complying with B.S. 1204. Part 1, type WBP.

WORKMANSHIP

M.21 Generally

Workmanship shall comply with B.S 1186 Part 2.

M.22 Contractor to check discrepancies

The contractor shall be responsible for ascertaining from the site and for checking all dimensions before the
joinery is put in hand. Any discrepancies between site dimensions and those shown on the Architect’s drawings
shall be reported immediately to the Architect for rectification.

Specification
Carpentry and Joinery
(2/M/5)
M.23 Storage

Joinery shall be protected from the weather during transit and shall be stored under cover, clear of the ground, in
clean, dry ventilated structures, before and after priming.

M.24 Priming

All joinery shall be delivered to the site unprimed and shall be primed, (as measured in Painting and Decorating),
immediately after inspection and before fixing.

M.25 Arrises

All arrises exposed in the finished work shall be rubbed down with glass paper.

M.26 Fabrication

All joinery is to be purpose made and constructed to detail drawings, in a workmanlike manner, morticed, and
tenoned, dovetailed, tongued and grooved, glued, pinned, screwed, etc., as best suited to the particular part. All
mortice and tenon joints are to be pinned with hardwood dowels or with brass pins in addition to wedging and
gluing. All joinery shall be put together with waterproof adhesive.

All carpenter’s work shall be accurately set out in strict accordance with the drawings and shall be framed together
and secured fixed in the best possible manner with properly made joints. All necessary brads, nails and screws,
etc., shall be provided as directed and approved.

M.27 Fixing fibreboard, hardboard and chipboard

Unless otherwise specified fibreboard hardboard and chipboard, shall be pinned to its backing, heads punched
below the surface and puttied flush.

M.28 Fixing laminated plastic

Laminated plastic shall be fixed with an adhesive recommended by the manufacturer, and in accordance with their
instructions.

M.29 Plugs

The centers of fixing plugs shall not exceed 600 mm and shall be closer if the work so requires.

M.30 Nailing and screwing

Where items are described as ‘fixed with screws’ they shall be brass screws of the appropriate gauge and length,
countersunk and pellated where applicable . In all other instances wrot timber shall be fixed with oval brads, round
lost heads or cut clasp nails punched and puttied; carcassing timber shall be spiked, well driven and clenched.

M.31 Joints in structural timbers

Structural timbers shall as far as is practicable be in single lengths. Where joints are unavoidable they shall be scar
fed, spiked and bolted as required. Generally scarfs shall be 450 mm long.

Bolt holes should be drilled to diameters as close as possible to the nominal diameter of the bolt and in no case
more than 1.6 mm larger than the bolt diameter. Care should be taken to avoid placing a bolt in any end split. A
minimum of one complete thread should protrude from the nut. A washer should be fitted under the head of each
bolt and under each nut. The minimum sizes of washers are given below:-
(Cont’d.)

Specification
Carpentry and Joinery
(2/M/6)
M.31 Joints in structural timbers (Cont’d.)

Diameter of bolt Minimum thickness Minimum size of

of washer square or diameter square or diameter
of washer of washer
10 to 12 mm 3 mm 50 mm
6 to 22 mm 5 mm 65 mm
25 to 32 mm 6 mm 75 mm

M.32 Lipping to block board

All exposed edges of block board, including those to be covered with Formica, shall be lipped with a hardwood
lipping to the size specified for the full thickness of the board to match the veneer of the general face. Lip pings
shall be fixed with pins of the appropriate gauge and length, punched and puttied. Where described as ‘tongued’,
the edge of the block board shall be grooved to receive the lipping which shall be rebated twice to form the tongue.

M.33 Fixing panels with beads

Where glass or other panels are fixed with beads, and may be required to be removed or replaced in the event of
breakage, the beads shall, where fixed to one side only, be fixed with brass screws and cups, and where fixed to
both sides, be braded one size and fixed with brass screws and cups one the other side. Brass screws and cups shall
only be used internally.

M.34 Flush doors shall be of the sizes and thickness indicated on the drawings.

The doors, unless otherwise described, shall be semi-solid cored having stiles, top and bottom rails, filled in with
core slats at approximately 50 mm centers, or slats to an egg crate pattern.

Doors intended for interior or exterior use shall be faced on both sides with 6 mm exterior marine quality plywood
with the grade of veneer as specified in the measured items.

All flush doors shall have lipped edges. The members of all doors shall be bonded with the same adhesive as is
required for the bonding of the plywood with which they are faced.

No flush doors shall be incorporated in the works without first obtaining the Architect’s approval of a sample

M.35 Inspection and testing

The Architect shall be given facilities for inspection of all works in progress whether in workshops or on site. All
timber as it arrives on the site may be inspected by the Architect and any timber brought on to the site and not
approved by him must be removed forthwith, failing which he may arrange for the removal of the rejects and
dispose of them as he may consider advisable at the Contractor’s expense

Notwithstanding approval having been given as above, any timber incorporated in the works found to be in any
way defective before the expiry of the maintenance period shall be removed and renewed at the Contractor’s
expense. The contractor is to allow for testing of prototypes or special construction units and the Architect shall be
at liberty to select any samples he may require for the purpose of testing, i.e. for moisture content, or identification
or species, strength, etc. Where timbers need to be extended into a wall, they shall be (Contd)

Specification
Carpentry and Joinery
(2/M/7)
M.35 Inspection and testing (Contd)

thoroughly “brush treated” with “Tanalith” in addition to preservative treatment as already described above, and as
much clear air space maintained around the timber where it adjoins the wall as possible.

M.36 Casings and Protection

All fixed joinery which is liable to become bruised or damage in any way, shall be properly cased and protected by
the contractor until the completion of the works.

M.37. Clearing up

The contractor is to clear out and destroy or remove all cut ends shavings and other wood waste from all parts of
the building and the site generally, as the work progresses and at the conclusion of the works

IRONMONGERY

M.38 References

Where items of ironmongery are not specified by manufacturers’ catalogue reference, the Contractor shall submit
for the Architect’s approval within one month of the date of possession of site, specifications including
manufacturers catalogue reference number of the items he proposes to purchase.

Prior to fixing any item of ironmongery, the Contractor shall obtain the Architect’s approval of a sample

M.40 Fixing

Joinery is to be countersunk for ironmongery and screws. Where woodwork is painted, the ironmongery shall be
fixed while the joinery is primed but before painting. All lock handles and the like shall be removed until after
painting is complete when they will be fitted and adjusted and left in perfect working order.

M.41 Keys and labels

All locks are to be provided with two keys and no key is to pass the wards of any but its own lock. All keys are to
be provided with a key ring and plastic tag on which is firmly written the position of the door.

M.42 Method of measurement

Fixing shall include all fitting, cutting, sinking, boring and mortising, easing and adjusting.

Specification
Carpentry and Joinery
(2/M/8)
 STRUCTURAL STEELWORK

LIST OF CLAUSES

GENERALLY

N.1 Standard of construction

N.2 Fabrication by specialist firm

N.3 Contractor to submit drawings

N.4 Accuracy of drawings

N.5 Erection scheme

N.6 Dimension to be verified

N.7 Copies of orders

N.8 Damages

MATERIALS

N.9 Quality of steel

N.10 Marking of steel

N.11 Standard dimensions

N.12 Weight of steel

N.13 Conditions of surface

N,14 Tests and inspection

N.15 Metallic coatings

N.16 Paint

WORKMANSHIP

N.17 Generally

N.18 Rejection

N.19 Fabrication

N.20 Cost of temporary erection, etc

N.21 Joints and connections

N.22 Painting at work

Specification
Structural steelwork
(2/N/1)
 STRUCTURAL STEELWORK

GENERALLY

N.1 Standard of construction

The whole of the structural steelwork and testing shall comply with the relevant clauses of B.S. 449 and B.S 5950.

N.2 Fabrication by specialist firm

The steelwork shall be fabricated by a specialist firm and, before an order is placed by the Contractor; such
specialist firm shall be approved by the Architect.

N.3 Contractor to submit drawings

The Contractor shall include for the preparation of all shop details from the drawings supplied by the Architect.
All such details shall be approved in writing by the Architect before the work is put in hand. Every drawing shall
show the number and sizes of all bolts, complete details of welds, and type of electrodes, welding procedure,
whether the welds are to be made in the shop or elsewhere and any other relevant information.

N.4 Accuracy of drawings

The Contractor shall be responsible for the correctness of his shop details, for shop fittings and site connections.

N.5 Erection scheme

The Contractor shall submit to the Architect for approval, drawings showing the proposed erection scheme,
together with all calculation for erection stresses, etc. The approval by the Architect will not absolve the
Contractor in any way from responsibility.

N.6 Dimensions to be verified

The Contractor shall take the dimensions from the site or buildings and shall verify all dimensions given on the
drawings before the work is put in hand.

N.7 Copies of orders

A copy of all orders for materials shall be supplied by the Contractor to the Architect at the time of ordering, for
identification purposes.

N.8 Damage

Any damage to materials on the site due to inadequate precautions being taken during the erection of the steelwork
shall be made good to the satisfaction of the Architect at the Contractor’s expense.

Specification
Structural Steelwork
(2/N/2)
 MATERIALS

N.9 Quality of steel

(i) All structural mild steel shall comply with B.S 4360 Part 2.

(ii) All structural steel tubes shall comply with B.S 6323 and B.S 449 Part 2.

(iii) Mild steel and medium tensile steel electrodes for metal-arc welding shall comply with the requirements of
B.S. 639.

(v) High strength friction grip bolts and washers shall comply with B.S 4395 Part 1.

N.10 Marking of steel

Each pieces of steel shall be legibly marked with the maker’s name or trade mark and with cast numbers or
identification marks.

N.1 Standard dimensions and allied requirements of all structural rolled sections shall comply with B.S. 4 Part 1 and
B.S.4848. The dimensions, weight, tolerances, etc., of all bolts, nuts, studs, etc., shall conform to the following
standards:

Black bolts shall have the shank turned to the specified diameter allowing only a minus tolerance up to 0.13 mm.

N.12 Weight of steel

For the purpose of measurement, the weight of mild steel shall be as given in B.S 648. The weights per meter
given on the drawings do not include shelf angles affixed to webs, nor plates affixed to flanges of Universal beams
or other sections.

N.13 Condition of surfaces

All surfaces of steelwork shall be clean, free from loose mill scale and rust.

N.14 Tests and inspection

Manufacturer’s Mill Test certificates for all structural steel shall be supplied to the Architect; the Contractor shall
take and deliver samples of structural steel for testing to a testing facility nominated by the Architect. Should the
results of any test be unsatisfactory the whole consignment of steel which the sample represents shall be rejected
and shall be replaced by other material of proper quality at the expense of the Contractor.

N.15 Metallic coating

(i) Galvanized steelwork shall comply with B.S 729, entirely coated with zinc after fabrication by complete
immersion in zinc both in one operation and excess carefully removed. The finished surfaces shall be clean
and uniform.

(ii) Zinc sprayed steelwork shall comply with B.S 2569, Part 1. the nominal thickness of zinc coating shall be
not more than 0.102 mm and at no point less than 0.070 mm.

N.16 Paint

Prime for steelwork shall be calcium plumbate priming paint complying with B.S. 3698, Type A. Bituminous
paint shall be black bituminous paint complying with B.S 3416, type 1.

Specification
Structural Steelwork
(2/N/3)
 WORKMANSHIP

N.17 Generally

The whole of the fabrication and erection of the steelwork shall be carried out in accordance with B.S 449 Part 2.

The welding of steel to B.S. 4360 Part 2 must conform to:

B.S. 5135 - “General requirements for the metal – arc welding of mild steel” as applicable.

For welding any particular type of joint the contractor shall provide evidence acceptable to the Architect that the
welder has satisfactorily completed the appropriate tests as described in B.S. 449, Part 2. Any welder’s tests shall
be made at the Contractor’s expense and shall include the cost of any fees incurred by the Employer for witnessing
of, or making such tests. The right is reserved to make non-destructive tests on the welding to determine if the
welding conforms to the standards laid down in B.S 5135 as applicable.

N.18 Rejection

Any portion of the work which, in the opinion of the Architect is not in accordance with the drawings or
specification shall be rejected whether before or after delivery and must be removed, from the site if delivered,
within 24 hours from receipt of such notice of rejection at the Contractor’s expense. Any delay caused by such
rejection will not in any way relieve the Contractor from his responsibility with regard to the provisions of the
Contract. If any welding is found to be defective the cost of all remedial measures shall be borne by the
Contractor, including the cost of re-testing. The contractor is responsible for the good quality of all welding work
and no exceptions the be made on the grounds that the Architect or his representative have inspected any part or
parts of work at some stage during production.

N.19 Fabrication

As much of the work of fabrication of the steelwork as is reasonable practicable shall be completed in the
manufacturer’s works. Field connection shall be made in accordance with the approved drawings. The Contractor
shall give four days clear notice of steelwork ready for inspection at the manufacturer’s works, to facilitate
inspection before delivery.

N.20 Cost of temporary erection, etc

Trial erection of principal or other units may be called for at the discretion of the Architect or his representative.

The cost of any necessary temporary erection, testing, packing, marking, carriage and delivery, is deemed to be
included by the Contractor in the tender price.

N.21 Joints and connection

No variation of the number, type or position of the joints or connections shown on the drawings shall be made
without the consent of the Architect. If such consent is desired the Contractor shall submit detailed drawings of the
proposed joints for the approval of the Architect and no extra cost incurred by reason of such additions or
alterations will be allowed to the Contractor.

Specification
Structural Steelwork
(2/N/4)
N.22 Painting at works

Where described as primed at works, steelwork shall be freed of rust, mill scale, welding slag and flux residue and
shall be dry immediately prior to painting with primer.

For joints with high strength friction grip bolts the contact surface shall be left unpainted but special care shall be
taken after assembly to paint all edges and corners near the joints together with bolt heads, nuts and washers to
prevent the ingress of moisture. For joints made with other bolts the contact surfaces shall each be given a coast of
priming paint and for shop connections the contact surfaces shall be brought together while the paint is still wet.

For welded connections where the contact surfaces are not completely sealed the contact surfaces shall be painted
to within 50 mm of the edges that are to be welded.

The primer shall be touched up with similar primer if damaged by subsequent handling.

Specification
Structural Steelwork
(2/N/5)
 METALWORK
LIST OF CLAUSES
QUALIFICATIONS OF THE RULES OF THE SMM

P.1 Backgrounds

P.2 Preparation for welding

P.3 Fixing by bolting, etc.

DEFINITIONS

P.4 Holes for attachments

P.5 Welding

GENERALLY

P.6 Shop drawings

P.7 Standard of construction for structural work

P.8 Fabrication of structural metalwork

P.9 Shop details for structural work

P.10 Accuracy of drawings

P.11 Dimensions to be verified

MATERIALS

P.12 Steel for general metalwork

P.13 Steel for structural metalwork

P.14 Cast iron

P.15 Galvanized work

P.16 Bolts and nuts

P.17 Aluminium

WORKMANSHIP

P.18 Smithing, etc,

P.19 Forging

P.20 Welding

P.21 Structural work generally

P.22 Rejection

Specification
Metalwork
(2/P/1)
P.23 Fabrication

P.24 Joints and connections

P.25 Painting at works

P.26 Welded members to be Galvanized

P.27 Metalwork to be painted

P.28 Fixing windows

P.29 Method of measurement

Specification
Metalwork
(2/P/2)
 METALWORK

QUALIFICATION OF THE RULES OF THE SMM

P.1 Backgrounds

Notwithstanding the provisions SMM Clause P.1 (a) (iii) the background or support to which metalwork is fixed
shall be deemed to be any background compatible with the method of fixing given in the descriptions.

P.2 Preparation for welding

Notwithstanding the provisions of SMM Clause P.1 (d) (iii), description of work required to be welded and ground
to smooth finish shall be deemed to include the preparation of the members.

P.3 Fixing by bolting, etc.

Notwithstanding the provisions of SM.M. Clause A.3 (b) (iii), the term ‘fixing by’ used in conjunction with any
method of fixing shall not be deemed to include any fixing materials but shall be interpreted as a definition of
fixing method only.

DEFINITIONS

P.4 Holes for attachments

Where lugs or other subsidiary members are given in the description of main members of plates, bars, holes
required for the screws, bolts or rivets by which the subsidiary members are attached to the main members shall be
deemed to be included.

P.5 Welding

In the absence of specific requirements the techniques and materials employed in welding shall be selected with
due regard to the character of the work and the metals being connected.

GENERALLY

P.6 Shop drawings

The Contractor shall submit complete shop drawings as and when required by the Architect for his approval.

P.7 Standard of construction for structural work

Structural metalwork and testing shall comply with the relevant clauses of B.S. 449.

P.8 Fabrication of structural metalwork

Structural metalwork shall be fabricated by a specialist firms and, before an order is placed by the Contractor such
specialist firm shall be approved in writing by the Architect.

P.9 Shop details for structural work

The Contractor shall include for the preparation of all shop details for structural work from the drawings supplied
by the Architect. All such details shall be approved in writing, by the Architect before the work is put in hand.
Every drawing shall show the number and sizes of all rivets and bolts, complete details of welds, type of
electrodes, welding procedure, whether the welds are to be made in the shop or elsewhere and other relevant
information.

Specification
Metalwork
(2/P/3)
P.10 Accuracy of drawings

The Contractor shall be responsible for the correctness of his shop details and for shop fittings and site connections

P.11 Dimensions to be verified

The Contractor shall take the dimensions from the site or buildings and he shall verify all dimensions given on the
drawings before the work is put in hand.

MATERIALS

P.12 Steel for general metalwork

Mild steel shall comply with B.S. 4360 Grade 43A. Hot rolled sections shall comply with B.S. 4, Part 1. Hot rolled
hollow shall comply with B.S. 4, Part 2. Tubes (other than circular hot rolled hollow sections) shall comply with
B.S. 1775 and shall be of the type of steel and method of manufacture described.

P.13 Steel for structural metalwork

(i) All structural and rivet mild steel shall comply with B.S. 449 and B.S. 4360: Part 2.,

(ii) All structural steel tubes shall comply with B.S. 6323 and B.S. 449 Part 2.

(iii) Mild steel and medium tensile steel electrodes for metal-arc welding shall comply with the requirements of
B.S. 639

(iv) All mild steel bolts and nuts shall have a tensile strength of not less than 432 N/per sq.m 28 tones per sq in)
and a minimum elongation of 17 per cent as defined in Clause 2 of B.S. 916.

(v) All high tensile steel bolts, nuts and washers shall have a minimum tensile strength of 570 N/per sq.m (37
tons per sq in).

(vi) High strength friction grip bolts and washers shall comply with B.S. 4395 Part 1.

(vii) All plain washers shall be of steel. Tapered or other specially shaped washers shall be made of steel or
malleable cast iron complying with B.S. 3410.

P.14 Cast iron

Cast iron shall comply with B.S. 1452

P.15 Galvanized work

Iron and steel, where Galvanized, shall comply B.S. 729 entirely coated with zinc after fabrication by complete
immersion in a zinc bath in one operation and all excess carefully removed. The finished surfaces shall be clean
and uniform.

Zinc sprayed iron and steel shall comply with B.S. 2569. The nominal thickness of zinc coating shall be not less
than 0.102 mm and at no point less than 0.070 mm.

P.16 Bolts and nuts

Bolts and nuts shall comply with B.S. 1494 and 4190 and have Whitworth threads.

Specification
Metalwork
(2/P/4)
P.17 Aluminium

Wrought aluminium shall be of the alloys described and shall comply with the following:-

Plate, sheet and strip - B.S. 1470

Drawn tube - B.S. 1471
Extruded round tube and
Hollow sections, bars and rods - B.S. 1474

WORKMANSHIP

P.18 Smithing, etc

All smithing and bending shall be soundly and neatly executed, care being taken not to overheat.

P.19 Forging

All straps, bolts and similar work shall be forged neat and clean from the anvil.

P.29 Welding

The work ‘welded’ is to be understood to include the normal trade methods of jointing metals using an
oxyacetylene torch, rod and flux. The joints shall be made so that they will transmit the loads and resist the
stresses to which they will be subjected. All excess metal is to be filed down and smoothed off to a workmanlike
finish to the approval of the Architect. The materials employed in welding shall be selected with due regard to the
character of the work and the metals being connected.

P.21 Structural work generally

The whole of the fabrication and erection of the structural metalwork shall be carried out in accordance with B.S.
4360 Part 2. The welding of steel to B.S. 4360 must conform to :-

B.S. 1140 - “Resistance spot welding of uncoated and coated low carbon steel”

Or

B.S. 5135 - “metal arc welding of carbon and carbon manganese steels” as applicable.

For welding any particular type of joints the Contractor shall provide evidence acceptable to the Architect that the
welder has satisfactorily completed the appropriate tests as described in B.S. 449, Part 2, Chapter 6. Any welder’s
tests shall be made at the Contractor’s expenses and shall include the cost of any fees incurred by the Employer for
witnessing of, or making such tests.

P.22 Rejection

Any portion of the work which, in the opinion of the Architect is not in accordance with the drawings or
specification shall be rejected whether before or after delivery and must be removed from the site if delivered,
within 24 hours from receipt of such notice of rejection at the Contractor’s expense. Any delay caused by such
rejection will not in any way relieve the Contractor from his responsibility with regard to the provisions of the
Contract.

Specification
Metalwork
(2/P/5)
P.23 Fabrication

As much of the work of fabrication of the structural metalwork as is reasonably practicable shall be completed in
the manufacturer’s works. Field connections shall be made in accordance with the approved drawings. The
Contractor shall give four days’ clear notice of structural metalwork ready for inspection at the manufacturer’s
works, to facilitate inspection before delivery.

P.24 Joints and connections

No variation of the number, type or position of the joints or connections shown on the drawings of structural
metalwork shall be made without the consent of Architect. If such consent is desired the Contractor shall Submit
detailed drawings of the proposed joints for the approved of the Architect and no extra cost incurred by reason of
such additions or alterations will be allowed to the Contractor.

F.25 Painting at works

Where described as primed at works, structural metalwork shall be freed of rust, millscale, welding slag and flux
residue and shall be dry immediately prior to painting with primer.

For joints with high strength friction grip bolts the contact surface shall be left unpainted but special care shall be
taken after assembly to paint all edges and corners near the joints together with bolt heads, nuts and washers to
prevent the ingress of moisture. For joints made with other bolts and rivets the contact surfaces shall each be given
a coat of priming paint and for shop connections the contact surfaces shall be brought together while the paint is
still wet.

For welded connection where the contact surfaces are not completely sealed the contact surfaces shall be painted
to within 50 mm of the edges that are to be welded. The primer shall be touched up with similar primer if damaged
by subsequent handling.

P.26 Welded members to be Galvanized

All welded members which are to be Galvanized shall be Galvanized only after all fabrication and welding is
complete.

P.27 Metalwork to be painted

All metalwork which is to be painted shall be with one coat of primer before fixing.

P.28 Fixing windows

Windows shall be fixed entirely in accordance with the manufacturers instructions. They shall be properly stored
at the site off the ground under weatherproof cover.

P.29 Method of measurement

Joints in the running length of members of balustrades, etc., required by the fabricator for ease of transporting and
fixing, shall be deemed to be included in the prices for such work.

Except where otherwise described, holes, bolts, and cutting and pinning have been measured separately.

Specification
Metalwork
(2/P/6)
 PLUMBING INSTALLATIONS

LIST OF CLAUSES

QUALIFICATIONS OF THE RULES OF THE SMM

Q.1 Jointing pipes

Q.2 Provision of holes

DEFINITIONS

Q.3 Painting

Q.4 Welding

Q.5 Backgrounds requiring plugging

Q.6 Plugging

Q.7 Surface finishes

Q.8 Pipe sizes

GENERALLY

Q. 9 Execution of plumbing work

RAINWATER INSTALLATION

Q.10 Plastic pipes and fittings

Q.11 Galvanized steel tubes and fittings

Q.12 Rainwater outlets

Q.13 Testing

SANITARY INSTALLATION

Q.14 Bye-Laws

Q.15 Setting out

Q.16 Spun cast iron pipes, cast iron fittings and accessories

Q.17 Galvanized steel tubes and fittings

Q.18 Plastic pipes and fittings

Q.19 Sleeves

Q.20 Brackets and hangers

Q.21 Wire balloons

Q.22 Appliances

Specification
Plumbing Installation
(2/Q/1)
Q.23 Testing

Q.24 Cleansing

Q.25 Habitation certificate

HOT AND COLD WATER INSTALLATIONS

Q.26 Galvanized steel tubes and fittings

Q.27 Pipework generally

Q.28 Sleeves

Q.29 Pipework ancillaries

Q.30 Tanks and cisterns

Q.31 Testing

Specification
Plumbing Installations
(2/Q/2)
 PLUMBING INSTALLATIONS

QUALIFICATIONS OF THE RULES OF THE SMM

Q.1 Jointing pipes

Notwithstanding the provisions of SMM Clause Q.9 (b), the prices for all galvanized steel screwed pipes shall be
deemed to include for jointing with hemp and red lead or ‘Boss’ white unless otherwise described and the prices
for all cast iron pipes shall be deemed to include for jointing with a gasket of hemp and cold caulking compound
unless otherwise described.

Q.2 Provision of holes

Notwithstanding the provision of SMM Clause Q.1 (g), the provision of holes shall be deemed to be included in
the description of fixing.

DEFINITIONS

Q.3 Painting

The preparation of surfaces shall be deemed to be included with the description for painting. Specific requirements
relating to the preparation of surfaces are given in the WORKMANSHIP section or these Preambles. In the
absence of specific requirement surfaces shall be prepared in the manner recommended by the manufacturer of the
paint being used.

Q.4 Welding

In the absence of specific requirements the techniques and material the work and the metals being connected.

Q.5 Backgrounds requiring plugging

The term ‘backgrounds requiring plugging’ shall mean any or all of the backgrounds described in SMM Clause
Q.1 (h)(iv), and shall be deemed to include the associated plugging.

Q.6 Plugging

The term ‘plugging’ shall mean provision and fixing of hardwood or approved proprietary plugs, or, at the
Contractor’s option, fixing by means of a cartridge operated rivet gun or other approved mechanical means.

Q.7 Surface finishes

In the absence of specific requirements, the treatment and finish or pipe fittings shall be appropriate to finish of the
pipes with which they are associated.’’

Q.8 Pipes sizes

The sizes of the pipe shall be the diameter of the bore.

GENERALLY

Q.9 Execution of plumbing work

All plumbing work shall be executed in accordance with the best principles of modern practice by a firm of fully
qualified and registered plumbers. The Contractor shall obtain the Architect written approval to the firm he
proposed to employ before the plumbing works are commenced. (Cont’d.)

Specification
Plumbing Installation
(2/Q/3)
Q.9 Execution of plumbing work (Cont’d.)

The contractor shall obtain the Architects prior written approval to the position of all pipe runs, valve positions,
control points, access points and the for all plumbing installations.

At the time of practical completion the Contractor shall prepare and hand to the Architect four copies of plans and
diagrams showing the positions of all pipe runs, valve positions, control points, access points and the like for all
plumbing installations. Such plans and diagrams shall be to the Architect approval, and practical completion of the
plumbing installation shall be deemed to have taken place only after receipt by the Architect of such approval
plans and diagrams.

GENERALLY

All plumbing and drainage works shall be executed in accordance with the Regulations of the Local Authorities
and Water Supply Companies The Contractor shall give all notices and pay all fees require thereunder. The
amount of such fees shall be deemed to be included in the Contract Sum, unless they are expressly in these
documents by way of a Provision Sum or PC Sum.

RAINWATER INSTALLATIONS

Q.10 Plastic Pipes and fittings

Plastic pipes, fittings and accessories shall be obtained from a manufacturing source approved by the Architect in
writing to comply with B.S 4576, heavy grade PVC, colour to be selected by the Architect,
fixed true to line with straps, supplied by the manufacturer screwed to hardwood plugs with galvanized screws,
and jointed all in accordance with the manufacturer’s instruction . Rubber sealing rings shall comply with B.S.
2494 type 2.

Q.11 Galvanized steel tubes and fittings

Galvanized steel tubes and fittings shall comply with B.S. 1387 “medium” grade with galvanized reinforced
malleable cast iron fittings complying with B.S. 143 and 1256, with B.S. 21 threads.

Jointing - Tubing and fittings shall be seam-jointed using hemp and red lead putty or ‘Boss’ white.

Fixing - Tubes shall be fixed clear or walls or soffits, with galvanized malleable iron brackets complying with
B.S. 1494, (or with hangers or special fixing where so described), spaced at not more than 3 meter centers.

Q.12 Rainwater outlets

PVC rainwater outlets shall be manufactured to the sizes and profiles measured herein from heavy grade PVC,
with a minimum 75 mm wide flange all round the top for roof surfaces; fully bedded in hot bitumen and jointed to
the PVC rainwater pipes.

Fulbora type coated cast iron outlets, with grating, hook bolt and clamping device shall be cast into concrete or
built into blockwork in the positions and to the elevations shown on the drawings, and jointed with caulked lead to
rainwater pipes.

Q.13 Testing

Rainwater installations shall be subjected to a water test and proved capable of withstanding a pressure of 1.05 m
head of water to the satisfaction of the Architect. Any defects are to be made good by the Contractor and the whole
system left sound and perfect.

Specification
Plumbing Installations
(2/Q/4)
 SANITARY INSTALLATION

Q.14 Bye-Laws

All the work shall comply with the requirements of the Local Council Bye-Laws and drainage regulations, and
shall be executed to the satisfaction of the Architect and the Local Authority.

Q.15 Setting-out

The position of all pipe runs, including joints and connections, holes and the like, shall be agreed with the
Architect before work is commenced.

Q.16 Spun cast iron pipes, cast iron fittings and accessories

Spun cast iron pipes and sand cast iron fittings shall comply with B.S 416 for medium grade coated pipes and
fittings. Sockets and spigots shall be type B on pipes and type A on fittings.

Access – doors shall be oval type with asbestos washers and manganese bronze bolts.

Jointing - pipes and fittings shall be jointed with a gasket of hemp and tightly caulked cold caulking compound.

Fixing – except where adequately restrained and supported by being built in, all pipes and fittings shall be fixed
with one holderbat to each socket. Pipes less than 75 mm diameter shall be fixed 25 mm clear of walls and those
75 mm diameter and Over,40 mm clear of walls. Holderbats shall comply with B.S. 416 Table 21

Q.17 Galvanized steel tubes and fittings

Galvanized steel tubing shall comply with B.S. 1387 “medium” grade with galvanized reinforced malleable cast
iron fittings complying with B.S. 143 and 1256, with B.S 1256 threads.

Jointing - tubing and fittings shall be seam-jointed using hemp and red lead putty or ‘Boss’ white.

Fixing - tubes shall be fixed clear of walls or soffits, with galvanized malleable iron brackets complying with B.S.
1494 Table 6a (or with hangers or special fixing where so described), spaced at not more than 3 metre centers.

Q.18 Plastic pipes and fittings

Soil, waste and ventilating pipes, fittings and accessories shall be obtained from manufacturing source approved
by the Architect in writing to comply with B.S. 4514 in manufacturer screwed to hardwood plugs with galvanized
screws and jointed in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions.

Waste and ant-syphonage pipes below 54 mm in diameter shall comply with B.S. 5255.

Q.19 Sleeves

All drains passing through walls or foundations shall have sleeves of cast iron pipe of sufficient size to allow a 3
mm clearance round the drain.

Q.20 Brackets and hangers

Brackets for supporting horizontal drains from walls or beams, shall be of 75 mm x 75 mm x 10 mm coated steel
tee with one end rounded up and of sufficient for the other end to be built in for a depth of 225 mm. (contd)

Specification
Plumbing installations
(2/Q/5)
Q.20 Brackets and hangers (cont’d.)

Hangers for suspending drains from soffits shall consist of a pair of forged 50 mm x 10 mm coated steel half pipe
saddles bolted together around the pipe and to a 20 mm diameter coated steel for the required length with one end
forged into an eye to receive the bolt. The top of the bar shall either be fanged casting in, or shall be threaded with
nut and plate washer. Where fixed through floors the projecting end of the bar shall be cut off flush with the nut.

Q.21 Wire balloons

Wire balloons shall be of copper; mosquito proofed and shall comply with B.S. 416 Table 22.

Q.22 Appliances

Appliances shall be ROCA Products. In the event that the appliances specified are unavailable, the supply of
alternatives which are at least equal in every respect in quality and specification to those specified will be
permitted with the prior written approval of the Architect.

The Contractor shall order the appliances immediately on commencing of the works, with a copy of the order
being provided to the Architect.

Q.23 Testing

The contractor shall, from time to time as required to suit the progress of the building, air-test the plumbing and
internal drainage in sections, to the satisfaction of the Architect, before any such work is covered. At the
completion of the works all soil pipes and branches and waste pipes and other parts of the internal drainage works
connected directly with any sewerage drain or sewerage drain ventilating pipe or soil pipes, shall be subjected to a
water test and be proved capable of resisting a pressure of 1.5 meter head of water and the Architect may also
direct that a sample or ventilating system as he thinks desirable, and everything necessary for these shall be
supplied by the Contractor.

Q.24 Cleansing

On completion of the works, immediately before handing over, the Contractor shall cleanse thoroughly the whole
of the system and prove that is functioning freely to the satisfaction of the Architect .

Q.25 Habitation certificate

On completion, the Contractor shall obtain a ‘Habitation’ certificate from the Local Council and forward it to the
Architect.

HOT AND COLD WATER INSTALLATIONS

Q.26 Galvanized steel tubes and fittings

Galvanized steel tubes shall comply with B.S. 1387 heavy grade for rising mains and branches off rising mains,
and medium grade for distributing pipes; except where the latter are in contact with the ground when they shall be
heavy grade. Fittings shall be galvanized reinforced malleable cast iron fittings complying with B.S. 143 and 1256,
with B.S. 1256 threads.

Jointing - tubes and fittings shall be screw-jointed using hemp and red lead putty or ‘Boss’ white. Connections to
flushing cisterns, bit taps and the like shall be made with copper connectors to facilitate removal.

Fixing - unless described as being fixed in chases, tubes shall be fixed clear of walls and soffits with galvanized
malleable iron brackets complying with B.S. 1494, Table 6a (or with hanger or special fixing where so described),
spaced at not more than the distance in the following tables:- (Cont’d.)

Specification
Plumbing Installations
(2/Q/6)
Q.26 Galvanized steel tubes and fittings (Cont’d.)

Spacing of fixing

Size of pipe Maximum spacing in meter

13 mm 2.00
19 mm 2.50
25 mm to 50 mm 3.00
over to 50 mm 3.50

Q.27 Pipe work generally

Pipes shall be the maximum lengths possible to avoid unnecessary jointing. Pipes shall be fixed to sufficient falls
to prevent air locks and to enable the system to be drained.

Q.28 Sleeves

Where sleeves are required for pipes passing through concrete, or block work, they shall be of galvanized steel
tube of sufficient diameter to give at least 3 mm clearance around the pipe.

Q.29 Pipe work ancillaries

Drainage taps with loose keys shall comply with B.S. 2879.

Ball valves shall be ‘Portsmouth’ type complying with B.S 1212 for high or low pressure as described fitted with a
silence tube drilled with a 6 mm hole above the level of the overflow warning pipe. Floats not exceeding 150 mm
diameter shall be plastic type complying with B.S 1968 Clause.

Bib-taps shall comply with B.S. 1010 and shall be of brass with fixed jumpers and where so described shall be
chromium plated or shall have nozzle screwed for hose union and locking arm.

Stop valves shall comply with B.S 1010 and shall be of brass with crutch handles or loose key where as described.
Those in exposed positions shall have polished brass bodies.

Gate, check and globe valves shall comply with B.S 5154 and shall be of plate of approved manufacture complete
with cover with inspection manhole. Tanks shall be assembled entirely in accordance with the manufacturer’s
written instructions.

Storage cisterns shall comply with B.S 417, Part 2, Grade A, galvanized with one piece galvanized covers.

Q.31 Testing

Clean out storage cisterns and tanks, including removal of all swarf, fill and test the whole of the hot and cold
water installations, rectify all defects, drain and leave in a clean, serviceable condition.

Specification
Plumbing Installation
(2/Q/7)
 ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS

LIST OF CLAUSES

GENERALLY

R.1 Bye – laws

R.2 Inspection of the site of the works

R.3 Definitions

R.4 Earthing

R.5 Installation

MATERIALS

R.6 Materials and equipment

R.7 Conduit and fittings

R.8 Trunking and fittings

R.9 Wires and cables

R.10 Handling

R.11 Clearance to other equipment

R.12 Distribution panel boards

R.13 Junction and outlet boxes

R.14 Switches and sockets

WORKMANSHIP

R.15 Conduit and fittings

R.16 Trucking and fittings

R.17 Wires and cables

R.18 Outlet and junction boxes

R.19 Switches and convenience outlets

R.20 Panel boards

R.21 Lighting fittings

R.22 Telephone system

R.23 Tests

R.24 Completion and record drawings

Specification
Electrical Installation
(2/R/1)
 GENERALLY

R.1 Bye – laws

The entire installations are to be carried out in accordance with the latest edition of “Regulations for the Electrical
Equipment of Buildings published by the Institution of Electrical Engineers (I.E.E.), London and TANESCO
special regulations.

The entire installations shall conform in every respect with the regulations and requirements of TANESCO, as
applied to the present electrical installation and of the P. & T. and all other Public Authorities having jurisdiction
in respect of these installations.

R.2 Inspection of the site of the works

The Contractor shall be deemed to have inspected the site of the works to completely ascertain the nature of, and
the particular conditions under which, the Electrical Works shall be carried out and shall be further deemed to
have obtained all other information required for the proper carrying out of the said works to the approval of
TANESCO.

R.3 Definitions

Definitions of terms used herein: “Work”: labour, materials, equipment, controls, accessories and all other items
customarily furnished and/or required for proper and complete installation and testing of work.

“Wiring”: conduit, fittings, wire, junctions, connections, pull and outlet boxes, switches, motor starters, cut-outs
and sockets and all items necessary or required in connection with, or relating to, such wiring. “Concealed”:
embedded or closed masonry, concrete or other construction as approved.

“Exposed”: not installed underground or “concealed”.

“Noted”: as indicated on drawings and/or specified.

“Indicated” or “Shown”: as revealed on the drawings

“Similar” or “Equal”: equal in kind, quality and function and of approved

manufacturer.

R.4 Earthing

Provide earthing for the entire electrical installation as indicated on the drawings and specified herein.

Include, but not necessarily limited to, requiring earthing are the followings:

(i) Conductor enclosures

(ii) Panel boards

(iii) Non-current-carrying metal parts of fixed equipments such as motor starters and instrument
cases,

(iv) Water piping.

Install earthing conductor and earthing electrodes of approved type, size, number, depth and location so that
resistance to ground shall not exceed two (2) Ohms.

Size and type of earthing conductors, earthing wires (in the plastic conducts), earthing clamps, bonding jumpers,
conduit, fittings as well as methods of fixing same to obtain electrical continuity and effective earthing shall be as
per section 4 of “Regular for the Electrical Equipment of Building” of the I.E.E. (Contd)

Specification
Electrical Installation (2/R/3)
R.4 Earthing (Contd)

The earthing system shall conform in all respect to sections 4 and 5 of “Regulations for the Electrical Equipment
of Buildings” of the I.E.E.

R.5 Installation

The contractor is responsible for marking out the cable route and for the supervision of the backfilling in so far as
the prevention of damage to cables in this process is concerned.

MATERIALS

R.6 Materials and equipment

Materials: new, best quality and free from defects where procured by the Contractor as the case may be.

Standard: B.S. 1557 - P.V.C. insulated and P.V.C. sheathed cable

B.S. 31 - Steel conduit and fittings (where conduit is

exposed only )

B.S. 731 - Flexible steel conduits and adapters.

R.7 Conduit and fittings

Concealed conduit shall be semi rigid heavy duty P.V.C

Outlet boxes shall be galvanized steel

Where outlet boxes do not have an integral cover, install blank cover plates on all outlet boxes installed for future
outlets.

Where conduit is installed exposed such conduit and fittings shall be in galvanized steel.

P.V.C. conduit and fittings shall comply with the regulations for no-metallic conduit of “Regulations for Electrical
Equipment of Buildings” of the I.E.E.

R.8 Trunking and fittings

P.V.C. trunking shall be grey in colour and before ordering the Contractor shall submit proposal for approval to
the Architect and Consulting Engineers.

Cover sections for outlets shall be pre-fabricated bends; angles and end- pieces will be accepted.

Open cable trays shall be straight flange design of heavy duty design. It shall be manufactured by hot dipped
galvanized perforated steel, to B.S. 2989-1982. Only pre-fabricated bends tee and cross will be accepted.

Suspension rods shall be minimum 8 mm diameter hot dipped galvanized steel.

R.9 Wires and cables

Insulated conductors for interior wiring shall conform to the latest applicable British Standards and as
manufactured by members of Cable Makers Association. (Cont’d.)

Specification
Electrical Installations
(2/R/4)
R.9 Wires and cables (Cont’d.)

Conductor for wiring throughout the building shall be copper single core, P.V.C. (polyvinyl chloride) insulated,
660 v grades, conduit type, in form of single core or multicore as shown on drawings.

Earthing conductors shall be insulated copper, standard soft annealed.

Main feeder cables shall be Cooper PVC SWA PVC 600 v grade.

Cable lugs: Solder less pressure, single or multiple conductor straight or angle type, as required.

Feeder cables and conductors shall have size not less than 2.5 sq.m for circuits 35 m. Or less and not less than 4.00
sq.m for circuits more than 35 m. Long, or where specially indicated that Long, or where specially indicated.

R.10 Handling

Cables shall at all times be handled with care and every effort made to avoid damage.

Unloading, rolling to position and mounting of cable drums shall be carried out efficiently and carefully in the
recognized manner and cable shall be pulled from the top of drum and twisting shall at all times be avoided.

Adequate provision of drum jacks, rollers and other handling accessories shall be used and make-shift
arrangements will not be tolerated. In all cases care shall be taken to break the rotation of the drum and cable shall
not be dragged over loose earth, concrete or any surface but shall be adequately supported on rollers or man-
handled into position.

The contractor shall take particular care to avoid damage to other services which may run adjacent to or across the
route of the cable being installed.

R.11 Clearance to other equipment

Cables shall be installed within a minimum of 200 mm clearance of any equipment or pipe work including lagging
associated with other services. Where this condition is unavoidable or difficult to maintain, the engineers shall be
informed prior to the installation being commenced, otherwise the Contractor may be called upon to divert or
adjust the route of any cable so affected.

Cables in trenches are to be laid at a minimum depth of 0.6 m for main cables and 0.75 m for 11 KV cables and
are to be on a 100 mm be of sifted soil or sand and a further 100 mm shall be added before laying cable covers in
position. The sand bedding and covering will be carried out by the Contractor.

When laid in trenches the cables are to be completely protected by interlocking concrete or other approved cable
covers.

R.12 Distributions panel boards

Automatic circuit breaker panel boards, complete with their enclosing cabinets shall be installed conforming to
detailed specifications as hereinafter listed.

The enclosing cabinet shall be manufactured from code gauge, galvanized sheet steel, with corners lapped and
riveted, or fastened by other approved standard methods. Trims and doors shall be manufactured from one piece of
full finished sheet steel not less than 12 s.w.g. not galvanized. Panel boards shall be surface- mounted or recess-
mounted as indicated on the drawings.

Directory card with frame and transparent cover on each panel board to indicate designation or the circuits.
(Cont’d.)

Specification
Electrical Installations
(2/R/5)
R.12 Distributions panel board (Cont’d.)

Panel boards shall be of manufacturer’s standard design for operation on 400/230V, 3 phase, 4 wire solid neutral
system.

All automatic circuits breakers shall be quick make, quick break on manual operation, trip free, with inverse time
characteristics secured through the use of a bimetallic tripping element supplemented by a magnetic trip .
Automatic tripping shall be clearly shown by the operating handle assuming a neutral position midway between
the manual “on” and “off” position.

All multi-pole breakers shall be so designed that an overload on one pole automatically causes all poses to open.

R.13 Junction and outlet boxes

Junction and outlet boxes for concealed work shall be galvanized stamped steel or approved plastic type.

All junction boxes shall be of suitable size to avoid undue packing of cable

Outlet boxes shall be of size and type to accommodate structural conditions, size and number of conductors
entering the device or fixture for which required.

Covers when required shall be screwed on.

R.14 Switches and sockets

All local wall light switches shall be 10 amps. 250 V, flush single pole, three-way or four-way as required.

All socket outlets shall be 13A, 250 V, flush type, 3 pin (2 pole and earth), unless otherwise noted.

WORKMANSHIP

R.15 Conduit and fittings

Install conduit concealed in walls, floors or ceiling slabs as shown on drawings and herein specified. Conduits of
maximum 19 mm diameter may be installed in the concrete topping of the structural roof slab system. Conduit
shall not be installed in the roof insulation fill.

Use flexible steel conduit for connection to electric water heater, for short connections where rigid conduit is
impractical and where indicated on drawings.

In walls install conduit as nearly as possible vertically or horizontally where necessary, but never diagonally. In
concrete slab conduit shall be approved as to locations, proper bends, even pitch and rigidity of support before slab
is poured.

Place caps in ends of conduit as soon as located to prevent entry of foreign materials.

Conduit shall be continuous from outlet to outlet, from outlets to cabinets, junctions or pull boxes, and secured to
all boxes so that each system is continuous from service to outlets.

Slope conduits continuously toward outlet boxes to drain properly and avoid trapping condensate.

Specification
Electrical Installation
(2/R/6)
R.19 Switches and socket outlets

Fasten switches and socket outlets to boxes firmly so that they do not depend on cover plates to pull them tight.

Light switches to be located near the door on side opposite hinge except where otherwise indicated. Wherever
possible to be grouped in a gang cover plate. Verify final door hinge location in field prior to switch boxes
installation.

Socket outlet circuits shall be independent of light circuits.

Mounting height: Unless otherwise noted on the drawings electric devices shall be located with their center line
at the following elevations above finished floor:

Light switches 1.20 m

Socket outlets 0.45 m
Water heater switch 1.80 m
Lighting fixtures as shown on drawings
Wall brackets 2.10 m

R.20 Panel boards

Install where shown on drawings automatic circuit breaker panel boards complete with their enclosing cabinet.

All cabinets shall be painted with one primer coat and at least one finish coat.

All panel boards shall be earthed.

R.21 Lighting fittings

Install lighting fittings complete with lamps as scheduled on drawings. The contractor shall be responsible for all
fitting wiring, hanging, connecting up and making ready to operate.

The lighting fittings as shown on schedule are listed by manufacturer’s catalogue not for the purpose of indicating
by general type, style and quality required. Similar from other manufactures may be provided by the Client.

Where manufacturer’s catalogue numbers are not noted the Contractor shall propose lighting fitting, of design
shown, for the Client’s procurement.

Fluorescent type fixtures shall be provided with single or double lamp ballasts of the high power factor type and
low level sound.

Incandescent light fixtures shall be equipped with English bayonet lamp holders, heavy duty type.

Flexi glass and similar plastic diffusing material shall be guaranteed against cracking, marring and discoloration
for five years.

R.22 Telephone system

Install required network of empty conduit, terminating in the telephone outlet box as shown on the drawings.

Contractor shall be responsible for coordinating this installation with the TTCL.

Specification
Electrical Installations
(2/R/7)
R.23 Tests

Upon completion of works, test installation for verification of polarity, insulation and earthing. Test all panel
feeders and electrical wiring. If tests indicate faults, these shall be rectified and further tests shall be conducted as
required by TANESCO and/or the Architect.

R.24 Completion and record drawings

The Contractor shall arrange for a full set of prints to be kept on the site, showing the progress of all work in
connection with the electrical and telephone installations. Such plans must be kept up to date and all tube runs,
positions of points, equipment and apparatus etc., are to be coloured in red on the drawings as they are installed.

Upon Practical completion of the Work the Contractor shall provide transparent linen negatives and two black and
white prints on opaque linen from each negative of the following record drawings:

1 1:100 scale plans showing exact location and sizes of all conduit runs, circuit wiring, sub-main wiring, panel
boards, position of equipments, controlling switches, telephone outlet boxes, receptacles, power outlets,
lighting points etc.

Specification
Electrical Installation
(2/R/8)
 FLOOR, WALL & CEILING FINISHING

LIST OF CLAUSES

PLASTERWORK

S.1 Generally

S.2 Cement

S.3 Lime putty

S,4 Sands

S.5 Water

S.6 Storage of materials

S.7 Testing

S.8 Preparation of surfaces

S.9 Dubbing out

S.10 Mixing of materials

S.11 Period between coats

S.12 Finish

S.13 Junctions of wall and ceiling

S.14 Arrises

BEDS AND BACKINGS

S.15 Materials, storage, testing and mixing of materials

S.16 Light weight roof screed

S.17 Cement and sand proportions

S.18 Preparation of surfaces

S.19 Laying

S.20 Surfaces of beds and backings

OTHER INSITU FINISHING

S.21 Materials, storage, testing and fixing of materials

S.22 Water proofers

S.23 Integral hardeners

Specification
Floor, Wall & Ceiling finishings
(2/S/1)
S.24 Preparation of surfaces

S.25 Cement and sand paving

S.26 Granolithic paving

S.27 Insitu terrazzo paving

S.28 Washed terrazzo wall finish

S.29 Tyrolean finish

TILE, SLAB AND BLOCK FINISHINGS

S.30 Mortar for bedding and pointing

S.31 Preparation of surfaces

S.32 Glazed ceramic wall tiles

S.33 Concrete tiles

S.34 Terrazzo tiles

S.35 Vinyl and vinyl asbestos tiles

S.36 Wood block flooring

PLAIN SHEET FINISHINGS

S.37 Generally

S.38 Method of measurement

Specification
Floor, Wall & Ceiling Finishing
(2/S/2)
 FLOOR, WALL & CEILING FINISHINGS

PLASTERWORK

S.1 Generally

Render, both internal and external shall be cement and sand in the proportions 1:4 finished to thickness specified.

Plaster shall consist of an undercoat of 1 part cement to 4 parts sand by volume and 5% lime putty, and a finishing
coat of 1 part cement to 1 part sand to 5 parts lime putty. Each coat shall be finished to the thickness specified.

S.2 Cement

Cement shall be ordinary Portland cement and shall comply with B.S 12. White and coloured cements shall
comply with B.S 12 and be obtained from an approved manufacturer.

S.3 Lime putty

Lime putty shall be prepared from hydrated lime complying with B.S 890.

Hydrated lime shall be added to water, stirred to a creamy consistency and left to mature for at least 16 hours
before use.

Alternatively, ready slaked lime may be obtained from an approved source.

The lime putty shall be protected from drying out.

S.5 Sands

Sand for cement and lime mixes shall comply with B.S 1199. Table I.

Sand for use with white Portland cement shall be silver sand and that for use in coloured cement mixes shall be of
a suitable colour.

S.6 Storage of materials

All plasters, lime and cement, shall be stored in a properly roofed, weatherproof, dry, well ventilated shed, use
exclusively for this purpose, with a wood floor not less than 150 mm clear above the ground. All sands shall be
stored separately, according to type, on clear, hard, dry standing and shall be protected from contamination.

S.7 Testing

Samples of all materials, as directed, shall be taken from time to time as required by the Architect.

All defective materials shall be removed from the site without delay, at the Contractor’s expense.

Specification
Floor, Wall & Ceiling Finishing
(2/S/3)
S.8 Preparation of surfaces

Surfaces to receive plastering shall be dry brushed to remove all loose particles, dust, laitance, efflorescence, etc.,
and any projecting fins on concrete surfaces shall be hacked off. All trace of mould oil shall be removing from
concrete surface by scrubbing with water containing detergent and rinsing with fresh water.

Concrete surfaces shall be hacked over to provide adequate key.

Surfaces shall be wetted and re-wetted as required to equalize suction before the plaster coats are applied. In
particular, dense hard concrete surfaces shall be wetted and re-wetted as required before bonding plaster is applied.

S.9 Dubbing out

Dubbing out shall be in the same mix as subsequent coats and shall not exceed 10 mm in thickness in one
particular applications

S.10 Mixing of materials

All materials shall be thoroughly mixed in the proportions described. No mixes of plasters, other than those
described, shall be used.

Bunkers and gauge boxes shall be thoroughly cleaned after each mix and due care and attention shall be given at
all times to their cleanliness.

Cement – lime – sand plasters shall be used within two hours of the gauging with cement.

All tools shall be kept clean and fresh plaster shall not be contaminated with set plaster.

S.11 Period between coasts

Cement – lime – sand undercoats shall be allowed to dry out thoroughly before a further coat is applied.

S.12 Finish

All undercoats shall be scratched to provide an adequate key for the next coat. Unless otherwise described, all
rendering shall be finished with a wood float, as shall all undercoats. All finishing coats shall be finished with a
steel trowel.

S.13 Junction of wall and ceiling

A neat definite cut shall be made with the edge of the trowel through all coats of the wall plaster at the junctions
with ceilings.

S.14 Arrises

All arises shall be pencil rounded unless otherwise, specified.

BEDS AND BACKIGNS

S.15 Materials, storage, testing and mixing of materials

Cement, sand, water, etc., storage, testing and mixing of materials shall be as described for plasterwork.

Specification
Floor, Wall & Ceiling Finishing
(2/S/4)
S.16 Light weight roof screed

Light weight roof screed shall consist of one part cement to eight parts vermiculite aggregate, laid to falls as
necessary and shall be covered with a minimum o 12 mm cement and sand (1:4) screed finished to suit the
requirements of the particular finishing.

All junctions between horizontal and vertical surfaces to roofs shall be finished with a triangular angle fillet of the
sizes described.

Light weight roof screen shall be cured properly for 7 days, and shall be thoroughly and completely dry before any
finishing are applied.

S.17 Cement and sand proportions

Cement and sand shall be in the proportions of 1:3 or 1:4, as specified by volume.

S.18 Preparation of surfaces

Walls shall be prepared as described for ‘Plasterwork’ concrete floors or roofs to receive screeds or paving shall be
hacked where necessary to remove concrete mortar or plaster droppings and to expose the course aggregate and
well brushed to remove all loose particles and dirt.

Concrete floors and roofs shall be wetted before screeds or paving are laid, with a cement sand slurry (1:1) being
scrubbed into the surface in front of the screed or paving laying.

S.19 Laying

Beds and backings shall be laid in bays of suitable lengths and widths and to falls where so shown with proper
screeds and shall be kept wet and protected until set hard.

S.20 Surface of beds and backings

Screeded beds for insitu floor finishings or floor finishings bedded in mortar shall be left rough from the screeding
boards.

Floated beds for inflexible floor finishings bedded in mastic, shall be left with a plain un-textured surface.

Trowelled backings for finishing by specialists shall be to the approval of the specialist Sub-Contractor

OTHER INSITU FINISHING

S.21 Materials, storage, testing and mixing of materials

Cement, sand, water, etc., storage, testing and mixing of materials, shall be as described for ‘Plasterwork’.

S.22 Water roofers

Water roofers shall be ‘Sealocrete’ double strength premix, or other approved integral waterproofed, used in
accordance with the manufacturers’ instructions.

S.23 Integral hardeners

Integral hardener shall be ‘Febspeed Plus’ or other approved, used in accordance with the manufacturers’
instructions.

Specification
Floor, Wall & Ceiling Finishing
(2/S/5)
S.24 Preparation of surfaces

Concrete surfaces to receive paving without screeds, shall be prepared as described herein.

S.25 Cement and sand paving

Cement and paving shall be in the proportions and to the thick nesses described, and shall be finished with a steel
trowel unless otherwise specified and shall be protected and kept wet until hard.

S.26 Granolithic paving

Granolithic paving shall consist of 1 volume of cement to 1 volume of sand mixed with 2.5 volumes of approved
local stone aggregate laid to the thickness described.

The base shall be kept wet for 12 hours before laying granolithic paving unless the paving is being laid
monolithically with the base.

Immediately after laying the granolithic paving shall be protected and kept damp until thoroughly hard. It shall
then be ground and polished by machine. Any holes or pores which become apparent after grinding shall be filled
with the same mix as the paving, well worked into the surface and left proud. The portions so treated shall be filled
with the same mix as the paving, well worked into the surface and left proud. The portions so treated shall be
protected and kept damp until hard when they shall be polished.

S.27 Insitu terrazzo paving

Terrazzo finish shall be carried be carried out by a firm approved by the Architect in writing. It shall be composed
of a screed of cement and sand (1:3) and the terrazzo which shall be a minimum of 16 mm thick. Before terrazzo
work is commenced, the contractor shall submit sample pieces to the Architect for approval.

The terrazzo shall consist of coloured cement and approved local marble aggregate free from dust in the
proportions 1:2. The colour of the cement and the grading of the aggregate shall be as selected by the Architect.
The terrazzo shall be laid while the underbed is still plastic and be well compacted and trowelled to produce a non
absorbent surface. It shall be divided into bays 1 metre by 1 metre with 3mm aluminium strips for the full depth of
the terrazzo and underbed. Immediately after laying the terrazzo shall be protected and kept damp until thoroughly
hard. It shall then be ground and polished by machine. Any holes or pores which become apparent after grinding
shall be filled with neat coloured cement well worked into the surface and left proud. The portions so treated shall
be protected and kept damp until hard when they shall be polished. Dry polishing shall only be carried out with the
agreement of the contractor.

S.28 Washed terrazzo wall finishing

Washed terrazzo finish shall be carried out by a firm approved by the Architect in writing and shall be guaranteed
for six months from the date of completion of he work. It shall be composed of a screeded underbed of cement and
sand (1:4), and terrazzo with both layers of the thick nesses specified.

The terrazzo shall consist of cement and local marble aggregate free from dust in the proportions 1:1.5. The
colour and grading of the cement and aggregate shall be as selected by the Architect.

The terrazzo shall be laid whilst the underbed is still plastic and shall be compacted and trowelled to produce a
non-absorbent surface. Before the final set takes place the terrazzo surface shall be lightly brushed, with just a
sufficient amount of water to expose the surface aggregate to produce an even appearance. Adjoining areas and
finishing shall be protected from staining, and any stains produced shall be removed or remedied to the satisfaction
of he Architect at the Contractor’s expense. The whole surface when hard shall be covered with one coat of
approved silicone solution.

Specification
Floor, Wall & Ceiling Finishing
(2/S/6)
S.29 Tyrolean finish

Tyrolean finish shall be applied by machine in accordance with the instructions issued by the Cement Marketing
Company. The colour of the cement shall be as selected by the Architect. If required to do so by the Architect, the
Contractor shall provide a sample panel or panels of Tyrolean finish the cost of which shall be deemed to be
included in the Contract Sum. All adjoining areas and finishing shall be masked and protected so as to prevent
staining whilst applying the Tyrolean finish.

TILE, SLAB AND BLOCK FINISHING

S.30 Mortar for bedding and pointing

All materials for mortar, their storage, testing and mixing shall be as described in ‘Plasterwork’.

S.31 Preparation of surfaces

All surfaces to receive the finishing in this section shall be thoroughly cleaned; screeds to receive finishing bedded
in mortar shall be well wetted before lying is commenced.

S.32 Glazed ceramic wall tiles

Glazed ceramic wall tiles shall comply with B.S. 6431 and shall be of the sizes and colours described, and having
cushion edges.

The tiles shall be soaked in clean water for at least half an hour before fixing, stacked on edge tightly together and
end tiles turned glaze outwards and fixed as soon as the surface water has gone. The tiles shall be bedded in
cement and sand,(1:3), with straight joints 1.5 mm wide pointed in white cement, after scratching the surface of
the backing screed to form a key.

Alternatively, tiles shall be wiped clean and fixed dry with ‘Richafix’, or other approved adhesive, all in
accordance with the manufacturers’ recommendations with straight joints 1.5 mm wide pointed in white cement.

S.33 Concrete tiles

Concrete tiles shall comply with B.S. 1197, shall be thoroughly soaked in water and allowed to drain before laying
and shall be bedded and pointed in cement and sand (1:3), laid true and level or to even falls as specified.

S.34 Terrazzo tiles

Terrazzo tiles shall be laid by a specialist approved by the Architect in writing, and shall be supplied from an
approved source. The precast terrazzo shall consist of a backing of Portland cement and washed sand graded from
coarse to fine in the proportions of 1:3 and a terrazzo finish not less than 12 mm thick consisting of coloured
cement and marble aggregate free from dust in the proportions of 1:2. The colour of the cement and the colour and
grading of the aggregate shall be as selected by the Architect.

Tiles shall be hydraulically pressed during manufacturing to produce a non-absorbent surface and shall be polished
on the exposed surface.

Tiles shall be thoroughly soaked in water and drained off so that no free water remains on the surface before
laying and shall be bedded in cement and sharp sand (1:3) with straight joints 3 mm wide and pointed in coloured
cement, to match the colour of the tile, and sand (1:2). The surface of the paving shall finish true and level. All
cement stains shall be carefully removed. Sawdust shall not be used as a protection before joints are set.

Specification
Floor, Wall & Ceiling Finishing
(2/S/7)
S.35 Vinyl and vinyl asbestos tiles

Vinyl and vinyl asbestos tiles shall be of the types and sizes described and of a colour to be selected by the
Architect. Samples of all tiles and sheet shall be submitted to the architect for his approval. No flooring shall be
laid until plastering and painting of walls and ceilings is complete. All vinyl and vinyl asbestos tiles shall be laid
by a firm or firms to be approved by the Architect in writing. The Contractor shall obtain from the flooring
specialist before laying is commenced, and forward to the Architect, (a) a written statement to the effect that the
trowelled bed is in all respects satisfactory to receive the flooring, (b) a guarantee than any defects due to faulty
workmanship or materials occurring within six months of the certified date of completion of the whole of the
works, will be made good by the specialist at his own expense, and to the satisfaction of the Architect.

S.36 Wood block flooring

Wood block flooring shall be as manufactured by Italwood ltd., P O Box 2599, Dar es Salaam and shall be of the
timber and finish described. The flooring shall be laid by a specialist firm approved by the Architect in writing.

The contractor shall provide the Architect with samples for his approval before any tiles are ordered or laid.

No flooring shall be laid until plastering of walls and ceiling is complete. The contractor shall obtain from the
flooring specialist before lying is commenced, and forward to the Architect:-

(a) a written statement to the effect that the trowelled/floated bed is in all respects satisfactory to receive the
flooring and,

(b) a guarantee that any defects due to faulty workmanship or materials, occurring within six months of the
certified date of completion of the whole of the works, will be rectified to the satisfaction of the Architect.

PLAIN SHEET FINISHINGS

S.37 Generally

Plywood, block board, chipboard etc., and their fixing shall be as scribed in Joinery.

S.38 Method of measurement

The work ‘wall’ in the descriptions of plasterwork shall include walls and partitions of concrete, concrete
blockwork, brickwork or clay tile blockwork.

Prices for insitu finishing and beds or backings shall include hacking concrete or raking out brickwork or
brickwork joints to form keys.

Prices for all finishing and beds and backings shall include for the following:-

(1) Working behind pipes, and around flush electrical boxes.

(2) All dubbing out required on new work to reduce irregularities or cambers,, and to form flat surfaces in the
appropriate undercoat.
(3) Any formwork required.
(4) Trowel cuts between ceiling and wall plaster.

Specification
Floor, Wall & Ceiling Finishing
(2/S/8)
 GLAZING
LIST OF C LAUSES

DEFINITIONS

T.1 Method of glazing

MATERIALS

T.2 Glass generally

T.3 Putty for glazing to wood

T.4 Putty for glazing to metal

T.5 Samples

WORKMANSHIP

T.6 Glass to be kept free from moisture

T.7 Rebates and beads

T.8 Edges of glass

T.9 Beads glazing

T.10 Putty glazing

T.11 Wired glass

T.12 Method of measurement

Specification
Glazing
(2/T/1)
 GLAZING

DEFINITIONS

T.1 Method of glazing

Notwithstanding references in the descriptions of glazing method to glazing beads, or the like, with associated
fixing, and insulating strips, such components will be measured separately in accordance with the appropriate rules
of the SMM

The provision of glazing compounds and putties and sprigs, clips and other sundry fixing, shall be deemed to be
included with all items of glazing

Distance pieces and setting blocks, in appropriate materials, shall be provided in accordance with good glazing
practice and they shall be deemed to be included with all items of glazing.

MATERIALS

T.2 Glass generally

All glass shall comply in all respects with the appropriate section of B.S. 952. Plain sheet clear glass shall be O.Q.;
plate glass shall be GG; float glass shall be as manufactured by Pilkington Brothers Limited.

T.3 Putty for glazing to wood

Putty for glazing to wood shall comply with B.S. 544.

T.4 Putty for glazing metal

Putty for glazing metal shall be approved mastic manufactured for that purpose, used in accordance with the
manufacturer’s instructions.

T.5 Samples

Samples not less than 150 mm square, are to be submitted to the Architect for approval before any glass is cut.

WORKMANSHIP

T.6 Glass to be kept free from moisture

All glass surfaces shall be kept dry during transit and storage. Glass becoming moist from condensation or other
causes, shall be thoroughly dried and aired.

T.7 Rebates and beads

All glazing beads in wood shall be primed, (as measured in Painting and Decorating), before glazing is
commenced.

T.8 Edges of glass

All glass shall have clean cut edges. The edges of lourvres shall be rounded and polished.

T.9 Bead glazing

Glazing fixed by beads shall have both glass and beads bedded and back puttied, and the putty trimmed off flush.
Where sealing strip is used, it shall pass round both faces of the glass and be trimmed off flush on both sides.
Metal surfaces to receive sealing strip shall be treated with mineral oil before glazing

Specification
Glazing (2/T/2)
T.10 Putty glazing

Glazing in putty shall be executed in proper bed and back putties, sprigs, clips and splayed and mitred front
putties. The back putties shall be trimmed off flush with the top of the rebate and the splayed front putties shall be
finished 3 mm back from site line to allow for sealing between glass and putty with paint.

T.11 Wired glass

The wire in wired glass shall extend to the edges and be free form rust etc, and be parallel to the framing.

T.12 Method of measurement

Beads and sealing strips have been measured separately. Prices for glazing with beads are to include for taking out
and re-fixing beads as required, which shall be deemed to be bradded unless otherwise described.

Specification
Glazing
(2/T/3)
 PAINTING AND DECORATING
LIST OF CLAUSES
MATERIALS

U.1 Colour range

U.2 Approval of brands

U.3 Quality of products

U.4 Delivery

U.5 Same makers materials used for coating

U.6 Information and facilities to supplies

U.7 Storage

U.8 Remedying defects due to defective materials

U.9 Knotting

U.10 Stopping

U.11 Linseed oil

U.12 White spirit

U.13 Size

U.14 Cement paint

U.15 Emulsion paint

U.16 Black bituminous paint

U.17 Primer for alkaline surfaces

U.18 Primer for aluminium

U.19 Primer for bituminous surfaces

U.20 Primer for iron and steel work

U.21 Primer for zinc and galvanized steel

U.22 Creosote Type Preservative

U.23 Non creosote type preservative

U.24 Primer for hardboard

U.25 Primer for woodwork

Specification
Painting and Decorating
(2/U/1)
U.26 Oil paints

U.27 Polyurethane lacquer

U.28 Decorative wood stain

PREPARATION OF SURFACES

U.29 Approval

U.30 Stopping

U.31 Plastering, rendering, concrete, blockwork and brickwork

U.32 Asbestos cement

U.33 Lead and copper

U.34 aluminium

U.35 Iron and steel

U.36 Zinc and galvanized surfaces

U.37 Hardboard

U.38 Fibreboard

U.39 Plywood

U.40 Woodwork to be painted

U.41 Woodwork to receive clear finish

WORKMANSHIP

U.42 Standard of workmanship

U.43 Stirring of materials

U.44 Manufacturers instructions

U.45 Brush work

U.46 Priming of joinery

U.47 Condition of priming

U.48 Coatings to be dry

U.49 Rubbing down

U.50 Differing colours of undercoats

U.51 Painting in unsuitable conditions

U.52 Protection of wet surfaces

Specification
Painting and Decorating
(2/U/2
U.53 Damage to adjoining surfaces

U.54 Cleanliness

U. 55 Removal of ironmongery, etc

U.56 Method of measurement

Specification
Painting and Decorating
(2/U/3)
 PAINTING AND DECORATING

MATERIALS

U.1 Colour range

Painting and decorative schemes shall be carried out in colours selected by the Architect from the approved range
of colours.

U.2 Approval of brands

The Contractor shall seek, in writing, approval from the Architect for all brands of paint he wishes to use.

U.3 Quality of products

Where a type of paint is produced by the manufacturer in more than one quality, only paints and materials of the
first or best quality shall be used in the works. The Container label shall indicate clearly the quality of the paint
used.

Where it is not evident that the first or best quality of paint is being used, the Architect will order the removal of
such materials from site and rectification of any work executed with those materials, all at the Contractors expense

U.4 Delivery

All paints, varnishes, distempers and other surface coatings shall be delivered in sound, sealed containers labeled
clearly by the manufacturer, the label or decorated container stating:-

(a) the type of products

(b) the brand name, if any
(c) the use for which it is intended
(d) the manufacturers batch number
(e) the quality of the contents where more than one quality is available.

The label shall be a printed label; typewritten labels will not be accepted.

The batch deliveries shall be dated and used strictly in order of delivery.

No paint, other than water based paints and bituminous paint shall be delivered in containers exceeding 5 litres
capacity.

U.5 Same makers materials used for coatings

While materials for the works may be obtained from several makers, undercoats and finishing coats for a particular
surface must be (obtained from the same maker, (i.e. one maker’s finishing coat must be applied over another
maker’s undercoat)

U.6 Information and facilities to suppliers

The Contractor shall supply the paint manufacturers with all relevant details of the materials required to comply
with the descriptions in this Document and the manufacturers shall be given every facility for inspecting the work
during progress in order to ascertain that the materials are being used in accordance with their instructions, and
they are to take samples of their products from the site if they so desire.

Specification
Painting Decorating
(2/U/4)
U.7 Storage

All materials shall be kept in a dry, clean store, protected from the elements.

U.8 Remedying defects due to defective materials

All materials, which in the opinion of the Architect are unsatisfactory, shall be immediately removed from the site,
and any work executed with such defective materials shall be made good by the Contractor, at his own expense, to
the satisfaction of the Architect.

U.9 Knotting

Knotting shall comply with B.S. 1336

U.10 Stopping

(a) plasterwork shall be a plaster based filler

(b) concrete, rendering or blockwork, shall be of similar material to the background and shall be finished with a
similar texture

(c) asbestos cement and asbestos based insulating board, shall be a composition of asbestos filler cement

(d) internal woodwork, hardboard, fibreboard and plywood, shall be putty complying with B.S. 544, and shall be
tinted to match the colour of the undercoat

(e) external woodwork, shall be white lead paste with or without the addition of red lead complying with B.S 217,
type 2, and gold size, and shall be tinted to match the colour of the undercoat

(f) clear finished woodwork, shall be a stopping tinted to match the surrounding woodwork.

U.11 Linseed oil

Refined linseed oil shall comply with B.S. 242

Raw linseed oil shall comply with B.S. 243

Boiled linseed oil shall comply with B.S. 242

U.12 White spirit

White spirit shall comply with B.S. 245

U.13 Size

Size shall comply with B.S 3357

U.14 Cement paint

Cement paint shall be ‘Snowcem’, ‘Cempexo’, or other approved

U.15 Emulsion paint

Emulsion paint (interior and/or exterior), shall have a P.V.A. base and shall be of an approved brand. The first coat
shall be thinned in accordance with the manufacturer’s instruction. Where described as applied externally, the
paint shall incorporate an approved fungicide to prevent fungus growth.

Specification
Painting and Decorating
(2/U/5)
U.16 Black bituminous paint

Black bituminous paint shall comply with B.S. 3416 Type 1 for general use, type 2 for drinking water tanks.

U.17 Primer for alkaline surfaces

Primer for alkaline surfaces shall be a special primer obtained from the maker of the undercoat and finishing coat.

U.18 Primer for aluminium

Primer for new or weathered aluminium shall be zinc chromate priming paint in accordance with DEF 1039.

U.19 Primer for bituminous surfaces

Primer for bituminous surfaces to be finished with oil paint shall contain leafing aluminium flake.

U.20 Primer for iron and steelwork

Primer for iron and steelwork shall be:-

(a) lead based priming paint complying with B.S. 2523

(b) calcium plumbate priming paint complying with B.S 3698 Type A

U.21 Primer for zinc or galvanized steel

Primer for weathered or new zinc and galvanized surfaces shall be calcium plumbate paint complying with B.S.
3698 Type.

U.22 Creosote type preservative

Creosote type preservative shall comply with B.S 144 or 3051.

U.23 Non creosote type preservative

Non creosote type preservative shall be ‘Brunophen No. 2”, “Rentokil QD” or other approved.

U.24 Primer for hardboard

Primer for hardboard, not factory primed or sealed, shall be a suitable primer obtained from the maker undercoat
and finishing coat.

U.25 Primer for woodwork

Primer for woodwork, other than the internal surfaces of external doors, windows and their frames and the backs
of frames and linings, etc, in contact with masonry concrete or plaster, shall be leadless white or light grey priming
paint not darker than colour 0-093 of B.S. 4800 which shall be compatible with the subsequent coats and obtained
from the same maker.

Primer for external woodwork and the internal surfaces of external doors, windows, and their frames, and the
backs of all frames linings, etc., in contact with masonry, concrete or plaster shall be lead based pink priming paint
complying with B.S. 2523.

Specification
Painting and Decoration
(2/U/6)
U.26 Oil paints

Hard gloss, semi-gloss matt and flat oil paints, and respective undercoats, shall be of approved brands.

U.27 Polyurethane lacquer

Polyurethane lacquer shall be an approved single or two pack lacquer described as of interior or exterior quality, as
appropriate.

U.28 Decorative wood stain

Decorative wood stain shall be Pinotex as manufactured by Sadolins Paints (T) Ltd, or other equal and approved.

PREPARATION OF SURFACES

U.29 Approval

The preparation of all surfaces must be seen and approved by the Architect before any coatings are applied.

U.30 Stopping

Stopping referred to in the following clauses shall be the appropriate stopping hereinbefore described.

U.31 Plaster, rendering, concrete, block work and brickwork

All plaster or mortar splashes, etc., shall be removed from plaster, rendering, concrete, block work and brickwork
by careful scraping; all holes, cracks, etc., shall be stopped and the whole of the surfaces shall be brushed down to
remove dust and loose materials. In addition, all traces of mould oil shall be removed from concrete surfaces by
scrubbing with water and detergent and rinsing with clean water to remove all detergent.

When efflorescence has occurred, or is suspected, painting shall be differed for a period as required by the
Architect.

U.32 Asbestos cement

All plaster or mortar splashes, etc., shall be removed from asbestos cement by careful scraping; all oil and grease
spots shall be removed with white spirit; all holes shall be stopped and the whole of the surfaces brushed down to
remove dust and loose materials.

U.33 Lead and copper

Lead and copper surfaces shall be washed with soap and water, roughed with abrasive paper and washed with
white spirit.

U.34 Aluminium

Aluminium surface shall be washed with white spirit and either carefully roughed with abrasive paper or treated
with etching solution in accordance with the maker’s instructions.

U.35 Iron or steel

Before fixing, all rust and scale shall be removed from iron and steel surfaces by wire-brushing, scraping,
hammering, flame cleaning, etc.

Specification
Painting and Decorating
(2/U/7)
U.36 Zinc and galvanized surfaces

Zinc and galvanized surfaces shall be washed with white spirit.

U.37 Hardboard

All dirt and grease shall be removed from hardboard surfaces. After priming, all nail holes and other imperfections
shall be stopped.

U.38 Fibreboard

All dust shall be brushed off from fibreboard surfaces, after priming, all nail holes and other imperfections shall be
stopped.

U.39 Plywood

Surfaces of plywood to be painted shall be as required with a plaster based filler for internal work, and a filler, as
described in clause U.10 (e), for external work, and then rubbed down and all dust and loose materials brushed off.

After priming, all imperfections shall be stopped rubbed down and brushed off

U.40 Woodwork to be painted

Before fixing woodwork, all surfaces which will be visible after fixing, shall be rubbed down and all knots and
resin pockets shall be scorched back and coated with knotting.

After priming and fixing, all nail holes and other imperfections shall be stopped and the whole surface shall be
rubbed down and all dust brushed off.

U.41 Woodwork to receive clear finish

All holes and other imperfections in surfaces to receive a clear finish, shall be stopped and the whole surface shall
be rubbed down and all dust brushed off.

WORKMANSHIP

U.42 Standard of workmanship

Prior to the commencement of internal or external decoration, areas not exceeding 50 square metres in total area,
and designated by the Architect, shall be completely decorated, and after approval shall be used as a standard for
the whole of the works. Any additional cost involved in carrying out such decoration in advance of the general
work shall be deemed to be included in the Contract Sum. Such decorated surfaces shall be made good and
touched up as necessary prior to the handling over of the works.

U.43 Stirring of materials

The contents of all cans and containers of all materials must be properly and thoroughly stirred before and during
use and shall be suitably strained as and when necessary.

U.44 Manufacturers instructions

All materials shall be used strictly in accordance with instructions, issued by the manufacturers concerned. The
addition of thinners, driers or other materials will only be permitted when specially required by the maker and as
when the procedure is approved by the Architect.

Specification
Painting and Decorating

(2/U/8)
U.45 Brush work

Unless otherwise described, all coatings shall be applied by brush. Written permission must be obtained from the
Architect for the application of coatings by spray or roller where not so described, and if permission is granted,
such application shall not result in extra cost to the Employer.

U.46 Priming of joinery

Joinery shall be delivered to the site unprimed and is to be protected from rain and damp during transit. It is to be
stored in clean, dry, ventilated structures and no primer shall be applied while the timber is in any way damp. The
store and drying room shall be of adequate size to allow for proper coating and storage of primed work. Primers
shall be applied as soon as possible after inspection and acceptance of the joinery by the Architect.

U.47 Condition of priming

If, by the time that the work is to receive the first undercoat, the priming coat has in any way deteriorated, or has
been damage, the affected portions or the whole, if necessary, shall be rubbed down and re-primed.

In the case of articles primed at works, the priming shall be touched up where required with a similar primer.

U.48 Coatings to be dry

All coatings shall be allowed to dry thoroughly before succeeding coats are applied.

U.49 Rubbing down

All undercoats for oil paints and clear finishes shall be rubbed down to a smooth surface with abrasive paper, and
all dust removed before the succeeding coat is applied.

U.50 Differing colours of undercoats

Each succeeding coat of priming and undercoating paint shall be sufficiently different in colour as to be readily
distinguishable.

U.51 Painting in unsuitable conditions

No coating shall be applied to surfaces affected by wet, damp, or other unsuitable conditions, or to any surface
damp with moisture.

U.52 Protection of wet surfaces

Adequate care must be taken to protect surfaces while still wet, by the use of screens and ‘wet paint’ signs, where
necessary.

U.53 Damage to adjoining surfaces

Care must be taken when storing materials, preparing surfaces or painting, etc., not to damage or stain other work.
The contractor shall remove all such stains, make good, and touch up.

U.54 Cleanliness

All brushes, tools and equipment shall be kept in a clean condition and surfaces shall be clean and free from dust
during painting.

Painting shall not be carried out in the vicinity of other operations which might cause dust.

Specification
Painting and Decorating
(2/U/9)
U.54 Cleanliness (Contd)

The contractor shall provide a suitable moveable receptacle, into which are to be placed all the liquids, slop
washings, etc., which are on no account to be thrown down any of the gullies, manholes, sinks, lavatories,W.C.’s
or any other sanitary fittings. All solid refuse or inflammable residues must be removed from the site, or burned.

U.55 Removal of ironmongery, etc.

All surface fixed ironmongery fittings, etc., except hinges, shall be removed before painting and re-fixed on
completion.

U.56 Method of measurement

One coat of lead based pink primer has been measured to the backs of all timber frames, etc., which will ultimately
be fixed in contact with concrete, block work, rendered or plastered surfaces.

Specification
Painting and Decorating
(2/U/10)
 DRAINAGE
LIST OF CLAUSES

GENERALLY

V.1 Preambles to other sections

V.2 Notices

V.3 Drainage By-Laws

V.4 Inspections

V.5 Levels of existing drains

MATERIALS

V.6 Plastic pipes and fittings

V.7 Spun cast iron drain pipes and cast iron fittings, gullies, etc.

V.8 Concrete pipes and fittings

V.9 Manhole covers and road gratings

V.10 Step irons

WORKMANSHIP

V.11 Setting out

V.12 Excavation

V.13 Planking and strutting

V.14 Backfilling

V.15 Laying and strutting

V.16 Plastic drains

V.17 Cast iron drains

V.18 Concrete drains

V.19 Concrete beds, haunches and coverings

V.20 Sleeves

V.21 Benching

Specification
Drainage
(2/V/1)
V.22 Bedding and sealing covers and frames

V.23 Testing

V.24 Clean and flush all drains

V.25 Method of measurement

Specification
Drainage
(2/V/2)
 DRAINAGE
GENERALLY

V.1 Preambles to other sections

The preambles contained in other sections of this Document shall apply equally hereto where applicable, so far as
is consistent with the clauses following.

V.2 Notices

The Contractor shall give all requisite notices to the local Authority. Uncoloured plans will be supplied by the
Architect at the Contractor’s request.

V.3 Drainage Bye-laws

All of the works shall comply with the requirements of the drainage Bye-laws made by the Local Authority and
shall be executed to the satisfaction of the Architect and the Local Authority.

V.4 Inspections

The Contractor shall give written notice to the Architect for the purpose of inspection and measurement, whenever
sections of:-

(a) excavations are completed

(b) concrete beds are laid

(c) drains are completed

and no further work shall be executed until each stage of the work has been inspected.

V.5 Levels of existing drains

The contractor shall check the invert levels of existing drains, sewers, and manholes before laying new drains, and
shall notify the Architect immediately if the declared invert levels are found to be inaccurate.

MATERIALS

V.6 Plastic pipes and fittings

Plastic pipes and fittings shall be obtained from a manufacturing source approved by the Architect in writing to
comply with B.S. 5481 in unplasticised PVC with spigot and socket and /or loose joints. All bends are to be long
radius easy bends. Branches shall be infection moulded. Fittings fabricated on site will not, under any
circumstances, be permitted.

V.7 Spun cast iron drain pipes and cast iron fittings gullies etc.

Spun cast iron drain pipes shall be coated centrifugally cast (spun) iron pipes complying with B.S. 4622.

Fittings, gullies, etc. shall be of coated cast iron and shall comply with B.S. 4622.

V.8 Concrete pipes and fittings

Concrete pipes and fittings shall comply with B.S. 59911 Parts 1 to 3. They shall be reinforced, and of sulphate
resisting cement if specified.

Specification
Drainage
(2/V/3)
V.9 Manhole covers and road gratings

Manhole covers and road gratings and frames shall comply with B.S. 497

V.10 Step irons

Step iron shall be galvanized malleable cast iron complying with B.S. 1247.

WORKMANSHIP

V.11 Setting out

The Contractor shall set out all drains in accordance with the drawings, and provide all profiles, etc., necessary for
the execution of the work.

V.12 Excavation

The bottoms of all excavations shall be trimmed and consolidated to the correct levels. Unauthorized excavations
below the required levels shall be filled with concrete of the same composition as for drain beds, at the
Contractor’s expense.

Where the bottom is insufficiently firm, the Contractor shall excavate until, in the Architect’s opinion, a firm
bottom is obtained and the level shall be made up with concrete of the same composition as for drain beds.
Particulars of such additional work shall be agreed with the Architect’s representative before the work is covered
up, otherwise no claim in this respect will be entertained.

V.13 Planking and strutting

Care shall be taken not to undermine the foundation of the buildings and, if so directed by the Architect, planking
and strutting shall be left in, or other means adopted to protect the foundations. Details of such additional items
shall be agreed with the Architect’s representative before the work is covered up, otherwise no claim in this
respect will be entertained.

V14 Backfilling

Trenches for plastic pipes shall first be filled with selected screened excavated material carefully hand-tamped
between the pipe and sides of the trench, followed by 150 mm- 200 mm of similar material before the general
filling is carried out.

Trenches for concrete or cast iron drains shall first be filled to a depth of 300 mm with selected fine material
carefully hand-packed around the pipe. On no account shall materials be tipped into the trench until the first 300
mm has been completed.

Filling shall be continued in layers not exceeding 300 mm thick well rammed and, if necessary, watered.

V.15 Laying drains

Drains shall be laid truly straight on line and gradient with sockets upstream and the full bore shall be
unobstructed.

V.16 Plastic drains

Plastic drain pipes shall be laid and jointed with solvent welded joints entirely in accordance with the
manufacturers instructions.

Pipes shall be bedded in sand after all hard obstructions have been removed from trench bottoms.

Specification
Drainage
(2/V/4)
V.17 Cast iron drains

Cast iron drains shall be laid on concrete beds where specified or shown on the drawings and shall be jointed with
a gasket of hemp, well caulked, to a dept of 30 mm for 100 mm pipes and 40 mm for larger pipes, and remainder
of the socket shall be filled with molten lead or lead fibre solidly caulked.

Connection of iron to concrete drains shall be jointed as described for concrete drains.

Cast iron drains fixed to walls or beams shall be supported on brackets at 1,350 mm centers.

Gullies, outlets, etc., on drains under concrete floors shall be set in position at correct levels before the floors are
laid.

V.18 Concrete drains

Concrete drains shall be jointed with one turn of tarred gasket, well caulked and the remainder of the socket filled
with cement and sand, (1:3), finished with an angle around the pipe. All surplus mortar shall be removed from the
inside of the pipe with a badger. Where pipes are sulphate resisting, the joining mortar shall contain sulphate
resisting cement.

V.19 Concrete beds, haunches and coverings

Where specified or shown on drawings, drains shall be laid on concrete, (13.5 N/sq. mm 25 mm aggregate), beds
100 mm thick, 400 mm wide for 100 mm diameter drains and 450 mm wide for 150 mm diameter drains. The
concrete shall be haunched up both sides of the barrel to give lateral support.

Where drains, other than cast iron drains, are laid under buildings or pavings carrying vehicular traffic, they shall
be completely surrounded in concrete, (13.5 N/sq.m 25 mm aggregate) 150 mm thick, (i.e. 400 mm x 400 mm
overall for 100 mm pipes and 450 mm x 450 mm overall for 150 mm pipes). Where directed, drain beds shall be
reinforced.

Gullies shall be bedded and surrounded in concrete 13.5 N/sq.m – 25 mm aggregate minimum 150 mm all round.

V.20 Sleeves

All drains passing through walls or foundations shall have sleeves of cast iron pipe of sufficient size to allow a
clearance round the drain.

V.21 Benching

Benching in bottom of manholes shall be concrete (13.5 N/sq.m – 25 mm aggregate) to falls of not less than 10 to
channels finished with cement and sand (1:2),25 mm thick, trowelled hard and smooth with all angles rounded.

V.22 Bedding and sealing covers and frames

Frames to manhole covers shall be bedded in cement mortar (1:3) and the covers in grease and sand.

V.23 Testing

All drains and manholes shall be tested water-tightness and straightness to the satisfaction, and in the presence of,
the Architect and the Local Authority. Drains shall be filled with water to a head of 1.50 metre and are to be tested
in sections agreed with the Architect:-

(i) after jointing

Specification
Drainage
(2/V/5)
V.23 Testing (Cont’d.)

(ii) after haunching and backfilling

(iii) after completion of the works

The Contractor shall provide all necessary testing apparatus and shall carry out such other tests as are required by
the Architect and the Local Authority.

V.24 Clean and flush all drains

All drains, gullies, manholes, etc., shall be cored, and flushed on completion.

V.25 Method of measurement

Where not otherwise stated, the starting level for trench and manhole excavation shall be:-

(i) the formation level in areas where the site is excavated to reduce levels

(ii) existing ground level in areas where no excavation is required, or where filling is required.

The depth of all the trenches in the following description lie within the same 1.50 metre stages as the average
depths stated.

Prices for excavating pipe trenches shall be deemed to include keeping them free from general water (i.e. all water
except spring or running water).

Notwithstanding the provisions of SMM Clause V7 (a) to (c) the descriptions of excavating manholes, yard
gullies, septic tanks and soakpits shall be deemed to include grading bottoms, planking and strutting, return filling
and compacting, disposal of surplus soil and keeping excavations free from water.

Prices for building pipes into manholes shall include for building-in on rake where necessary.

Prices for concrete beds, benching and coverings for pipes laid in trenches, shall be deemed to include for any
necessary formwork. Formwork required for beds, etc., for pipes above ground, and for casing to vertical pipes, is
referred to in the descriptions of such items.

Prices for all gullies shall be deemed to include for all necessary excavation, return filling, disposal of surplus
excavated material, planking and strutting, and trimming and ramming bottoms.

Specification
Drainage
(2/V/6)
 EXTERNAL WORKS

LIST OF CLAUSES

GENERALLY

W.1 Preambles to other bills

W.2 Inspections

MATERIALS

W.3 Soil for planted areas

W.4 Sand for filling under footpaths

W.5 Granular materials for sub-base, base and surfacing

W.6 Base

W.7 Sub-base

W.8 Surfacing

W.9 Macadam

W.10 Aggregate for premix bitumen macadam surfacing

W.11 Chippings

W.12 Blinding

W.13 Pre-cast concrete paving slabs

W.14 Kerbs

W.15 Prime coat

W.16 Bitumen

WORKMANSHIP

W.17 Generally

W.18 Surveying

W.19 Levels, falls, cross falls and cambers

W.20 Tolerances

W.21 Preparing ground surfaces under embankments

W.22 Construction of embankments

W.23 Compaction

Specification
External Works
(2/W/1)
W.24 Diversion of water

W.25 Testing

W.26 Soiling on slopes and verges

W.27 Base, sub-base and surfacing or granular materials

W.28 Macadam

W.29 Prime coat

W.30 First seal coat

W.31 Second seal coat

W.32 Premix bitumen macadam surfacing

W.33 General remarks on surfacing

W.34 Tolerances for thickness of pavements

W.35 Laying pre-cast paving slabs

W.36 Grassing

Specification
External Work (2/W/2)
 EXTERNAL WORKS

GENERALLY

W.1 Preambles to other bills

Preambles contained in other sections of this Document shall apply equally to this section so far is consistent with
the following clauses.

W.2 Inspections

The Contractor shall give written notice to the Architect for the purpose of inspection and measurement, whenever
sections of:
(a) excavations and preparation of sub-grade are complete

(b) sub-grade drainage is complete

(c) sub-base course is complete

(d) base course is complete

MATERIAL

W.3 Soil for planted areas

Soil for planted areas shall be vegetable soil free from roots and rubbish and treated with weed killer to prevent the
growth of weed.

W.4 Sand for filling under footpaths

Sand for filling under footpaths, shall be clean, dry pit or river sand, free from vegetable soil, roots and rubbish.

W.5 Granular materials for sub-base, base and surfacing

……………………………………………………………………………………………….………
Base and Sub-base Base, Sub-base and Surfacing
……. …………………………………………………………………….…………
B.S. Sieve Percentage passing
Size
……...……………………………………………………………………….………

Nominal maximum size

……….……………………..………………………………………………………………………....

75 mm 38 mm 19 mm 9.5 mm 4.75 mm
………………………………………………………………………………………………………….
75 mm 100 - - - - 38
mm 80-100 100 - - -
19 mm 60-80 80-100 100 - -
9.5 mm 30.65 40-75 80-100 100 -
4.75 mm 25-55 30-60 50-85 80-100 100
2.36 mm 20-45 25-50 35-70 50-80 80-100
0.425 mm 10-30 15-30 15-35 25-50 25-55
0.075 mm 5-15 5-15 5-15 10-25 10-25
…………………………………………………………………………………………………………….

The 9.5 mm and 4.75 mm nominal size materials may have up to 35% of stones not larger than 38 mm (1.5 in)
provided that the materials passing the 4.75 mm (3/16 in) sieve is within the limits specified.

Specification
External Works
(2/W/3)
W.5 Granular materials for sub-base, base and surfacing (Contd)

Not less than 10% should be retained between each pair of successive sieves, excepting the largest pair.

Furthermore the materials shall fulfill the following requirements.

W.6 Base

The CBR value shall not be less than 80% when tested at B.S. Heavy compaction (soaked condition).
Plasticity index : 0-6%
Liquid limit : 0-25%
Linear Shrinkage : 0-4 %

W.7 Sub-base

The CBR value shall not be less than 25% when tested at B.S. Heavy Compaction (soaked condition).

Plasticity index : 0-15%

Liquid limit : 0-35%
Linear Shrinkage : 0-8 %

W.8 Surfacing
……………………………………………………………………………..
Climate Plasticity Liquid Linear
Index Limit Shrinkage
……………………………………………………………………………...
Wet 4 – 9% 0 – 35% 2 – 4%

Seasonal wet 6 – 15% 0 – 40% 3 – 7%

…………………………………………………………………
This specification shall also apply to materials for shoulders

In case the gravel surfacing is a temporary surface only, and the layer at a later stage shall constitute sub-base in a
bitumen surfaced road, then the material shall meet the CBR requirement to sub-base material.

W.9 Macadam

The material shall consist of coarse and fine aggregate derived fro crushed hard rock of approved quality.

The course aggregate for macadam shall comply with the 50 mm or 40 mm nominal sizes of B.S 63. The fine
aggregate shall all pass the 5 mm sieve.

The coarse aggregate shall be of approximately cubic shape, have at least one fractured face and with an
insignificant amount of elongated or flaky particles.

The flakiness index must not exceed 40. the aggregate crushing value must not exceed 35%.

W.10 Aggregate for premix macadam surfacing

Aggregate for premix bitumen macadam surfacing shall consist of natural rock aggregate complying with B.S.
1621.

W.11 Chippings

Chippings for blinding 1st and 2nd seal-coat shall be single sized road stones conforming to B.S. 63 – Single sized
(Cont’d.)

Specification
External Works (2/W/4)
W.11 Chippings (Cont’d.)

Road Stones and Chippings. Samples of all grades of stones and chippings shall be submitted to the Architect for
approval before any is delivered to the site.

1st wearing Coat : 14 mm nominal size chippings

2nd wearing Coat : 10 mm nominal size chippings

W.12 Blinding

Blinding shall be 4 mm gauge hard stone chippings, free from clay dust or other deleterious matter.

W.13 Precast concrete pavings slabs

Precast paving slabs shall comply with B.S. 368 except for sizes.

W.14 Kerbs

Precast concrete kerbs shall comply with B.S. 340, and shall be finished true and smooth on all exposed faces.

W.15 Prime coat

The prime coat for macadam paving shall be bitumen grade M.C.70. The temperature at application shall be 55-
80C.

W.16 Bitumen

Bitumen for first and second wearing coats shall be cutback bitumen grade M.C. 3000. The temperature at
application shall be 120-140C.

Bitumen for premix bitumen macadam shall be grade 80/100 bitumen.

WORKMANSHIP

W.17 Generally

The sub-grade, sub-base and course for roads and parking areas shall be prepared and laid at a convenient time
before completion of the contract, as shall be agreed between the Architect and the Contractor, together with their
kerbs and foundations.

The wearing course shall be applied at a later date, and prior to laying the base course shall be made good in
accordance with the requirements specified herein. The Contractor shall make good at his own expense, any
damage to kerbs.

W.18 Surveying

The contractor shall verify all dimensions and levels prior to the commencement of the work.

All surveying necessary for the accomplishment of the work shall be done by the contractor at his own expense,
and he shall give notice of his intention to carry out such work in order that arrangements can be made for
supervision and checking. The contractor shall also provide without extra charge all necessary instruments,
appliances, labour and any other materials required for checking the survey work. (Cont’d.)

Specification
External Works (2/W/5)
W.18 Surveying (Cont’d.)

The Contractor shall make all necessary surveys using given bench marks as reference points. These bench marks
shall carefully be preserved.

The Contractor shall draft, in accordance with these surveys, all plans and drawings which are necessary for the
completion of the work, and shall submit these plans and drawings to the Architect for approval in writing.

W.19 Levels, falls, cross falls and cambers

The works shall be executed to the levels, falls, cross falls and cambers shown on the drawings.

W.20 Tolerances

The finished sub-grade and shoulder levels shall at no place vary more than 15 mm above or below the levels
shown on the Drawings. Deviations shall note be one sided.

Sub-grade that does not conform to the above requirements shall be reshaped to conform to the specified
tolerances and r-ecompacted, at the contractor’s expense.

Invert levels to ditches shall not vary more 50mm from the levels shown on the drawing. The deviation from the
gradient specified on the drawing shall not exceed 0.2 times the gradient specified.

On slopes irregularities shall not exceed 100 mm.

The Contractor shall establish 25 mm x 25 mm x 100 mm timber pegs outside the carriageway each 20 m on both
sides painted with the chainage, and giving the level to the finished road surface. The pegs shall be preserved until
the Architect has approved the completion of the road.

The contractor shall provide one accurate straightedge. The straight edge shall be constructed of stout timber,
angle iron or metal tubes so as to span 3metres without deflection. If of timber, the edge shall be shod with steel
plate in the width of the timber and at least 5 mm thick.

W.21 Preparing ground surfaces under embankments

The Contractor shall ensure that the natural ground is cleared of vegetation rubbish and soft and wet materials
unsuitable for embankments construction.

All necessary work to drain the natural ground shall be executed. Slopes greater than 1 in 3 shall be formed into
horizontal terraces not less than 2 m wide.

W.22 Construction of embankments

Embankment material shall be placed in successive layers not exceeding 150 mm after compaction unless the
contractor proves by testing to the Engineer’s satisfaction that his compaction equipment is able to compact in
greater layers. Each layer shall extend over the full width of the embankment and shall be compacted according to
requirements before the next layer is placed.

It is the Contractor’s responsibility that only approved materials are incorporated in the embankments. If any
unsuitable or oversize material or materials is included it shall be removed and replaced with suitable material.

In forming embankments, the Contractor shall make due allowance in height and width for consolidation and
shrinkage. On the completion of the Contract, the level, widths and dimensions of the finished surface of the
carriageway or embankment shall correspond to the levels and dimensions shown on the Drawings. (Cont’d.)

Specification
External Works (2/W/6)
W.22 Construction embankments (Cont’d.)

Where the CBR value of the fill material obtained from general excavation is less than 8% at B.S. Compaction
after 48 hours soaking then the engineer shall instruct the Contractor to provide selected fill in the upper layer or
layers of the embankment. The thickness of the selected fill material shall be determined by the Architects
Representative.

In cutting where the soaked CBR value of the sub-grade is lower than 8% the Architect shall similarly instruct the
Contractor to replace the upper layer or layers with selected fill material.

The fill material shall preferably be to the following requirements:-

Liquid Limit : 0-45%

Plasticity Index : 0-20%
Linear shrinkage : 0-10%

W.23 Compaction

All fill and sub-grade shall be compacted to at least 100% of the maximum dry density obtained in the B.S.
Standard Compaction as follows:-

Top 150 mm of natural ground before filling

all fill in embankments
Top 300 mm of formatting in both cut and fill

The Contractor shall when needed for proper compaction distribute and incorporate water in the layer of fill to be
compacted.

When the moisture contents in some material is in excess of that for proper compaction the wet material shall be
allowed to dry before compaction is commenced.

W.24 Diversion of water

Excavation and filling operations shall be carried out with side slopes so that water can run off the surface. The
Contractor shall at his own expense maintain sufficient drainage of the works to prevent pounding and scour.

W.25 Testing

All testing shall comply with the requirements of B.S 13777.

The Contractor shall determine the dry density of compacted earthwork at the following minimum frequencies.
The result of the Contractor’s findings shall be submitted to the Architect who may approve or reject a volume of
compacted earthwork on the evidence of the Contractor’s tests or he may carry out test himself in addition:

(i) The top 150 mm of the compacted original ground under embankments in areas where compaction is
specified or has been ordered by the Architect: 1 density test per1000 sq.m.

(ii) All fill in embankments except the top layer: 1 density test per 1000 sq.m..

(iii) Formation in cutting and fill: 1 density test per 400 sq.m..

The Contractor shall carry out a B.S Standard Compaction test including CBR TEST AND A SET OF Atterberg
Limit tests on soil samples from at least every tenth dry density determination test carried out as above. He shall
also carry out a B.S standard Compaction test on soil sample from any dry density determination which failed to
reach the specified percentage of the soil which it is related in the above mentioned 1:10 representative grouping.

Specification
External Works (2/W/7)
W.26 Soiling on slopes or verges

Where it is directed and/or shown on the Drawings that the slopes of embankments, slopes of cuttings and verges
shall be covered with a layer of top soil, such top soil shall be laid to a compacted thickness of 100 mm or as
specified by the Architect.

W.27 Base, sub-base and surfacing of granular materials

The spreading and compaction of material must be carried out in such a manner that segregation is avoided. The
layer must be uniformly compacted to at least 100% of the maximum dry density obtained at the B.S. Heavy
Compaction Test.

Compaction should be done with a vibrating roller having a mass of at least 1800 kg per meter width of vibrating
roll and finished to a smooth even surface with a static smooth-wheel roller.

The Contractor shall set our sufficiently leveling points, each 20 m. On both sides of the road for the control of the
thickness of the layer.

Simultaneously with compaction the layer must be made true to shape and level so that no point of the finished
layer deviates more than 15 mm from the stipulated levels. Deviation shall not be considered.

Filling in of depressions must only be done through previous scarification and re-compaction to a homogenous
layer.

W.28 Macadam

The course aggregate shall be laid by mechanical plant to a thickness within the range 75-100 mm and given by a
smooth-wheeled roller having a mass per meter of at least 2500 kg on at least one roll. The fine aggregate shall
then be spread on it to a thickness of approximately 25 mm by a suitable spreading machine and vibrated into the
voids of the course aggregate by a vibrating plate compactor having a mass per unit area of the base plate of at
least 1400 kg/sq.m. or a vibrating roller having a mass per metre width of vibrating roll of at least 1800 kg.

The operation of spreading and vibrating the fine aggregate shall be repeated as necessary until no more will
penetrate into the layer of coarse aggregate and no hungry patches are visible on the surface, when it shall be
brushed to remove the excess fines and leave the coarse aggregate standing 3-6 mm proud. The layer shall then be
rolled with a smooth-wheeled roller having a mass per metre width of at least 5000 kg on at least one roll.

The whole operation shall be repeated as necessary to provide the full specified thickness of road base.

W.29 Prime coat

Before application of bitumen prime coat, the base course shall be inspected and approved by the Architect. Any
discrepancies shall be made good to the Engineer’s approval before any work on the wearing course may start.

Prior to the application of the prime coat the surface of the base shall be swept clean of loose sand and dust and
other foreign matter.

Bitumen for the prime coat shall be applied at a rate of approximately 0.8 litres/sq.m. in one even layer. After the
prime coat has been applied the stretch of road shall be closed to traffic for 24 hours to allow the primer to soak
into the surface.

In case it is not possible to close the primed stretch of road the prime coat shall be blinded with sand or
Crusher fines at a rate of approximately 5kg/sq.m..

Specification
External Works (2/W/8)
W.30 First seal-coat

Prior to application of the first wearing coat the primed surface of the base-course must be carefully inspected, all
areas found to be holding an excess of bitumen shall be blotted with sand or crusher fines, and all areas found to
be deficient shall be made good, all to the satisfaction of the Architect.

Bitumen for the first wearing coat shall be applied at a rate of approximately 1.0 litre/sq.m. and blinded with 14
mm chippings at a rate of 13-15 kg/sq.m.. The bitumen temperature at application shall be 120-140C and the
chipping shall be completely dry, clean and free of dust.

The chippings shall be uniform spread over the binder film by a mechanical spreader, except where its use is
impracticable. Any thinly chipped areas left by the spreading machine shall have additional chippings spread by
hand to ensure complete cover.

The chippings shall be pressed into the binder by an approved pneumatic tyred multi-wheel roller moving slowly.
The surfacing shall if possible be closed for traffic for 24 hours after finishing the first wearing-coat. The
Contractor shall thereafter make arrangement, e.g. by erecting signposts or the like, to prevent excessive speeding,
not more than 40 km/h for 48 hours after the surfacing has been opened for traffic.

W.31 Second seal-coat

When the surfacing has been opened to traffic for a period to be agreed between the Architect and the Contractor
the second wearing-coat shall be applied. Before application the first coat shall be made good. Excessive and loose
chippings shall be brushed of so that the road surface appears with a firm even and clean texture to the satisfaction
of the Architect.

Bitumen for the second wearing-coat shall be applied at a rate of approximately 1.1 litre/sq.m. and blinded with 10
mm single sized chippings at a rate of 10-12 kg/sq.m.. The bitumen temperature at application shall be 120-140C
and the chippings shall be completely dry, clean and free of dust.

The chippings shall be uniformly spread over the binder film by a mechanical spreader, except where its use is
impracticable. Any thinly chipped areas left by the spreading machine shall have additional chippings spread by
hand to ensure complete cover.

The chippings shall be pressed into the binder by an approved pneumatic tyred multi-wheel roller moving slowly.
Surplus chippings shall be afterwards removed.

The surfacing can be opened to traffic when the second wearing-coat is finished, but the Contractor shall make
arrangements, e.g. by erecting sign posts or the like, to prevent excessive speeding of not more than 40 km/h for
48 hours after finishing.

W.32 Premix bitumen macadam surfacing

Premix bitumen macadam surfacing shall consist of a premix macadam carpet of 500/700 grade bitumen and
approved quality aggregate graded and mixed together prior to laying to the proportions and by the methods given
in B.S. 4987, laid to finish to the thickness shown after compaction. The compaction shall be achieved with six to
eight tonne roller.

W.33 General remarks on surfacing

The plant used by the Contractor for transporting, heating and spreading bitumen shall be an approved rubber
tyred unit fitted with an efficient thermometer and heating control. The distributors shall be equipped to provide a
constant rate of bitumen per square metre of surface at the full width of the work and there shall be a visible
speedometer indicating the speed of the vehicle in metre per minute. (Cont’d.)

Specification
External Works (2/W/9)
W.33 General remarks on surfacing (Cont’d.)

Application of bitumen for prime coat or wearing coats must not take place when the road is wet after rain, while it
is raining or when rain is likely to be expected shortly after the surface dressing is finished.

Measurements shall be taken to prevent overlapping of surface dressing at both transversal and longitudinal joints.
At longitudinal joints either blinding off the already treated surface or by blocking off the distribution aggregate to
the required width. At transversal joints the already treated surface shall be blinded off so that the spreading of
bitumen can be started at the exact right moment, and when the spreading unit operates at the correct speed.

Hand spreading of bitumen shall be employed to touch up areas unavoidably missed by distributor.

W.34 Tolerances for thickness of pavements

The nominal thickness of surface dressing is for practical purpose assumed to be zero.

No layer in the pavement shall deviate more than 10% from the nominal thickness. The total pavement thickness
shall not deviate more than 5% from that specified.

Deviation shall not be one sided.

W.35 Laying precast paving slabs

Precast paving slabs shall be bedded on a sand bed compacted to the thickness specified with 6 mm wide joints,
filled and pointed with cement mortar coloured to match the colour of the slabs and recessed 5 mm deep. The
paving shall finish true and even to the falls shown on the drawings with no surface irregularities.

W.36 Grassing

Grassing shall be carried out by a Specialist using approved local grass. Prices for grass shall include for tending,
watering, cutting and keeping weed free for a period of six months, to produce a dense and healthy “weed” free
grass carpet.

Specification
External Works (2/W/10)
 TERMITE TREATMENT OF EXISTING DWELLINGS

LIST OF CLAUSES

GENERALLY

X.1 Engineers requirements

MATERIALS

X.2 Anti-termite treatment

WORKMANSHIP

X.3 Method of treatment

X.4 Inspection

X.5 Guarantee

Specification
Termite treatment (2/X/1)
 TERMITE TREATMENT OF EXISTING DWELLINGS

GENERALLY

X.1 Engineers requirements

The Engineer shall require the termite treatment to be carried out in accordance with accepted good practice.
Additional detail concerning method of treatment shall be provided by the Engineer upon request. The Main
Contractor shall be required to employ a competent sub-contractor to be approved by the Engineer to carry out the
application of chemicals used in termite treatment.

MATERIALS

X.2 Anti-termite treatment

Refer to General Specification (2/D/6) item D.24 for specification of materials and mix proportions.

The Contractor shall comply with all recommendations and instructions of the manufacturer with respect to safe
mixing and application of proprietary anti-termite treatment chemicals.

The Engineer shall approve all proposed substitute or alternative materials prior to application by the Contractor.

WORKMANSHIP

X.3 Treatment to termite infestation on existing houses

Any doubt or obscurity concerning method of treatment described below or elsewhere in this document shall be
referred to the Engineer who shall provide the necessary clarification to permit compliance herewith.

X.4 Method of treatment

Operation 1. Excavate trench at perimeter of building 300 mm wide x 300 mm deep position 300 mm from face of
external walls.

Operation 2. Penetrate bottom of trench to a depth of 400 mm at 300 mm centres using 30 mm diameter bar, auger
or similar implement.

Treat and hole with minimum 2 litres of prepared chemicals (“Gladiator TC 10% solution” or similar).

Operation 3. Treat all earth removed from the trench with minimum 80 litres of prepared chemicals (“Gladiator
TC 10% solution” or similar) per cubic metre prior to using the same material for backfilling of the trench.

Operation 4. Treat surface of 300 mm wide earth strip adjacent external walls by soaking with 3 litres of
prepared chemicals (“Gladiator TC 10% solution” or similar) per linear metre. At locations where pipes protrude
from the surface of the ground, soak with additional 3 litres of prepared chemicals (“Gladiator TC 10% solution”
or similar) at location of each pipe.

X.5 Inspection

Upon completion of excavation and forming of holes in trench bottom, the Contractor shall notify the Engineer
who shall then be permitted to inspect the completed work prior to application of chemicals.

Specification
Termite treatment
(2/X/2)
X.6 Guarantee

In accordance with the provisions of General Specification (2/D/6) Clause D.24 (fifth and sixth paragraphs) the
Contractor shall be required to provide a written five year guarantee to the Engineer for onward transmission to the
Employer.

Specification
Termite treatment
(2/X/3)
 ElectricalStandardSpec’s

Standard Specifications for:Electrical

Installations

1
 ElectricalStandardSpec’s

TableofContents

SectionOne General
SectionTwo PowerDistributionEquipment
Section Three PowerDistributionCables
SectionFour Alarm, Control,Communication&MonitoringCables
SectionFive Cable Supports
SectionSix Cable Insulation
SectionSeven OverheadLines
SectionEight Wiring System–CableinConduit,Trunking&Ducting

SectionNine WiringSystem–Multi-core SheathedCables

Section Ten Wiring System–MineralInsulatedCables
SectionEleven Earthing
SectionTwelve WiringAccessories,Small Equipment andMaterials
Section Thirteen Connections to Appliances &Motors
SectionFourteen Luminaires &Lamps
SectionFifteen Fire Detection &Alarms
SectionSixteen EmergencyLighting
SectionSeventeen AviationGroundLighting
SectionEighteen PotentiallyExplosiveAtmosphere’s
Section Nineteen LightningProtection ofBuildings
SectionTwenty Cathodic Protection
SectionTwentyOne Inspection &Testing
SectionTwentyTwo Drawings& DocumentsbytheContractor

AppendixOne List ofStandards

AppendixTwo Specimen Site Clearance Certificate
AppendixThree Gas Pressure Test ForDryPaper-InsultedCables
AppendixFour Tests forAviationGroundLightingInstallations

2
 ElectricalStandardSpec’s

SECTIONONE 1.02 RELATEDDOCUMENTS

1.02.1 Relateddocumentswillbeenumeratedinthe
invitation to tender or in the appendix to
General Requirements the‘particularclauses’.Theywillincludetheconditions
of contract particular clauses and
anysupplementaryspecifications,schedulesanddrawin
1.01 EXTENT OFWORK gsthatrelatetothecontract.
1.01.1 Thisspecificationstatestherequirementsforthe
supplying,assembling,fixing in position, connecting, 1.03 DEFINITIONS
inspecting, testingand leaving in working order new, 1.03.1 ThedefinitionsintheIEEWiringRegulationsap
modified oradditionalelectricalinstallations. plythroughoutthisspecification.
1.01.2 The work shall comprise the whole of 1.03.2 Whereworkisundertakenasasub-
thelabour and, unless otherwise indicated, all contract,‘Contractor’shallmean‘Sub-Contractor’.
thematerialsnecessarytoformacompleteinstallationan
dsuchtests,adjustmentsandcommissioning as are 1.03.3 Thewords‘asindicated’,‘whereindicated’,
prescribed in subsequentclauses and as may unless otherwise indicated’, refer toitems or
otherwise be required requirements indicated’, refer to
togiveaneffectiveworkinginstallationtothesatisfaction itemsorrequirementsindicatedelsewhereinthetender
oftheEngineer. documents issued in connection with
thecontract,forexampleondrawing,inasupplementary
1.01.3 Thewords‘completeinstallation’inclauses specification or in Schedule No.1.
1.01.2 and 1.05.1 shall mean not onlythe items of
electrical equipment covered by 1.03.4
thisspecification,butalltheincidentalsundrycomponent TheauthoritymeanstheClient,LocalorGovernmentAuthori
snecessaryforthecompleteexecutionoftheworksandfor ty,oranypersonsodesignatedinothercontractdocuments.
theproperoperationoftheinstallation,whetherornotthes
esundrycomponentsarementionedindetailinthetenderd 1.04 REGULATIONS
ocumentsissuedinconnectionwiththecontract. 1.04.1 Eachinstallationshallcomplywithallrelevantst
atutory
1.01.4 TheclientwillsupplyitemslistedinScheduleNo. instrumentsandregulationsincludingthefollowing:
3orotherwiseindicated. RegulationsundertheElectricityActs:FactoriesActsandRe
gulations:HealthandSafetyatWorketc.ActandRegulations
1.01.5 UnlessotherwiseindicatedworkexternalTo ;“RegulationsforElectricalInstallations’issuedbytheInstit
buildings shall include the supply andinstallationof: utionof Electrical Engineers, including all
Sandorsievedearthforcablebeddingandcover; theAppendicescontainedtherein,andreferredtoher
Cablewarningcovers,cablewarning einas the ‘IEE Wiring
tapesa Regulation”;Regulations and
ndcablemarkers;Poles;Seatingfor requirements of
AGLluminariesinpavingorconcrete. BritishTelecomandthelocalelectricitygasand
waterUndertakers.
1.01.6 Unless otherwise indicated the
followingwillbe carried out by others: Trenching, 1.05 STANDARDS
holediggingandbackfilling;Ductlayingandconstructio 10.05.1 The complete installation shall
nofcabledrawpits;buildingwork. complywithallrelevantBritishStandards,BritishStandardC
odesofPracticeand,whereindicated,withotherStandardsan
1.01.7 theContractorinaccordancewithSection22 dSpecifications,andallamendmentsthereto.The relevant
shallprovideDrawingsanddocuments. issues shall be those current
threemonthsbeforethedateforreturnoftender,unlessalterna
Manufacturers shall provide 1.01.8 tivedatesareindicated.
adequateprotection of equipment during
transitandthe Contractor shall ensure adequate 1.05.2 Wherepracticable,eachitemofequipment shall
protectiononsite.TheContractorshalladvisetheEngineerof be clearly and indelibly markedto indicate the
anydamagethatoccurstoequipment including finishes and standard with which it complies.Alternatively a
*
shall carry outrepairsasdirected bytheEngineer. certificate of compliance shall beprovided.

1.05.3 Whereequipmentorservicesareindicatedtobe
manufacturedorprovidedunder

3
 ElectricalStandardSpec’s

a participant in the relevantscheme.

Acertificateof complianceshallbeprovided.

1.05.4 Equipment not manufactured in a

countrythatusesBritishStandardsshallbeofastandard,
which ensures its compliance with
allappropriateBritishStandards.

1.06 APPROVAL
1.06.1 The Engineer’s approval shall not relievethe
Contractor of his contractual
responsibilitiesandobligations.TheContractorshallber
esponsiblefordiscrepancies,errorsoromissions on
drawings or other
documentationsuppliedbyhim,whethertheyhavebeena
pproved by the Engineer or not, provided
suchdiscrepancies,errorsor omissionsare not dueto
incorrect information given in writing by
theEngineer. The Contractor shall be responsiblefor
ensuring that equipment complies with
thespecifiedrequirements.

4
 ElectricalStandardSpec’s

SECTIONTWO fittedtostandardenclosures.Terminalsforneutral
conductors for three phase and neutralcircuits shall be
the same size as for the
Power Distribution Equipment phaseconductor,exceptwherereducedsectionneutralcablec
oresareindicated.
2.01 SWITCHGEARANDCONTROL
2.03.6 Glandplatesshallbeprovidedforallmulti-core
BOARDS
cables of 35mm² cross section andlarger.For all sizes
of single - core cables non-ferrous gland plates shall
2.01.1 HVSwitchgearshallcomplywithBS6581. LV
be provided, and thereshall be a clearance of not less
Switchboards and Control boards
than 25 mmbetweencableglandsandferrousmetal.
shallcomplywithBSEN60947andBSEN60439-3.
2.03.7 Metallicenclosureslocatedoutsidebuildings
2.01.2 Clauses2.02and2.03hereinshallapplyonlytoe
or at other locations as indicated
quipmentcoveredbythisspecificationandshallnotoverr
shallhaveastovedriedpaintedfinish,ofthemanufacturer
uletherequirementsforequipmentspecifiedintheabove
’sstandardcolour,unlessotherwiseindicated.Ferrouspa
BritishStandards.
rtsshallbedegreasedandadequatelyrustprotectedimme
diatelypriortopainting
2.02 ELECTRICALCHARACTERISTICSOF
FACTORYBUILT ASSEMBLIES 2.03.8 Ferrouspartsofenclosurelocatedoutsidebuildi
2.02.1 The electrical characteristics ngsoratotherlocationsasindicated shall be protected
ofcomponentpartsoffactorybuiltassembliesshallbeasi against corrosion bya hot - dip galvanised coating to
ndicatedandshallapplywhenthecomponentsaremounte BS729 or by
dintheirenclosures,appropriate derating azincsprayedcoatingtoBS2569withthemanufacturer’s
factors having standardfinish.
beenallowedfortheeffectoftheenclosures,oth
ercomponentsandinterconnections. 2.04 BUSBARTRUNKINGSYSTEMS
2.04.1 Busbartrunkingsystemsshallcomplywith
2.03 ENCLOSURESOFFACTORYBUILT BS5486 and clauses 2.02 and
ASSEMBLIES 2.03.TheyshallhaveafaultwithstandclassificationofCl
2.03.1 Unlessotherwise indicated enclosuresshall ass2or3as indicated.
provide a minimum degree of protection
ofIP21whenlocatedwithinbuildingsandIP43whenloca2.04.2 Busbartrunkingsystemsshallbesuitablefornor
tedoutsidebuildings. malmechanicalloadsunlessotherwise indicated, and
they shall not be usedtosupportotherequipment.
2.03.2 Doorsshallhave adequate fasteningswith
provision for locking in the closed 2.04.3 Feederunitsshallbefittedwithanisolatingswit
position.Coversrequiringtoolsfortheirremovalareexcl chwhereindicated.Theswitchshallcomplywithclause2.
udedfromthisrequirement. 07.
2.03.3 Fixingholesforequipmentinsidebuildingsma 2.04.4 Tap-off units and tap - off facilities
ybeinsideoroutsidetheenclosure.Equipmenttobelocate forfuture units shall be provided as
doutsidebuildings shall have fixing lugs external to indicated.Thephase sequence shall be maintained
theenclosure. along
theentirelengthofeachbusbartrunkingsystemandshallb
2.03..4 Earthing terminals shall be fitted to eidenticalinallsystemsintheinstallation.Phasecoloursh
eachenclosure,suitableforinternalandexternalconnection, allbeclearlymarkedineachtruckingunit.
to enable the exposed
conductivepartsofthefactorybuiltassemblytobeconnected 2.04.5 Conductorsshallbeofbarecopperunlessother
to a protective conductor.Where theenclosure has a wiseindicated.Theneutralconductor shall be the same
painted finish provision shall bemade for the earthing size as the
terminal to be electricallyconnected to the enclosure phaseconductorsunlessotherwiseindicated.Conductor
without the need toremoveanypaintfromferrous metal. sshall be supported by high gradenon-
hygroscopicandnon-trackinginsulatingmaterial.They
2.03.5 Cable terminals shall be suitable for shall be anchored in at least
thenumber, size and type of cables as onepositionandameansoftakingupexpansionandcontra
indicated.Adequate ctionincorporated.
Spacing shall be allowed for spreading of
cabletailstoavoidstressontheinsulationorterminals;ifneces2.04.6 Wheretheenclosureisofmetal,truckingunitss
sary,extensionboxesshallbe hallbesojoinedthattheyforma

5
 ElectricalStandardSpec’s

Circuit protective conductor.In addition, Togetherwiththemeansofisolationshallbeasindicated.

whereindicated,acopperstripshallbeinstalledoutside of
and for the full length of the bus bartrucking.The strip 2.07 AIR-BREAKSWITCHES
shall be of the size2.07.1 Air-
indicatedandshallbebondedtoanearthingterminalfitted to breakswitchesshallcomplywithBSEN60947 and
each trunking unit forming the systemand to the clause 2.02.They shall
protective conductor of the haveanuninterruptedratedduty,andmechanicalendura
incomingcableatthefeederunit. ncenotlessthanthosesetoutinBSEN60947andanelectri
2.04.7 The length of busbar trunking systemsshall calendurancenotlessthan1/20ofthenumberofno-
be determined formdrawings for loadoperatingcyclescorrespondingtothemechanicalen
tenderpurposes,butallmeasurementsshallbecheckedon durance,unlessotherwiseindicated, and a utilisation
sitepriortomanufacture. category of AC-22 orAC - 23 as indicated.Other
characteristics oftheequipmentshallbeasindicated.
2.05 DISTRIBUTIONBOARDS
2.05.1 Fuseboardsandminiaturecircuit-breaker 2.07.2 Allswitchesshallmeettherequirementsof
boards shall comply with BSEN60439and clauses switch-disconnections.
2.02 and 2.03.They shall have afault withstand
classification of Class 1 2.07.3 Where indicated auxiliary contacts
unlessotherwiseindicated.Fuses andminiaturecircuit shallbeincorporatedinswitches.Forswitchesinstalled
- breakersshallcomplywithclauses2.09and in a motor circuit between the
2.10andshallbeasindicated. motoranditsstarteraminimumofoneauxiliarycontact
shall be incorporated and connected
2.05.2 Fusboardsshallbefullyshrouded. sothatthestarteropenswhentheswitchisopened.

2.05.3 Busbars shall be in the same positionrelative2.07.4 Eachswitchshallhaveafacilityforpadlockingi

to their fuse carriers or mcbs for eachpole. nthe‘OFF’position.

2.05.4 InTP&Ndistributionboardsneutralbusbarssh 2.07.5 Switch - fuses and fuse switches

allhaveoneoutgoingterminalforeachoutgoingcircuit. shallbefittedwithfusescomplyingwithclause2.09.3

2.05.5 Amulti-terminalbarforthecircuitprotective 2.07.6 Enclosuresshallcomplywithclause2.03

conductors shall be provided for
bothinsulatedandmetalcasedboards,withoneterminal 2.08 MOULDED-CASECIRCUIT-
for each outgoing circuit.It shall BREAKERS
bedirectlyconnectedtotheearthingterminalwithout 2.08.1 moulded - case circuit - breakers
dependence on the exposed shallcomply withBSEN60947-2andclause2.02.They
conductivepartsoftheenclosure. shall have the voltage and current ratings,rated duty,
rated short - circuit breaking capacityandratedshort-
2.05.6 Identification of each fuse way and mcbway timewithstandcurrentasindicated.
shall be by numbering.Identification on
theneutralbusbarandprotectiveconductorbarshallclear2.08.2 MCCBsshallbeoftheindependentmanual
lyrelateeachterminaltoitsrespectivefusewayormcbwa closing air - break type, type, rated
y. foranuninterruptedduty,unlessotherwiseindicated.

2.05.7 Spare fuse ways or mcb ways shall 2.08.3 Auxiliaryfacilities,includingpowerclosingan

beprovided as indicated.Where specific dundervoltagereleases,shallbeprovidedonlyasindicate
ratingsareindicated,fusesormcbsshallbeincorporated, d.
otherwise the ways shall be
leftblankbutsuitableforfutureadditions. 2.08.4 Each MCCB shall have a facility for
padlockinginthe‘OFF’position.
2.05.8 Eachdistributionboardshallbefittedwith an
isolating switch complying with clause2.07. 2.08.5 Enclosureshallcomplywithclause2.03.

2.06 CONSUMERUNITS 2.09 FUSES

2.06.1 ConsumerunitsshallcomplywithBSEN60439
and clauses 2.02 and 2.03 exceptthat the minimum
degree of protection shall beIP20.Fuses and
miniature circuit -
breakersshallcomplywithclauses2.09and2.10and

6
 ElectricalStandardSpec’s

2.09.1 Thetypeandcurrentratingoffusesshallbeas Respectively. Metal-

indicated. arcweldingshallcomplywithBS5135.

2.09.2 Cartridge fuse links complying with 2.13.2 Frameworkmountedwithinabuildingshall

BS1361 shall be Type I.Fuse carriers, bases have a galvanised finishes with a coatingequivalent
andassociatedpartsshallalsocomplywithBS1361 to and not less than type G275
toBS2989,butmanufacturers’standardfinisheswill be
2.09.3 CartridgefuselinkscomplyingwithBS88 shall accepted for slotted angles.All metalexposed during
have a fusing factorofClassQ1unless otherwise fabrication shall be given a coatof zinc - rich paint,
indicated.Motor circuit fuselinks shall be used only brushed on, and finished tomatchthemanufacturer’s
where indicated.Fusecarriers, bases and associated finish.
parts shall alsocomplywithBS88.
2.13.3 Framework mounted outside a buildingor at
2.10 MINIATURECIRCUIT-BREAKERS other locations as indicated should be hot -dip
2.10.1 Miniature circuit - breakers shall galvanised to BS729 or sheradize coated
complywith BSEN 60898: 1991 and clause toBS4921.Metal exposed during fabrication shallbe
2.02.Theyshall have the voltage and current ratings cleaned with a wire brush and given a coat ofZinc-
andcategoryofdutyandbeofthetypeasindicated. richpaint,brushedon.

2.11 RESIDUALCURRENT-OPERATED 2.13.4 Bolts,nuts,washersandscrewsshallbecadmiu

2.11.1 Residualcurrent-operatedcircuit- morzinc electroplated.
breakers(RCCBs)shall comply with BS4293.The
rated voltage, rated current, rated trippingcurrent and 2.14 INSTALLATION
rated braking capacity shall be asindicated. 2.14.1 Equipment,includingassociatedaccessories,
shall be fixed independently of thewiring system.
2.11.2 Whereindicated,RCCBsshallhaveelectronica All fixing bolts, nuts,
lly amplified sensors.They shall beof the washersandscrewsshallbecadmiumorzincelectroplate
instantaneous, IDMT or fixed time delaytypeas d.
indicated.
2.14.2 Singleitemsofequipmentshallbemounted
2.11.3 Where indicated, RCCBs shall be 1350 mm above finished floor level tothe centre of
fittedwithintegralovercurrentprotection. the equipment, unless otherwiseindicated. Groups of
equipment, other than
2.12 CONTACTORS floorstandingfactorybuiltassemblies,shallbearrangeds
2.12.1 ContactorsshallcomplywithBSEN60947-4-1 othatnopartoftheequipmentrequiring access for
and clause 2.02.They shall be air -breaktype operation or maintenanceshall be less than 500 mm
andhavethe voltage and or more than 2000mm above finished floor level,
currentratings,typeofduty,utilisationcategoryandelect unless otherwiseindicated.
ricalenduranceasindicated.
2.14.3 Equipmentshallbelocatedsothataclearworkin
2.12.2 Contactorsshallbeelectromagnetic,suitablefo gspaceforoperation,inspectionandmaintenanceofnotle
rthecontrolarrangementasindicated.Operatingcoilssha ssthan1000mmshall be provided for LV equipment
llbesuitablefor and 2000mmforHVequipment.Inthecaseofcupboards,
d.c and a rectifier shall be incorporated for which are too shallow to meet therequirement with
a.ccontrolcircuits,protectedbylowcurrentcartridge the doors closed,
fuses.Latch - in contactors shall equipmentshallbelocatedintheelevationareaof
beprovidedonlywhereindicated. thecleardooropening.

2.12.3 Enclosuresshallcomplywithclause 2.14.4 Thesuitabilityof

2.03.In - built isolating switches complying withclause equipmenttofitintotheavailablespaceshallbecheckedb
2.07 and selector/test switches shall befitted,as indicated. eforeit isordered.Wheretherequirementsofclauses
2.14.2or2.14.3aredifficulttomeet,theEngineershallbeinfor
2.13 FRAMEWORK med.
2.13.1 Frameworkforsupportingelectricalequipmen
t shall be constructed form mild steelplate and strip, 2.15 MARKINGANDNOTICES
cold and hot rolled steel 2.15.1 Alldiagrams,charts,tablesandthewordingforl
sectionsorslottedangles,complyingwithBS1449,BS43 abelsandnoticesshallbesubmittedfortheapprovalofthe
60,BS2994,BS4848andBS4345 Engineerbeforetheyareinstalled.

7
 ElectricalStandardSpec’s

2.15.2 Labelsontheoutsideofequipmentenclosuress
hallbeoflaminatedplasticsmaterial with black
characters on white, unlessotherwise indicated.Non -
ferrous screws orrivets shall securely fix labels; no
adhesive shallbeusedforfixing.

2.15.3 Charactersforlabelsfixedonthemeansofisolat
ionattheoriginofeachinstallation shall be at least 10
mm high and 1.5mm thick. On all other labels
characters shallbeatleast4mmhighand0.5mmthick

2.15.4 Where there are two or more

incomingsupplies this shall be clearly indicated at
eachpointofisolation.Ininstallationshavingathree-
phasesupply,labelsonsingle-phaseequipmenthall
indicate the phase to which they areconnected.

8
 ElectricalStandardSpec’s

SECTIONTHREE
3.02 JOINTINGANDTERMINATIN
GCABLES
PowerDistribution Cables
3.02.2 The Engineer shall be given evidencethat
3.01 CABLES the joint or termination manufacturer
3.0101The type, size and conductor material hasstatedthatthematerialstobeemployedaresuitable
ofpowercablesshallbeasindicated.Clauses for the type of cable to be jointed orterminated.
3.01.2 to 3.01.9 inclusive specify those,
whichwillbemostcommonlyused. 3.02.3 A cable shall not be cut until the jointingor
terminating commences and the work shallproceed
3.01.2 Paper-insulatedcablesuptoandincluding 11 continuously until it is completed.Allnecessary
kV shall comply with BS6480; thatshallbemass- precautions shall be taken to preventdamage and
impregnated, non- ingress of moisture and impurities;cable ends shall
draining,beltedtype.Sheathsshallbeofleadforarmoured be free from moisture beforejointing commences
cables and lead alloy for enamouredcables. and, in the case of paper -
insulatedcables,asampleofpapershallbetestedformoist
3.01.3 Paper-insulatedaluminiumsheathcables up ure.Wherecircumstancespreventcompletionthecablee
to and including 11 kV shall ndsshallbesealed.In the case of lead sheathed cables
complywithBS6480asfarasitisapplicable. thisshallbebyplumbingandforaluminiumsheathedcabl
esbyhermeticallysealing.
3.01.4 Paper-
insulatedwithaluminiumsheath/neutral conductor 3.02.4 TheContractorshallemployforthiswork staff
(CONSAC) that are fully qualified and competentfor the types of
600/1000VgradecableshallcomplywithBS5593. joints and terminations to bemade.

3.01.5 Combined neutral / earth (CNE) 3.02.5 Core identification shall be matched
cablesuptoandincluding1kV,except(CONSAC)cables ateachjointwithouttwistingorcrossingofthecores.Whe
referred to in clause 3.01.4, shall complywith ESI re numbered cores are jointed
Standard 09-9 for Waveconal tocolouredcoresthesystemadoptedshallbeconsistentth
cable.TheyshallbeusedinTN-C-Ssystemsonly. roughoutallcablerunsand,onsites with existing
installations, consistent withthesystemalreadyinuse.
3.01.6 Cross-linkedpolyethylene(XLPE)insulated
cable up to and including 11kV 3.02.6 AtthelastjointinanHVrunwherephasing - out
shallcomplywithIECStandard502 is to be done, an over - size boxshall be used to
minimise distortion of the
3.01.7 Thermosetting (XLPE) insulated cores;thejointshallnotbemadeuntiltheEngineerhaswit
cablesuptoandincluding3.3kVshallcomplywithBS546 nessedandapprovedthephasing-out.
7andBS5468.
3.02.7 For joints in armoured cables a
3.01.8 Thermosetting(HEPR)insulatedcablesuptoa bondingconductorshallbeconnectedacrossthearmouri
ndincluding3.3kVshallcomplywithBS5467andBS546 ng.A split ferrule shall be placed
9. underthearmouringtopreventdeformationofthecableb
ytheclamp.
3.01.9 PVC-insulatedcableuptoandincluding
3.02.8 atterminations,abondingconductorshallconn
3.3kV, enamoured and armoured
ectarmouringandmetalsheathsdirectly to the external
withwireoraluminiumstrip,shallcomplywithBS6346.
earthing terminal of
theequipment.ForLVcablesthebondingconductor
3.01.10 Cables complying with Sections 8
shall have a cross sectional area inaccordance with
and10mayalsobeindicatedforpowerdistribution.
Table 54F of the IEE WiringRegulations, and for HV
cables be as
3.01.11 Reducedneutralconductorsshallnotbeusedun
indicated.Metalsheathsofsinglecorecablesshallbebon
less indicated.
dedandearthedatonepointonly,asindicated; insulated
glands shall be used at theopen- circuitendorends.
3.01.12 Anoversheathorserving,ofthemanufacturer’s
standardcolour,
3.02.9 at terminations, separating and
3.01.13 shallbeprovidedunlessotherwiseindicated.
bringingoutthecoresshallformcabletails.Eachtail
3.01.13 Installation of cables shall comply withSection6

9
 ElectricalStandardSpec’s

shallbelongenoughtoconnecttotheterminalsof
theequipment. 3.04.6 Hot-
pouringsealingcompoundshallbehardsettingandcompl
3.02.10 Attheterminationsofsinglecorecables,glandp ywithBS1858.Selection of the compound shall take
latesshallcomplywithclause account ofthe ambient temperature of the installation
2.03.6.Forthreephasecircuitsthephaseconductorsshallbear aswellasthe characteristicsofthe
ranged,ifpossible,intrefoilformationwherethey joint.Careshallbetakentopreventvoidsoccurringincons
passthroughtheenclosureofequipment. equenceof toorapidcooling.

3.02.11 Core identification at terminations shallbe 3.05 JOINTINGPAPER-

by coloured or numbered plastic stretch INSULATEDCABLES
orshrinkferrules. 3.05.1 Jointsshallcomplywithclauses3.02,
3.03and3.04andthefollowing.
3.02.12 Continuityofsparecoresshallbemaintainedatj
oints,andatterminationsthecoresshallbeconnectedtosp3.05.2 For lead sheath cables, joints shall bemade
areterminals. within an assembly comprising
plumbedleadorcoppersleevesenclosedinboxes.
3.03 CONNECTING AND
TERMINATINGCONDUCTORS 3.05.3 ForHVjointsabove3.3kV,purposemade
3.03.1 Solder shall be used only for connectingor paper tube or crepe paper tape
terminating paper - insulated cables. All insulationispreferredwith,for3phasecables,impregnat
otherconnections and terminations shall be by ed paper separators. Where these
meansofcompressionfittingsormechanicalclamps. arenotused,andforjointsuptoandincluding3.3kV,thera
dialthicknessofinsulationoverconnectors shall be
3.03.2 Cablesolderingsocketsshallbeofcorrect size twice the radial thickness tothe cable core insulation.
for the conductor without excessiveclearance. The radial thicknessof the belt insulation shall be
equal to the radialthicknesstothecablecoreinsulation.
3.03.3 Compressionconnectorsandassociateddiesfo
rthe compression tool 3.05.4 Theouterprotectionboxesforleadsheathed
shallbethecorrecttypeandsize.Thetoolshallbesodesign cables shall be cast - iron split type.The minimum
ed that the correct compression must thickness of compound betweenthe inner joint
beappliedbeforeitcanbereleased. sleeves and the box shall be 12mm.Mould boxes for
cast resin joints need
3.04 SLEEVES,TAPESANDSEALINGC nothaveadditionalouterprotection.
OMPOUNDS
3.04.1 Sleevesshallbeoftheshrinktype,applied cold 3.05.5 Forscreenedcable,continuityofscreeningshal
by mechanical device or by the useof heat. They lbemaintainedacrossthejoint.
shall provide a sufficient
thicknessofinsulationtosuittheparticularapplication. 3.06 TERMINATINGPAPER-
INSULATEDCABLES
3.04.2 Insulatingtapesusedinjointsandterminations 3.06.1 Terminations shall comply with
shall be compatible with, and havea temperature clauses3.02,3.03and3.04andthefollowing.
rating and insulating property
notlessthan,thecableinsulation.Theyshallcomply with3.06.2 A barrier against the ingress of
BS 3924, but crepe paper moistureintothecablecoresshallbeformedbelowcompo
tapesmaybeusedforjointingpaper-insulatedcables. und or shrink sleeve level.For
copperconductorsuptoandincluding70mm²thecoressh
3.04.3 Impregnatedcottontapesshallbedoubleselved all be sweated solid; for larger sizesand for
ged. aluminium conductors a ferrule shall
besweatedontoeachcore.Thetailsshallbelapped with
3.04.4 Alltapesshallbestoredinsealedcontainersunti tape complying with clause 3.04.
lrequired. orcoveredwithshrinktypesleeves.

3.04.5 Resinfillingsshouldbe,asfarasisreasonably 3.06.3 Where the cable termination is within

practicable, safe and without risk tohealth.Each pack anequipment enclosure, shrink type sleeves maybe
shall include warnings as toany hazards in its use, used unless otherwise indicated. At the
e.g. dermatitic or toxicproperties, with details of the entrytotheenclosureabolt-
precautions, whichtheusermusttaketominimisethem. onwipingglandatwhichthearmouringshallterminate,sh
allsupport the cable.The cable shall be
securelysupportedwithintheenclosure.

10
 ElectricalStandardSpec’s

3.09 JOINTINGDISSIMILARCABLES
3.06.4 End dividing boxes shall be, 3.09.1 Dissimilar cables shall be jointed
asindicated,oneof thefollowingtypes: onlywhereindicatedorwiththeapprovaloftheEngineer.
1. Compoundfilled,cast-iron,
splittypeboxeswithfillingholessealedbyscree 3.09.2 Jointingshallcomplywithclauses3.02,
dplugsorcapsandwithbrasswipingglandsanda 3.03 and 3.04 and shall be suitable for the
rmourclamps.Topplatesshallbetapped,orprov twotypesofcableconcerned
idedwithporcelainbushingsorinsulatorsasreq
uired; tapped top outlets shall have 3.10 STOPENDS
aminimumof10mmofthread. 3.10.1 Theterm‘STOPEND’meanstheprovision of
2. Castironorfabricatedsteelcableboxes a permanent seal in which all coresareinsulated
fittedtoswitchgearortransformers. andprotected so that the cablecanbeenergisedsafely.

3.06.5 Pole mounted boxes for LV cables shallbe

cast - iron of the tier type, but shrink typesleeves
may be used subject to the approval
oftheEngineer.Fixingofpole-
mountedboxesshallnotrequireanycuttingof thepole.

3.07 JOINTINGANDTERMINATIN
GPLASTIC-INSULATEDCABLE
3.07.1 Jointsandterminationsforcross-
linkedpolyethylene,thermosettingandPVC-
insulatedcablesshallcomplywithclauses3.02,
3.03and3.04

3.07.2 Unless otherwise indicated, joints shallbe

cast resin type and mould boxes need
nothaveadditionalouterprotection.

3.07.3 Terminationshallbebymeansofmechanicalca
bleglandscomplyingwithBS6121.Forarmouredcablest
he glandsshallhave an earth bond attachment, and for
cableswithconductorslargerthan35mm²theearthtermin
ation shall be integral with the body of
thegland.Glands used with aluminium-
armouredcables shall be of aluminium, but for all
othersituationstheyshallbeofbrassunlessotherwiseindi
cated.

3.07.4 Where an HV cable termination is

withinanequipmentenclosure;shrinktypeorremoulded
productsmaybeusedunlessotherwise indicated.At the
entry to enclosure
amechanicalcableglandcomplyingwithclause
3.07.3 shall support the cable.The cable
shallbesecurelysupportedwithintheenclosure.

3.07.5Where a termination is pole

mounted,shrinktypeorpre-mouldedproductsmaybeused
subject to the approval ofthe
Engineer.HVcablesshalladditionallybefittedwithshrouds.

3.08 JOININGCNECABLES
3.08.1 Jointing shall comply with the clauses ofthis
Section relevant to the type of cable. Theprotective
conductor shall not be broken
whenmakingaservicetee - joint.

11
 ElectricalStandardSpec’s

SECTIONFOUR 4.02.2Jointsshallbelocatedabovegroundwherever
possible, unless otherwise
indicated.Jointsboxesshallbesupportedsecurelyonshortpo
Alarm, control, stsorotherapprovedstructures.Where joints are buried the
joint box shall bepositioned at right angles to the line of
CommunicationandMonitoring the routeandatthesamedepthasthecable.
Cables
4.03 JOINTING POLYETHYLENE
4.01 CABLES -INSULATEDCABLES
4.01.1 The type and size of cables shall be 4.03.1 Jointsshallcomplywithclause4.02andthefoll
asindicated.Clauses4.01.2 to4.01.7 owing.
inclusivespecifythose,whichwillbemostcommonlyuse
d 4.03.2 Jointsintwo-
corecablesshallbemadeinadaptableboxescomplyingwi
4.01.2 Polyethylene - insulated and thclause
sheathedcables,withorwithoutscreeningandarmouring 8.03.Cables shall be terminated at the boxeswith
,shallcomplywithBS3573.Theyshallbeinstalledinacco compression glands and armour
rdancewiththisSectionandSection6 clampingcones.Jointsinconductorsshallbemadeusing
insulated terminal blocks complying withthe
4.01.3 PVC- requirements of clause 12.21.Boxes
insulatedcables,withandwithoutarmour, shall comply shallbefilledwithaninert,permanentlyplasticcompound
with BS 6346.They having a high insulation value
shallbeinstalledinaccordancewithSections3and6. andshallbecompletelywrappedinPVCself-adhesivetape.

4.01.4 PVC-insulatedsinglecorenon- 4.03.3 Joints in 15 - pair and 20 - pair

sheathcablesshallcomply cables,includingtee-
withBS6004andrubberinsulatedcablesshallcomplywit jointshavingabranchcableofnotmorethanfourcores,sh
hBS6007.TheyshallbeinstalledinaccordancewithSecti allbemadeinsingle ended bell - type boxes with
on8. expandingplug assemblies.The Complete cable,
includingthearmouringandoutersheath,shallbeclampe
4.01.5 PVC-insulatedmulticore-sheathedcables dintheneopreneexpanderplug.
shall comply with BS6004.They shall
beinstalledinaccordancewithSection9. 4.03.4 Jointsin cableshaving morethan
20pairs,includingtee-
4.01.6 Mineral - insulated cables shall jointshavingabranchcableofmotmorethanfourcores,sh
complywithBS6207.Theyshallbeinstalledinaccordanc allbemadeasindicated.Approvedsleevestypeboxes
ewithSection10. complying with the cable
manufacturer’srecommendationsshallbeused.
4.01.7 Co - axial cables shall be installed
inaccordancewithSection6. 4.03.5 Where-teejointshavingabranchcable of more
than four cores are to be made,link-disconnecting
4.01.8 An over-sheath, of the units shall be used, locatedaboveground.
manufacturer’sstandardcolour,shallbeprovidedunless
otherwiseindicated. 4.04 TERMINATING POLYETHYLENE -
INSULATEDCABLES
4.01.9 for some special applications others 4.04.1 Terminationsshallcomplywithclause
maysupplythecableforinstallationbytheContractor;alt 4.02andthefollowing.
ernativelythecablemaybesuppliedandinstalledbyother
sintrenches,ducts, trunking or conduit supplied and 4.04.2 Cablesshallbeterminatedatlinkdisconnecting
installedby the Contractor.The Contractor shall units(LDU),whichshallbesuppliedcompletewithtermi
liasewiththesupplierofsuchcablestoensureadequate nalstripsandcompressionglands.
provisions are made and, where
theycanbeinstalledatthesametimeasthosecables,tomee4.04.3 Unlessotherwiseindicated,thearmouringofall
ttherequirementsofclause cablesentering the LDU
6.04.3. Installationofthecablesandthe shallbebondedtogether;theconductivityofthebondingc
provision of cable trunking, ducting and onductorshallbe not lessthan
conduitshallcomplywithSection6and8. theconductivityofthearmouringofthelargestcable.

4.02 JOINTSANDTERMINATIONS
Of cable.For Co- axial cables and other specialcables,
joints and terminations shall comply
withthemanufacturer’srequirements.

12
 ElectricalStandardSpec’s

4.05 JOINTING POLYETHYLENE 4.09 MARKING

-INSULATED CABLES TO PAPER -
INSULATEDCABLES. 4.09.1 Marking of cables and the termination
ofconductorsshallcomplywithclause6.11,8.01.4
4.05.1 Joints shall comply with clause 4.02 9.01.2 and 10.06.9 as appropriate to the type ofcable.
andshall be made using single ended bell -
typeboxeswithexpandingplugassemblies 4.09.2 a label indicating the system concernedshall
identify all joint boxes.Labels shall be
4.05.2 The finished joints shall be filled with inaccordancewithclause2.15.
aninert,permanently plasticcompound having
ahighinsulationvalue. 4.09.3 A diagram showing the allocation
ofterminalsforeachincomingcableshallbefixedinside
4.06 JOINTINGDRYPAPER- eachjointbox cover.
INSULATEDTELEPHONECABLES
4.06.1 Joints shall comply with clause 4.02
andthefollowing.

4.06.2 Jointsshallbedrytypewiththeconductorconne
ctedbythetwistingandsoldering method.Lead sleeves
shall complywithTable5A

4.06.3 The joint shall be gas pressure tested

inaccordance with Appendix 3.Outer
protectiveboxesshallbecast -ironsplittype.

4.07 TERMINATING PAPER-

INSULATEDTELEPHONECABLES
4.07.1 Terminationsshallcomplywithclause
4.02andthefollowing.

4.07.2 Plastic insulating sleeving on each coreshall

have identification, by rings or colour,
tocomplementtheidentificationonthepaperinsulation.

4.07.3 Individual conductors shall be

solderedtoappropriatetags asindicated.

4.07.4 Thechambershallbefilledwithcompound at
the pouring temperature indicatedbythemanufacturer.

4.08 SEGREGATION
4.08.1 Segregationofcablesfromthoseofother
systems and from equipment, pipe workand
ductwork shall comply with clause 6.02
but,forsomespecialisedsystems,theContractorshallco
mplyalsowithanyadditionalrequirementsthatareindica
ted.

4.08.2 Category 2 cables shall not be installedin

the same conduit, trunking compartment
orcableductingcompartmentasCategory1cablesunless
otherwiseindicatedandanyrequirements that are
indicated for
segregatingcircuitsofparticularsystemsshallbeobserve
d.

13
 ElectricalStandardSpec’s

SECTIONFIVE All bends, tees and crosspieces shall have agusset

extending at least 150 mm along eachsideformthepointof
intersection.
CableSupports
5.03.4 Cable tray shall be cut along a line
5.01 SELECTIONOFCABLESUPPORTS ofimperforated metal.Holes cut in cable tray
5.01.1 Unless otherwise indicated, the type ofcable forthepassageofcablesshallbefittedwithgrommets,
supportsused shall be selected by bushes or other lining.Cutting
theContractortosuitthecircumstancesoftheinstallation, ofcabletrayshallbekepttoaminimum.
buttheyshallcomplywithclauses
5.02 to5.08inclusive,andthefollowingpreferencessh5.03.5 Eachlengthofcabletrayshallbesecurelybolted
allbetakenintoaccount: toanadjacentlengthwithfactorymadecouplingplatesofa
Forhorizontalruns-cabletray;Forverticalruns- dequatedimensions to prevent sagging or twisting.
cablecleats; Boltsand nuts shall be mushroom - head steel
Wheremarshallingofcablesoccurs, roofingtype complying with BS 1494.Ends of
e.g. atswitchboards-cableracks. couplingbolts shall not come into contact with the
cables.No welding shall be used in the joining of
5.01.2Theselection,sizingoftherequirementsof cabletray.
Section6.
5.03.6 where cables are laid on the cable
traytiesshallsecurethem,eachtiesecuringthecables of
5.02 PROTECTIVEFINISHES
only one circuit.The ties shall be of aproprietary type
5.02.1 Unless otherwise indicated, all ferrousmetal
not requiring screws or bolts forfixing; the use of
for cable tray, cable racks, cable
wire or similar material will
ladder,cablehangersandtheirfixingsandsuspensionssh
notbepermitted.Tiesshallbespacedatnotgreaterthan60
allhaveagalvanisedfinish.
0mmalongeachcable,andwithin100mmof
eachbendorset.
5.02.2 Forgeneraluseinsidebuildingsthegalvanised
finish shall be a coating equivalent toand not less
5.03.7 Wherecabletrayisinstalledintheverticalplane,
than type G275 to BS 2989 andinstallation of cable
cablesshallbesupportedbycable cleats or, in the case
supports shall take
of mineral - insulatedcables,saddles orclips.
account,butmanufacturers’standardfinisheswillbeacc
epted for slotted angles.All metal exposedduring
5.03.8 Cabletrayshallbefixedatregularintervals not
fabrication shall be given a coat of Zinc -rich paint,
exceeding 1200 mm and 225 mmfrom bends and
brushed on, or finished to match
intersections.A minimum clearspace of 20 mm shall
themanufacturer’sfinish.
be left behind all cabletrays.
5.02.3 Foruseoutsidebuildings,inplantrooms or
5.04 CABLESCLEATS
other locations as indicated, the finishshallbehot-
dipgalvanisedtoBS729orsheradize coated to BS 5.04.1 Cablecleatsshallbemadefrommaterials,whic
4921.Metal exposedduring fabrication shall be given hareresistanttocorrosionwithout the need for
treatment or special finish.Plastic materials shall be
a coat of zinc -richpaint,brushedon.
non - brittle down to20ºC.
5.03 CABLETRAY
5.04.2 Cable cleats shall be of a size such thatthey
5.03.1 Metal cable tray shall be used
can be tightened down to grip the
unlessotherwiseindicatedanditshallcomplywithclause
cableswithoutexertingunduepressureorstrainonthem.
5.02 and 5.03.2 to 5.03.8.The use
For vertical cables two - bolt cable cleatsshall be
ofplasticcabletraywillberestrictedtoareashavingacorr
used which shall grip the cables
osiveatmosphere.
firmlyenoughtopreventthemslipping.
5.03.2 Cable tray shall be perforated and
5.04.3 Thespacingofcablecleatsshallcomplywith
shallbeformedformcarbonsteelplatecomplyingwithB
the IEE Wiring Regulations. At bends in thecables,
S1449;dimensionsshallbeinaccordance with Table
cleats shall be located immediately oneachside.
5A.Light, medium orheavy-
dutycabletrayshallbeselected,asappropriate,toprovide
5.05 CABLERACKS
adequatesupportwithoutsagging,or asindicated.
5.05.1 Cableracksshallcomply withclause
5.03.3 Bends,tees,risers,reducersand4- 5.02 and shall be constructed form
waycrosspiecesshallbefactorymadewhereverpossible, proprietarysystemsusingchannelsectionswithreturnlips
andshallbeofthe
samematerial,thicknessandfinishasthecabletray.

14
 ElectricalStandardSpec’s

and compatible fixing accessories;

factoryformedcableladder mayalsobeused.

5.05.2 Cables shall be fixed to the racks

andladdersbycablecleats.

5.06. CABLEHANGERS
5.06.1 Cable hangers shall be used only
whereindicated.They shall be made from mild
steelflatbarcomplyingwithclause5.02.

5.07 SUSPENSIONSANDFIXINGS
5.07.1 Itispreferredthatproprietarysuspensionsyste
mscomprisingchannelsections with return lips and
compatible fixingaccessories or slotted angles should
be used.Where necessary fixings may be fabricated
frommildsteelfloatbar.Metalarcweldingshallcomplyw
ithBS5135.

5.07.2 Unless otherwise indicated, fixing to

thebuildingfabricshallcomplywithTable5B

5.07.3 Noshotfiringshallbeusedandnodrillingorwel
dingofstructuralsteelwork
shallbedonewithouttheapprovaloftheEngineer.

5.07.4 Suspensionsandfixingsshallcomplywithclau
se5.02

5.08 BONDING
5.07.5Bolts,nuts,washersandscrewsshallbecadmiumorzin
c electroplated.

5.08.1Supplementarybondingshallbeinstalledbetweenco
mponentpartsofcabletrays,racksorladderswherethemetho
dofmechanicalconnectiondoesnotprovidepermanent and
reliable metal - to - metal jointsof negligibleimpedance.

15
 ElectricalStandardSpec’s

SECTION SIX 6.03.2 Spacing of supports, for HV cables

shallcomplywiththecablemanufacturer’srecommenda
tions.
Cable Installation 6.03.4Wherecablescrossexpansionandsettlement joints in
the building structure theyshall be fixed 300mm each
side of the joint
6.01 ROUTES andsufficientslackleftbetweentoallowformovement.Wher
6.01.1 Unlesstheroutesofcablesareindicatedonthedr e the cables are buried in thebuilding fabric suitable
awingstheyshallbedetermined by the Contractor and provision shall be madetoallow formovementofthe
approved bytheEngineerbeforeworkis started. structure.TheContractorshallsubmithisproposalsfortheap
provaloftheEngineer.
6.01.2 Cables installed on the surface shall
beparallelwiththelinesofthebuildingconstructionandp 6.04 TRENCHING
roperlyaligned. 6.04.1 NoworkshallcommenceuntiltheContractor
has satisfied himself that the site isfreeof all cables,
6.01.3 Cables drains and other undergroundservices or has
buriedbelowgroundshall,asfaraspracticable,followthe established and indicatedthoseservices that are
featuresofthe sitesuch as roadways and building known to exist. The
lines.Ducts atroad crossings shall normally be at ContractorshallissueaCertificatetotheEngineerforcou
right anglestothelineoftheroad. ntersigning before commencing
work.TheissueofaCertificatedoesnotrelievetheContra
6.02 SEGREGATION ctor of his responsibilities to proceed in
6.02.1 AminimumclearanceinaccordancewithTable asafeandcarefulmanner.
6Ashallbeallowedfromanyequipment, pipe workor
ductwork; the 6.04..2 Unless otherwise indicated, excavationswithin
distance3shallbemeasuredfromtheexternalsurfaceofa 600 mm of existing services shall be byhand digging.All
nylagging.Intheeventofdifficultyinachieving these services uncovered,
requirements the Engineer shallbeinformed. whetherexpectedornot,shallbereportedimmediatelytotheE
ngineer;theyshallbesupportedbyslings or other suitable
6.02.2 SpacingbetweencablesshallcomplywithTabl means and protected.Any damage to services, however
e6Abut,whereindicated,accountmustbetakenofany minor,
groupingnecessarytomaintain the current carrying shallbereportedimmediatelytotheEngineer;norepairs or
capacities of thecables. replacement shall be done unless theEngineergiveshis
approval.
6.02.3 No stacking of cables on cable tray willbe
permitted, except for single core cables 6.04.3 Whencabletrenchesareopenedallcables shall
intrefoilandcontrolcables,unlessotherwiseindicated. be laid as quickly as possible.TheEngineer’s
approval shall be obtained before
6.02.4 Spaceshallbeallowedalongcableroutes for atrenchisbackfilled,butgenerallybackfillingshallbe
future additions, where indicated, andcable supports commenced within 24 hours of cable
shall be of adequate size for theultimateload. layingandtheworkcompletedspeedily.

6.02.5 Adequate space shall be left 6.04.4 Trenches shall be excavated to providea
betweencablerunsandthebuildingfabricandotherservic minimum cover for cables in accordance
estoallowforthefutureremovalorinstallationofcables. withTable6B.

6.03 SUPPORTSANDFIXINGS 6.04.5 Turfandtopsoilshallberemovedcarefullyandp

6.03.1 Cables shall be adequately supported,by one reservedforreinstatementintheiroriginalpositions.
of the methods specified in Section 5,through out-
their length except where they runthrough cable 6.04.6 Excavationsshallbecarriedoutinaccordance
ducts or are buried direct in theground.Fixing direct with BS6031 and shall comply withany
to the building fabric LocalRegulations.Excavationsshall
bycablecleatsmaybeadoptedforsinglerunssubjecttothe bekeptfreeofwaterandprotectedagainstdamage or
approvaloftheEngineer,andwhereindicated. collapse.The safety of persons
andtheprotectionofstructures,buildings,roads,sewersa
ndservicesfromdamageshallbeensured;allnecessarysh
eeting,timbering,strutting and shoring shall be
supplied, erectedandsubsequentlyremoved.

16
 ElectricalStandardSpec’s

6.04.7 Before cables are laid the bottom of 6.06.1 Cables shall be installed in cable
thetrench,thetrenchshallbegradedevenly,cleared of ductswhere they pass under or within 5 m of
loose stones and then covered for thefull width of the railwaytracks, where they pass under roadways,
trench with a 75 mm layer ofearth, which has passed wherethey are supported or bridges, and
through a sieve with amaximum mesh of 12 mm or additionallywhereindicated.
with sieve sand.Formineral-
insulatedcablesthemaximummesh of the sieve shall 6.06.2 onbridges,steeltubesshallprotectcables.Unles
be 6 mm and the depthof earth or sand shall be not sotherwiseindicatedallothercable ducts shall be
less than 25 mm.Where the level of trench bottom selected by the Contractorfrom the alternatives listed
has to changetheslopeshallnotbegreaterthan1in12. in clauses 6.06.4
to6.06.6,tosuitthecircumstancesoftheinstallation.
6.04.8 Aftercableshavebeenlaidafurtherlayer
ofearth or sieved sand shall be addedover the full 6.06.3 Ducts shall be of a size suitable for
width of the trench and tamped, toprovide finally not thecables to be drawn - in and if necessary in
less than 50 mm cover thefuture, withdrawn without damage; the
overthecables.Theearthshallhavepassedthrough a minimumsize of the bore shall be 100 mm. The
sieve with a maximum mesh of 12mm; for mineral - boreshall be smooth and entirely free
insulated cables the maximummeshsizeshallbe6mm. fromroughspots,sharpedges,imperfectionsandprotube
rances.
6.04.9 Trenchesshallbebackfilledinlayersand each
layer shall be rammed.The first twolayers shall be 6.06.4 Cable ducts of vitrified clay shall
100 mm deep and rammed byhand; the remaining complywith BS 65 and shall be extra strength
layers shall be not morethan 200 mm deep and power class.Theyshallbejoinedwithplasticsleevestoprovides
ramming may elf-alignmentofthebore.
beused.Warningtapesandcoversshallbeincludedasspe
cifiedinclause6.05.Whereapplicable; topsoil and turf 6.06.5 Fibre ducts shall be heavy gauge
shall be replaced pitchimpregnated fibre conduits complying with
andthefinallevelshallbelevelwithornotmorethan BS4108,withsnapringortapercouplingjoints.
25mmabovetheadjacentgroundlevel. A
higherdegreeofconsolidation isrequired6.06.6 PVC ducts shall be unplasticized PVCpipe
forexcavationswithinshouldersandover-runsand adjacent complying either with BS 4660 or with
to paved areas used by aircraft; atthese locations the final BS3506classesB,C,DorE;theyshallhaverubber-
layer of sealingringscomplyingwithBS2494.PVC ducts shall
reinstatementshallbecompactedbypowerramminguntilma not be used where the depth ofcoverexceeds 1m.
ximumpossiblecompaction isachieved.
6.06.7 Steel tubes shall comply with BS 1387and
6.05 WARNINGTAPESANDCOVERS shall have screwed socket joint and
6.05.1 A warning tape shall be placed aboveeach endbushes.Tubesshallbeprotectedagainstcorrosion
cable that is laid direct in the ground with a coat of bitumstic paint beforethey are
andaboveeachcableduct.Thetapeshallbelaidata depth installed.Tubes of 100 mm bore
of 300 mm below the finished surfacelevel except shallbeoflightthickness.
where the depth of roadway orpaved area base
exceeds 300 mm in whichcase the tape shall be laid 6.07 LAYINGOFDUCTS
immediately belowthebase. 6.07.1 Unless otherwise indicated, cable ductsshall
6.05.2 Warningtapesshallbeofpolythenenotlesstha be laid at depths which comply with
n150mmwideand0.1mmthick.Theyshall be yellow in therequirementsofTable6B.
colour and bear thecontinuously repeated legend “-
CAUTIONELECTRIC CABLE BELOW-”, or 6.07.2 Thebottomoftrenchesshallberammed to
similar, inblackletters notlessthan30mmhigh. provide a flat firm bedding; whererockispresent a
layerofloose soil shall bespread over the bottom and
6.05.3 Warning covers shall comply with BS2484 also rammed.Inwater-
and Table 6C.They shall be provided forHV cables loggedorunstablesoila75mmthicknessofgrade10
(excluding AGL cables) and formineral - insulated concrete, as defined
cables; for other cables theyshall be provided only inCP110,with20mmaggregateshallbelaidasafoundatio
where n and soil place around and above to adepthof
indicated.Coversshallbelaiddirectlyonthetampedsiev 75mmabovethetopoftheduct.
edearthorsandthatcovers thecables.
6.07.3 Wherecable ductspass under,orwithin
6.06 DUCTS 5 mofrailway tracksor under roadways
thebottomoftrenchesshall be rammed and
theductslaidonandsurroundedbyconcrete

17
 ElectricalStandardSpec’s

providing a minimum cover of 150 mm all 6.07.12Immediatelybeforecablesaredrawn-in,ducts shall

round.Theconcreteshallbegrade20,asdefinedinCP 110, be cleared with a mandrel 150
with 20 mm aggregate.At each joint mmlongandhavingadiameter12mmlessthanthebore
intheductsflexibilityshallbemaintainedbyforming a joint diameter.The mandrel shall be followedby a circular
in the concrete by 25 mm thickcompressiblefoamfiller. wire brush with a diameter 12
mmmorethantheborediameter.
6.07.4 Cableductsshallbeextendnotlessthan 1000
mm beyond the limit of roadways andpaved 6.08 HANDLINGOFCABLES
areas.They shall be at least 150 mmaway from gas 6.08.1 Installations of cables shall be carried
and water pipes, drains, sewersand electrical outonlywhentheambienttemperatureisabove0ºCunles
plant.Where services cross, sawrittenstatementfromthecablemanufacturerconfirm
theclearanceshallbenotlessthan50mm.Ifdifficultyarise sthatnodamagetothecablewillresult,andtheapprovaloft
sinachievingtheseminimumclearancestheEngineersha heEngineerisgiven.The temperature of
llbeinformed. thecableshallhavebeenabove0ºC,orabovetheminimum
temperaturerecommendedbythemanufacturer,foratlea
6.07.5 Deflectionfromastraightlineorvariationindep st24hoursimmediatelypriortoinstallation;anyspecialm
thshallnotexceedin30horizontally nor 1 in 60 easurestoachievethisshallbesubjecttoapprovalbytheE
vertically and the cableductshallpass ngineer.
thealignmenttests.
6.08.2 Cables shall be handled with care
6.07.6 Draw-pits shall be constructed at andeveryeffortmadetoavoiddamagetothecables, to
eachchangeofdirectionandforstraightruns,atintervalsn other services and to building
ot exceeding 10mfor PVC or fibreducts and 25m for fabric.Recommendations or instructions available
vitrified clay ducts and steelpipes.Draw-pits shall be fromthecablemanufacturersconcerningtheinstallation
of adequate size toenable cables to be drawn-in of cables shall be taken not be
without damage orundue stress due to bending.The bentinaradiuslessthansixtimestheoveralldiameter.Any
constructionofdraw- damageshallbereportedimmediatelytotheEngineer.
pitsandtheircoversshallbeasindicated.
6.08.3 Cable drums shall be unloaded carefullyby
607.7 Concrete shall comply with CP110 means of either a crane or ramp and impactwith the
andshallbeofaclasssuitableforthesulphatecontent ofthe ground shall be avoided.They shall besupported on
soil in accordance with Table 49of theCodeof Practice. axles and axle stands while thecable is being pulled;
twisting and abrasion
6.0.7.8 Drawing a mandrel through each ofthecableservingoroversheathshallbeavoided.
ductshallprove.Alignment.Thediameterofmandrelss6.08.4 Cables shall be pulled over cable
hallbe7mmlessthantheborediameter.Mandrels shall rollersadequately spaced to prevent the cable
be of wood, 250mmlong. beingdraggedovergroundorothersurface.Forcables
pulled into thrust borings or cable ductsand for all
6.0.7.9 While cables ducts are being laid cables exceeding 10 m length,
nylondraw- cablestockingsshallbeusedforhauling.Precautions
linesshallbethreadedthrougheachlengthofduct.Thedra shall be taken to ensure that
w- strainistakenonthecablecoresaswellasthesheathandex
linesshallbeabreakingstrengthofnotlessthan550Nands cessivestrainshallbeavoided.
hallbeatleast4mlongerthantheductrun.
6.08.5 Cables laid in trenches shall cross
6.0.7.10 Immediatelyafterlaying,andbeforebackfilli othercablesonlyatjunctions;clearancesbetweenthecabl
ngthetrench,theendsofthecableducts shall be sealed esshallbemaintainedatcrossovers.Cables shall not be
temporally with hardwoodplugs.Draw-lines shall be laid one above the otherexceptwhereindicated.
secured outside theplugs. 6.08.6 Only one cable shall be pulled into
6.0.7.11 Backfilling shall be in accordance eachductexceptforthefollowing,whichmaybebunched
withclause 6.04.9.Where a cable duct is not subjecttotherequirementsofTable6Aandamaximumsp
usedimmediately, temporary marker posts shall acefactorof20%:Single
beinstalledtolocatetheendsoftheductandretained in - corecablesformingonecircuit;Mineral-
position until cables are drawn in.Markers shall be insulatedcables;AGLcables,Alarm,control,communic
white painted wooden posts75mm x 75 mm, standing ationandmonitoringcables
not less than 600 mmoutoftheground. Cable that is to be installed in the same ductshallbe
bunchedtogetherandpulledinone

18
 ElectricalStandardSpec’s

operation; additional cables shall not be drawn-6.11.3 Cable markers shall be located at
insubsequently. everypointwhereacableentersabuilding,sub-station,
6.08.7 The ends of all cables shall be plinth or distribution pillar; at each joint,change of
sealedduringlyingunlessjointingorterminationiscarrie direction, road and pathway crossing;and along the
d out immediately.The sealed ends ofpower cables route of the cable at intervals notexceeding45m.
shall be marked with the letter 'A'or 'Z' to indicate
the core sequence, is clockwiseand'Z'whereitisanti- 6.11.4 Except where cables are buried, locatedin
clockwise. switch rooms, in ducts and spaces
6.08.8 Jointingterminatingandsealingofcables shall designatedsolelyforelectricalservices,orhaveorangeov
comply with Sections 3, 4 or 10 asappropriate. ersheaths;theyshallbeidentifiedbyadhesivebandscolou
redorange,complyingwith BS 1710.The bands shall
6.09 SEALINGDUCTSANDOPENINGS be not less than100 mm long, located at least once
6.09.1 Aftercableshavebeeninstalledtheends of all within eachseparate compartment through which the
ducts and service conduits cablespassandatintervalsnotexceeding12m.
(includingspareways)shallbesealed.
6.09.2 Where ducts and service conduit 6.11.5 except where cables are buried or
enterbuildings the seal shallform a barrier againstgas, closedinconduit,trunkingorducting,discsorproprietary
water, oil, fire and attack by vermin. cablemarkersshallpermanentlyidentify them.The
Spareductsandserviceconduitsshallbesimilarlysealed discs or markers shall be oflaminated plastic
with removable material.The method materials with black characterson white; characters
ofsealingshallbesubmittedfortheEngineer'sapprovalbe shall be not less than 3mmhigh. The inscription shall
foreworkcommences. indication the nominalvoltage designation of the
6.09.3 Firebarriersatfire-resistantstructuralelements, load, the number andcross sectional area of the cores
such as floors and walls, shall and the ratedvoltageofthecable.
satisfytherequirementsofBS476forinstallation,stabilit
yandintegrityfortheperiodoftimeindicated. The 6.11.6 Cableidentificationdiscs/markersshallbe
method shall be submitted attached to the cables with ties.Discs shallbe located
fortheEngineer'sapprovalbeforeworkcommences. within 500 mm of terminations
andjoints,atleastoncewithineachseparatecompartment
6.10 CABLEGUARDS throughwhichthecablespass,and at intervals not
6.10.1 Cable guards shall be fitted where cablesare exceeding 24m; they
mounted at low level on walls, poles, shallcoincidewiththecolourbands.
towersorotherlocations asindicated.
6.10.2 Cableguardsshallbeconstructedfrom 6.12 REDUNDANTCABLES
1.6 mm thick galvanised steel sheet complyingwith6.12.1 Where indicated, redundant cables
clause 2.13 and formed into a casing shallbestop-
withexternalflangesforfixingtothefabric. endedinamannercomplyingwithclause3.10.
6.10.3 Guardsshallextendtoaheightof3500mmabov
egroundorfloorlevelforHVcables and 1500 mm for 6.12.2 Where cables are to be recovered
LV cables.In externallocations the guards shall theyshallbecleanedandcoiledondrumsappropriatetoth
extend 300 mm belowfinishedgroundlevel;they esizeof cable.
shallbe protectedinside and out with bitumastic paint
extendingfrom the bottom up to 150 mm above
finishedgroundlevel.

6.11 MARKINGOFCABLES
6.11.1 Buriedcablesshallbepermanentlyidentifiedb
yconcreteslabmarkers.Themarkersshallbe600mmsqu
areby 100 mmthick with impressed characters; they
shall
bemadeofgrade20concrete,asdefinedinCP110,with10
mmaggregate.Thewordingshallbe"HVCABLE”or"L
VCABLE”asappropriatetogetherwithcircuitdetailsasi
ndicated; in addition the word 'JOINT' shall
beaddedwhereappropriate.

6.11.2 Cablemarkersshallbeinstalledflushwiththefin
ishedgroundlevel,onthepreciselineof thecable.

19
 ElectricalStandardSpec’s

SECTION SEVEN

OVERHEADLINES
7.01 HVLINES
7.01.1 HV overhead lines shall be as
indicatedandshallcomplywithESIStandard43-10.

7.02 LVLINES
7.02.1 LV overhead lines shall be as
indicatedandshallcomplywithESIStandard43-30

7.03 CONNECTIONSTOBUILDINGS
7.03.1 Service lines shall be PVC - insulatedcables
with copper or aluminium conductors asindicated,
complying with BS 6485, type 8 or 16asappropriate
forthe nominal voltage ofthesystem.

7.03.2 Lease - in cables from the service

linetermination into the building shall be single
corePVC - insulated with sheath, complying with
BS6004.Core identification colours shall
extendthroughthelengthof thecables.

7.03.3 UnlessotherwiseindicatedtheContractor
shall include for the supply and
fixingofallinsulators,bracketsortimberpostsnecessaryf
orterminatingservicelinesatbuildings.Bracketsandfixi
ngsshallcomplywithSection5.

7.04 CATENARYWIRESUPPORTS
7.04.1 Shortspanoverheadlinksbetweenbuildings
shall be PVC - insulated cables withcopper or
aluminium conductors as indicated.Acatenary
wireshall supportthe
cables,whichshallbepreferablyintegralwiththecable.

7.04.2 Catenary’ssupportedcablesshallbeinstalledin
accordancewiththeIEEWiringRegulations.

7.04.3 Details of the type of catenary systemand

fixing to be used shall be submitted to
theEngineer,whoseapprovalshallbeobtainedbeforewo
rkproceeds.

20
 ElectricalStandardSpec’s

SECTIONEIGHT degree of protection of IP41 when used insidebuildings

and IP44 when outside buildings or atotherlocationsas
indicated.
Wiring System - Cable
8.03.4 Whenlocatedoutsidebuildingsadaptable
inConduit,TrunkingandD conduit boxes and covers shall be ofgreycast-
ucting ironconstruction,andcircularconduitboxes and covers
shall be of malleable cast -ironconstruction.
8.01 CABLES
8.01.1 The type and size of cables shall be 8.03.5 When conduit boxes are installed flushwith
asindicated the building fabric overlapping covers shallbefitted.
Clauses8.01.2and8.01.3specifythose,whichwillbeusedmo
stcommonly. 8.03.6 Flexiblesteelconduitforgeneraluseinside
buildings shall be type A with protectionagainst
8.01.2 PVC - insulated non - sheathed corrosion equivalent to Class 2; for usein plant rooms
cablesshallcomplywithBS6004;theyshallhavecopperc and other locations as
onductorsunlessotherwiseindicated. indicatedtheprotectionshouldbeClass4.Adaptorsshall
beofthesolidtype.
8.01.3 Rubber insulated non - sheathed
cablesshallcomplywithBS6007 8.04 NON-METALLICCONDUIT
8.04.1 Non-metallic conduit shall be rigid
8.01.4 Core identification colours shall PVCTypeAunlessotherwiseindicated.
extendthroughout the length of PVC - insulated
cables.Coreidentificationforimpulseclocksystemsshal8.04.2 PliableconduitsshallbetypeA,reinforced,
lbewhite,andforsounddistributionorpublic address unless otherwise indicated.Pliableconduitshallnotbe
systems it shall be grey; for used where the ambienttemperaturemayexceed60ºC.
otherCategory2systemsthecoloursshallbeasindicated.
Corecoloursforfirealarmandemergency lighting 8.05 TRUNKINGANDDUCTING
cabling shall comply with 8.05.1 Trunking and ducting shall be of steel
theIEEWiringRegulations.Theadditionalidentificatio orinsulatingmaterialasindicated,andshallcomplywithc
nsrequirementsofclause8.12.6shallalsobemet. lauses8.06or8.07whereappropriate.

8.01.5 Cableshallbeprotectedthroughouttheirlength8.05.2 Trunking fitted with covers shall providea

bytrunking,ducting,andconduitandequipment minimum degree of protection of IP41
enclosure.Framework or partitionsmay be used, but whenusedinsidebuildings.Whenusedoutsidebuildings,
only where indicated or withtheapprovalof or at other locations where indicated,theminimum
theEngineer. degreeofprotectionshallbeIP44.

8.02 CONDUIT 8.05.3 Partitions shall be of the same materialas

8.02.1 Conduitshall be steel ornon- the trunking or ducting.The gap
metallicasindicated,andcomplywithclause8.03or betweenpartitionsandtrunkingcoversshallbeaminimu
8.04asappropriate. m toensurethatsegregationofcircuitsismaintained.

8.02.2 Unlessotherwiseindicated,flexiblesteel 8.05.4 Standard fittings shall be used and

conduit shall be used are used with steelconduit and onlywhere these are inadequate will site
pliable conduit with non - metallicconduit. fabricatedfittings be accepted.Fittings fabricated on
siteshall be comparable in construction and
8.03 STEELCONDUITANDFITTINGS finishwiththerestofthetrunkingorductingsystem.
8.03.1 Unlessotherwiseindicated,steelconduitsandfi
ttingsshallbescrewedclassification. 8.05.5 Endsofrunsshallbefittedwithremovablecover
8.03.2 Unlessotherwiseindicated,theprotectionagai stopermitfutureextension.
nstcorrosionofconduitsandconduit fittings for general
use inside buildingsshall be Class 2; for use outside 8.05.6 Thesizeoftrunkingandductingshallbeasindic
buildings, inplant rooms, floor trenches, other ated.
locations
asindicatedandinfloorscreedstheprotectionshallbeCla 8.05.7 Trunking with the cover on the side
ss 4. orbottomshallbefittedwithremovablecable

8.03.3 Adaptableandcircularconduitboxeswiththeir
coversshallprovideaminimum

21
 ElectricalStandardSpec’s

retaining straps at intervals not exceeding 1000mm. buildingfabricaswellaswheretheyareonthesurface.

Where trunking runs vertically, cables shallbe supported
at intervals not exceeding 5 m; themethod ofsupport8.08.2 Conduit, trunking and ducting shall
shall allow for future easyremoval of or addition to the beparallel with he lines of the building
cables and shall constructionand properly aligned, except where
besubmittedfortheapprovaloftheEngineer. conduit ispermitted in floorscreeds.Conduit buried
inwall finishes shall run vertically only, unless
8.06 STEELTRUNKING theEngineergivesapprovaltodeviateformthisrequirem
8.06.1 Steeltrunkingshallcomplywithclause ent.
8.05.Unless otherwise indicated, the
protectionagainstcorrosionforgeneraluseinsidethebuildin 8.08.3 A minimum clearance of 150 mm shallbe
gsshallbeClass2;foruseoutsidebuildings,inplantrooms,flo allowed form any equipment, pipe work orductwork;
ortrenchesandotherlocationsasindicatedtheprotectionshou the distance shall be measured formthe external
ldbeClass 3. surface of any lagging.In the
eventofdifficultyinachievingthisrequirementtheEngin
8.06.2 Bonding links shall be provided at eachjoint eershallbeinformed.
and secured by screws, nuts and shakeproof
washers.The bonding links shall madecontact with 8.08.4 Trunkingshallbepositionedsothatadequatecle
the metal of the trunking or aranceisprovidedforaccesstothewiring.It is preferred
fitting,andcontinuityshallnotdependoncontactthrough that the covers shall be onthe top or sides of the
the screws, nor on removal on site trunking, but where this
ofpaintfinishfromferrous metal isimpracticablecoversmaybeonthebottom,subjecttoth
eapprovalof theEngineer.
8.06.3 Factorymadeconnectionsshallbeusedatjoints
.
8.09 SUPPORTSANDFIXINGS
8.07 UNDERFLOORDUCTINGAND 8.09.1 Whereconduitandtrunkingarenotfixed
FLOORTRUNKING directly to the building fabric they shall
8.07.1 Underfloorductingandfloor besuspendedinaccordancewithclause5.07.
trunkingshallcomplywithclause8.06.Protectionagains
tcorrosionshallbeClass3. TABLE8A CONDUITANDTRUNKING
FIXINGS
8.07.2 Service outlet boxes and junction 1FixingofConduit
boxesshallbeconstructedfromsheetsteelofthesamefini Location Typeoffixing
shastheducting,withtopframesadjustable for height at Floor SaddlesCramp
each corner; the screedsBuriedinplaste ets orsaddles
framesshallbecastaluminiumunlessotherwiseindicate rorrender
d.Segregation of the compartments AbovefalseceilingsSur Spacer
oftheductingshallbemaintainedthroughtheboxes. face barsaddlesDistances
addles
8.07.3 Eachserviceoutletboxshallhaveoutletunitsasi
ndicated.Segregationshallbeprovided between power 2.FixingofSaddles,ConduitBoxesandTrunking
outlets and Buildingfabric Typeoffixing
telephoneoutlets,withseparatelids,andeachsectionshal Structuralsteelwork Purpose madeclamps
l be fitted with a cable guard or grommet.The the type
complete assembly shall comply with tobeapprovedbytheEn
therequirementsoftheTelephoneCompany. Non - gineer
structuralsteelworkC Setscrewsandnuts
8.07.4 Lidsofserviceoutletsboxesandoffloortrunkin oncrete, brick
g shall be of cast aluminium unless otherwise orbuilding Fireplugs
indicated.The lids shall be arranged blocksHollowblocks andscrews
toaccommodatethefloorfinish,asindicated. andportfloors
Timber Butterfly
8.08 ROUTESANDSEGREGATIONS springtoggle bolts
8.08.1 Unlessthe routes ofconduit, trunkingand orgravity
ducting are indicated on the drawings boltsWoodsscrew
theyshallbedeterminedbytheContractorandapprovedb s
ytheEngineerbeforeworkisstarted.This requirement
shall apply where 8.09.2 A support shall e positioned within
theconduit,trunkingorductisconcealedwithinthe 300mmofeach bend and conduit
box.Conduitboxesshallbefixedtothefabricofthebuildin
g

22
 ElectricalStandardSpec’s

independently of the conduit; where the conduitboxes

have a minimum degree of protection 8.10.9 Conduit shall be cold bent on site with
ofIP44thefixingsshallnotreducethatprotection. asuitablebendingtool,withoutdeformingitscrosssectio
n.
8.09.3 Conduit and trunking shall be fixed
inaccordance with Table 8A.No shot firing shallbe 8.10.10 Draw-
used and no drilling or welding of inconduitboxesshallbeincorporatedatintervalsnotexce
structuralsteelwork shall be done without the edingthefollowing:
approval oftheEngineer. Straightrun 10m;
Runwithoneortwobends 10
8.09.4 Screws and nuts shall be cadmium m;Runwiththreebends 5m;
orzincelectroplated. Runwithfourbends 2.5m;

8.10 INSTALLATION 8.10.11 Unlessotherwiseindicated,conduitburiedinco

8.10.1 If the protective finish of any materialshas ncreteshallhaveatleast30mmdepthofcover;itshallbese
been damaged, those materials shall curelyfixedtoprevent movement during pouring and
eithernotbeusedoranyremedialworkshallbeapproved vibratingof the concrete.Conduit buried in plaster
by the Engineer before shallhaveatleast5mmdepthofcover
use.Conduitsshallbecleanandfreefromoil.
8.10.12 Whereconduits,trunkingorductingcrossexpa
8.10.2 Holesintrunkingshallbedrilled,punched or nsionandsettlementjointsinthebuildingstructuresuitabl
cut by ring - saw.Trunking shall eprovisionshallbemade to allow for movement of the
befreeformsharpedges andburrs. structure;
fortrunking,purposemadeexpansioncouplingsshall be
8.10.3 Connectionsbetweentrunkingandequipments used.The Contractor shall submit
hallbeby screwedcouplersandbushes, flanged hisproposalsfortheapprovaloftheEngineer.
coupling or specially fabricatedconnectors.Direct
attachment of steel 8.10.13 Whereconduitpassesthroughanexternal wall
trunkingtoequipmentwillbepermittedonlyifcableentri a conduit box shall be fitted on theinside of the wall
esareprovidedwithbushesorgrommetsorother lining and after wiring, filled with aninert,permanently
method approved by the Engineer.Cutting and plasticcompound having ahighinsulationvalue.
bending the material of trunking
toformflangesforconnectiontoequipmentwillnotbeper 8.10.14 Conduit, trunking and ducting shall
mitted. beinstalled in screeds only where indicated or
afterreceiptoftheEngineer’sapproval.Conduitboxesinf
8.10.4 At equipment not provided with loors,otherthanforagreedoutlets,willnotbepermitted.
screwedentries and at trunking, steel conduit should
beconnected by means of a coupler and a 8.10.15 Flushfloortrunkingandunderfloorducting
malebush.Spanners shall tighten bushes; pliers shall be straight and level and adjustedin height to
andtoothedwrenchesshallnotbeused. relate to the finished floor level, asindicated.

8.10.5 Where trunking connects to 8.10.16 Open ends of conduit and ducts shall
distributionboards,cableentriesshallbeadequateforcab betemporarilypluggedimmediatelytheyareinstalled to
lingfromallwaysincludingspares. prevent ingress of water and solidmaterial.Flush
floor trunking and the boxes ofunder floor ducting
8.10.6 Whereaterminalblockistobeaccommodatedi shall be fitted with temporarylids immediately they
nacircularconduitbox,anextensionringshallbefittedtot are installed, and that
hebox,ofsufficientdepthtoensureadequatespaceforthet shallbemaintainedaseffectiveprotectionagainstingress
erminalblockandcables. ofwaterandsolidmaterialsuntilthepermanentlidsarefitt
edafterscreedingiscomplete.
8.10.7 Thelengthofthreadontheendsofsteelconduits
hallmatchthatintheconduitfittings or equipment; 8.10.17 The method to be used for forming
exposed thread will not bepermitted.Running firebarriersatfire-resistantstructuralelementssuch as
couplings with back floors and walls shall be submitted
nutsmaybeusedwithconduithavingClass2protection, fortheEngineer’sapproval.Allpenetrationsthroughfi
but where the protection is Class reratedbarriersshallbefirestoppedusingaproprietar
4onlymanufacturedrunningjointswillbeaccepted.Exp ysystemeitherinternallyorexternally.
osed thread on running couplingsshallbegivenacoatof
zinc -richpaint.
8.10.8 Joints between PVC conduit and
fittingsshallbemadewithasuitableadhesive,butexpansi
oncouplers shallbeincluded.

23
ElectricalStandardSpec’s

8.12.5 Where three - phase circuits

8.10.18 Installedconduitsandductsshallbecleaned comprisingsingle - core cables are installed in
internally with a swab before cables aredrawn-in. trunking,
allcablesofacircuitshallbetiedtogetheratintervalsnotex
8.10.19 Iftheprotectivefinishofconduit,trunking or ceeding2000mm.
ducting is damaged after fixing,
thedamageshallbemadegoodinamannerapprovedbyth 8.12.6 Cablesforming part ofalarm,
eEngineer. control,communication or monitoring circuits shall
haveidentificationsleevesattheirterminations.Identific
8.11 PROTECTIVECONDUCTOR ationshallbeconsistentwiththerelevantwiringdiagrams
8.11.1 A protective conductor shall be .
drawnthroughnon-
metallicconduit,trunkingandductingandnon-
screwedmetallicconduit.

8.11.2 Inkitchens,roomscontainingafixedbathorsho
wer,orinotherparticularlocationsasindicated,whereste
elconduit,trunkingorducting is used, a separate
protective conductorshall be installed throughout,
connected to
anearthingterminalineachconduitbox.Eachsectionoftr
unkingshallbebondedtotheprovision of a separate
protective conductor thecontinuity of the conduit,
trunking and ductingshall be to the same standard as
though theywerethesoleprotectiveconductors.

8.11.3 Where live conductors terminate at, orloop

into, terminals adjacent to an appliance
oraccessorytheprotectiveconductorshallbesimilarlyter
minated.

8.11.4 A protective conductor shall be

installedwithin each length of flexible steel conduit
andconnectedtoanearthingterminalateachendofthefle
xibleconduit.

8.11.5 Whereasocketoutletorotheraccessoryismoun
tedonthelidofsteeltrunking, a separate protective
conductor to
anearthingshallconnectitsearthingterminalterminalinc
orporatedinthefixedpartofthetrunking.

8.12 WIRING
8.12.1 No wiring shall be carried out until
theappropriatetestsrequiredinclause21.06.2have been
done and the Engineer has given
hisclearanceforwiringtocommence.

8.12.2 A loop - in form of wiring shall be

usedasfaraspracticableorunlessotherwiseindicated.Joi
nts in conductors shall be madeusing insulated
terminal blocks complying
withtherequirementsofclause12.21.

8.12.3 At expansion joints adequate slack

shallbeleftinthecables.

8.12.4 Where others, a draw, install conduitsfor

wiring - wire shall be provided between eachdraw-
inposition.

24
 ElectricalStandardSpec’s

SECTIONNINE
9.04 INSTALLATION
9.04.1 Cablesforalarm,control,communication or
WiringSystems-Multi- monitoring systems shall
befixedbysaddlesofnylonorothersuitableplasticsmater
coreSheathedCables ial.

9.01.1CABLES 9.04.2 Cables buried in wall finishes shall

9.01.1 cablesshallcomplywithBS6004;forLV beprotected throughout the length that is buried
circuits in accordance with Table 5, for ELVcircuits byrigid PVC conduit.Normally the conduit shall
in accordance with Tables 4.Cablesshall have copper benon - circular but where appropriate the
conductors, unless tubularformtypeAmaybeused.
otherwiseindicated,andthesizeshallbeasindicated.
9.04.3 Cables passing through walls or
9.01.2 The colour identification of cores buriedinconcrete,includingfloorscreeds,shallbeprotec
shallcomplywithIEEWiringRegulationsforallcategori ted throughout the length that is buried
esofcircuitsand, forlive byrigidPVCconduit,tubularformtypeA.
conductors,theidentificationshallextendthroughoutthe
lengthofthecables.Theadditionalidentificationrequire 9.04.4 Unlessotherwiseindicated,conduitburied in
mentsofclause9.04.13shallalsobemet. concrete shall have at least 30 mmdepth of
cover.Conduit buried in plaster
shallhaveatleast5mmdepthofcover.
9.02 BOXES
9.02.1 Joint boxes shall comply with BS 4662or 9.04.5 Whereconduitscrossexpansionandsettlement
BS 5733 and where they are of insulatingmaterial the jointsinthebuildingstructuresuitable provisions shall
material shall have the be made to allow formovement of the structure. The
ignitabilitycharacteristic‘P’asspecifiedinBS4765.Wh Contractor
ereterminalsarenotintegral,insulatedterminal blocks shallsubmithisproposalsfortheapprovaloftheEngineer.
complying with the requirementsof
clause12.21shallbeused. 9.04.6 Conduits entering voids shall terminatenot
less than 25 mm clear of the building
9.02.2 Boxes for accessories shall comply fabric.Openendsofconduitshallbetemporarilypluggedi
withtherequirementsofclause12.01 mmediatelytheyareinstalled,topreventingressofwatera
ndsolidmaterial.

9.03 ROUTESANDSEGREGATION 9.04.7 Wherecablespassthroughjoiststhenumber

9.03.1 Unlesstheroutesofcablesareindicatedonthedr and size of holes shall allow for
awings,theyshallbedetermined by the Contractor and easywithdrawalandreplacementofcables.Thediameter
approved of holes shall not exceed 1/6th of thedepth of the
bytheEngineerbeforeworkisstarted.Cablesshallbecon joists; they shall be approximatelyon the centre line
cealedwithinthefabricofthebuildings or fixed to the and shall be not less than
surface of walls andceilingsas indicated. 75mmbetweencentres.Joistsshallnotbenotched.

9.03.2 Cables shall be parallel with the lines ofthe 9.04.8 The method to be used for forming
building construction and properly aligned.Cables firebarriersatfire-resistantstructuralelementssuch as
passing through joists shall be as nearlyas practicable floors and walls shall be submitted
at right angels to them and at adistance not greater fortheEngineer’sapproval.
than 450 mm from a loadbearing wall, beam or
similar support.Cablesburied in wall finishes shall 9.04.9 Where cables enter a metal enclosurethey
run vertically only,unless the Engineer gives shall be protected by grommets or
approval to deviatefromthis requirement. securedbycableclamps.

9.03.3 A minimum clearance of 150 mm shallbe 9.04.10 Cables shall be looped between outletpoints
allowed from any equipment, pipe work orductwork; and, as far as practicable,
the distance shall be measured fromthe external intermediatejointsshallnotbeused.
surface of any lagging.In the eventof difficulty in 9.04.11 Where joints are unavoidable they
achieving these requirements shallbeenclosedinboxes.Whereboxesareinstalled
theEngineershallbeinformed. below floors, traps shall be provided forpermanent
access.No joints shall be placed inconcretefloors.

25
ElectricalStandardSpec’s

9.04.12 Cables fixed to the surface, except inducts,

shall be protected up to a height of
1500mmbyhighimpactPVCchannel.

9.04.13 Cablesforming part ofalarm,

control,communication or monitoring circuits shall
haveidentificationsleevesattheirterminations.Identific
ationshallbeconsistentwiththerelevantwiringdiagrams
.

9.05 PREFABRICATED
WIRINGINSTALLATIONS
9.05.1 TherequirementsofthisSpecificationshallapp
lytoprefabricatedwiringinstallations.

26
 ElectricalStandardSpec’s

SECTIONTEN be the correct type and size.The tool shall beso designed
that the correct compression
mustbeappliedbeforeitcanbereleased.
Wiring System - Mineral -
10.02.9 Protectiveconductortailsshallbeconnectedtoe
InsulatedCables arthingterminalswithintheenclosure. On larger sizes
of cables, where
10.01 CABLES tailsarenotprovided,themetalsheathshallbeconnectedd
10.01.1 Cables shall comply with BS 6207.Thesize irectlytotheexternalearthingterminaloftheequipmentb
conductor and sheath material and yabondingconductorhavingacrosssectionalareainacco
voltageratingshallbeas indicated. rdance with Table 54H of the IEE
WiringRegulations.Metalsheathsofsingle-corecables
10.01.2 Copper sheathed cables shall have shall be bonded and earthed at one
anoutercovering,ofstandardcolour,unlessotherwisein pointonly,asindicated;insulatedglandsshallbeusedatth
dicated. eopen-circuitendorends.

10.02.10 Core identification shall

10.02 TERMINATIONS complywiththeIEEWiringRegulationsforallcategories
10.02.1 Terminationsshallbesupplied by thesame ofcircuits.Theadditionalidentificationrequirementsofc
manufacturer as for the cable to whichtheyconnect. lause10.06.9shallalsobemet.

10.02.2 Unlessotherwiseindicated,fordirectterminati 10.02.11 Voltage surge suppressors

on at luminaries other than those shallbeinstalledwhereindicated.
withfluorescentlamps,sealsshallhaveatemperaturerati
ngof185ºC,andelsewheretheyshall have a
temperature rating of 10.03 JOINTS
105ºC.Sealsoftheshrinktypemay 10.03.1 Jointsincablesshallbekepttoaminimum.Wher
beused.Uptothelargestsizeavailableformmanufacturer ejointsareunavoidabletheyshallbeaccessibleforinspect
s,protective conductor tails integral with the ion.
sealsshallbeprovided.
10.03.2 StraightThroughjointsshallbeenclosed
10.02.3 Atentriestoenclosures,type1ortype3glandssh within brass jointing sleeves and
allbeusedasappropriate.Wherecablesterminateatacces theconductorsshallbeconnectedbymeansofsolder
soryboxeslocatedflushinplasterfinish,cableclampsma ferrules except that for conductors up toand
ybeusedinsteadofglands;theclampsshallgripthecable including 4 mm² compression joints may
seal and shall be fixed to the accessorybox. beused.Sleevesshallbemadebythesamemanufacturera
sthecabletobejointed.
10.02.4 At equipment not provided with
screwedentries, glands shall be secured with a 10.03.3 Joints, other than straight through,
washerandlocknut. shallbeenclosedincircularoradaptableconduitboxes
and the conductors shall be connected
10.02.5 Where cables have an outer bymeansofinsulatedterminalblocks.Conduitboxesshal
covering,pressure sensitive plastic adhesive tape lcomplywithclause8.03andterminal blocks with
shall beappliedoverexposedcablesheathsandtheglands clause 12.21; terminationsshall comply with clause
and protected overall with a PVC shroud.The colour 10.02.Conduit boxesshall be fixed to the fabric of the
or shrouds shall be similar to thecablecovering. building or
tocabletray;wheretheconduitboxeshaveaminimumdeg
10.02.6 Attheterminationsofsingle- ree ofprotection ofIP44
corecables,glandplatesshallcomplywithclause fixingsshallnotreducethatprotection.
2.03.6.For three- phase circuits the
phaseconductorsshallbearranged,ifpossible,intrefoilform 10.03.4 Joints shall not be buried in the
ationwherethey passthroughtheenclosureoftheequipment. groundexcept where indicated.They shall
incorporateprovision to prevent ingress of
10.02.7 Each cable tail shall be long enough water.Conduitboxes shall be filled with an inert,
toconnecttotheterminalsof theequipment. permanentlyplastic compound having a high
insulation valueand shall be completely wrapped in
10.02.8 Compressionconnectorsandassociateddiesfo PVC self -adhesivetape.
rthecompressiontoolshall

27
ElectricalStandardSpec’s

10.04 ROUTESANDSEGREGATION 10.06.2 Toolsforthemanipulationandterminationofca

10.04.1 The routing and segregation of cablesshall blesshallbeofadesignapprovedbythecablemanufacture
comply with clauses 6.01 and 6.02, r.Corrugation of the metal sheath or damage toouter
exceptthatcoppersheathedcableswithoutoutercoverin coverings will not be accepted.A
gmaybestackedtwodeep. woodblockorwoodenfacedtoolshallbeusedtofinallydr
essthecableintoposition.
10.04.2 Cablesshallnotbeburiedinthebuildingfabrice
xceptwhereindicated. 10.06.3 Repairs to a cables sheath,
10.05 SUPPORTSANDFIXINGS regardlesstotheextentofthedamage,willnotbeaccepted
10.05.1 Cablesshallbeadequately ;straightthroughjointsonlyarepermitted.
supportedthroughout their length on cable tray, by
fixingdirectly to the fabric of the building or by 10.06.4 Terminationsandjointsshallbemadeinaccord
themeans indicated, except where they run ancewiththemanufacturer’sinstructions.Onlyclean,dr
throughcable ducts or are buried direct in the ground y,plasticfillingcompoundshallbeused.
orinthefabricofthebuilding. 10.06.5 Where cables are buried direct in theground
or in cable ducts the installation
10.05.2 Cablesshallbesupportedwithin300mmoftheir shallcomplywiththerelevantclausesofSection6
terminationsatequipment;thedistancemaybeincreased
tosuittherequirementsofclause13.11.4 10.06.6 Wherecableswithoutoutercoveringare
indicated they shall not be allowed to be
10.05.3 Cable tray and its suspension and fixingto incontactwithgalvanisedfinishes,concreteorothermate
the building fabric shall comply with Section 5of this rialthatwillcausecorrosion.
Specification.
10.06.7 Connectiontoappliancesandmotorsshallcom
10.05.4 SaddlesandclipsshallbePVC- plywithSection13.
coveredmetalorwhollyofplasticforcableshaving an
outer covering; for cables without anouter covering 10.06.8 Cablesguardsshallbeprovidedinaccordancew
bare copper saddles and clipsmay be used.Clips shall ithclause6.10.Wherecableswithoutouter covering are
not be used for cableshaving an overall diameter indicated they shallbe wrapped with PVC self -
exceeding 12 adhesive tape, halflapped, over the length to be
mm.Spacerbarsaddlesshallbeusedfordirectfixingtorou covered by theguards.
ghorunevensurfacesandalsowhereindicated.Multi-
waysaddlesmaybeuseduptofour-wayonly. 10.06.9 Markingofcablesshallcomplywithclause6.11
.Cablesformingpartofalarm,control,communicationor
10.05.5 The Spacing of saddles and clips monitoringcircuitsshallhaveidentificationsleevesatthe
shallcomplywiththeIEEWiringRegulations.Atbendsin irterminations,whichcombine the
the cable, saddles or clips shall requirementsoftheIEEWiringRegulationswithspecific
belocatedimmediatelyoneachside. circuitidentification.Identificationshallbeconsistentwi
ththerelevantwiringdiagrams.
10.05.6 Fixing of saddles to the building fabricshall
be by round - head screws, and to cabletray and non -
structural steelwork by round -head screws and
nuts.For general areas
insidebuildings,screwsandnutsshallbeofsteel,cadmiu
melectroplated;outsidebuildings,inplant rooms or
other locations as indicated,
theyshallbeofstainlesssteelorbrass.

10.05.7 Unlessotherwiseindicated,fixingstobuilding
fabric shall comply with Table 1-
0A.Noshotfiringshallbeusedandnodrillingorweldingo
fstructuralsteelworkshallbedonewithouttheapprovalof
theEngineer.

10.06 INSTALLATION
10.06.1 The installation of cables
shallcomplywithSection6asappropriate.

28
 ElectricalStandardSpec’s

SECTION ELEVEN pipeelectrodesandforallotherpurposesthetapeshallhavean

extrudedPVCsheath.
11.02.3 Main earthing bars shall comply with
Earthing BS1433andshallbebare.

11.01 EARTHELECTRODES 11.02.4 CablesshallcomplywithBS6004,Table1with

11.01.1 Thetypeandnumberofearthelectrodesshallbe outsheath,unlessotherwiseindicated.
asindicatedandshallcomplywithclauses11.01.2to11.0
1.5asappropriate.
11.03. JOINTSANDCONNECTIONS
11.01.2 Unless otherwise indicated, earth 11.03.1 Joints in conductors shall be kept to
rodsshallbe15mmnominaldiameterextensiblecopper - aminimum.
clad high - tensile steel rods
connectedtogether.Copper cladding shall be 11.03.2 All contact surfaces shall be
molecularlybondedtothesteelandshallbenotlessthan thoroughlycleanedandcoatedwithananti-
0.25 mm thick.Driving heads shall be of high -tensile corrosiveelectricaljointingcompoundsuitablefortheco
steel.Screwed joins shall connect rodsbyoneof nductor materials.For bi - metallic joints aseparate
thefollowingmethods: abrasive shall be used to clean eachmetal.

Threadsshallberoll-formedwithaminimum thickness of 11.03.3 Connections shall be made as

0.05 mm copperin the roots of the thread; couplers follows:Tomainearthingbarsbyphosphor-
shallbe of high strength silicon - aluminiumbronze alloy bronzesetscrewsandnuts;
and the threads shall becounter bored at the ends so that
thecouplers completelyenclosethethreadsontherods; toearthrodsby bronze,gunmetalorcopper clamps with
phosphor - bronzebolts;edgesofclampsshallberounded;
The ends of the rods shall be
internallythreaded;couplersshallcompriseacopperferrule toearthpipesbyphosphor-bronzebolts and nuts, direct to
withthephosphor- the flange of thepipe;
bronzecouplerscrew;acorrosioninhibiting paste shall be
applied to thethreadsonrodsandcouplers. toearthplatesbybolting,rivetingorwelding.

11.01.3 Pipe electrodes shall be of flanged 11.03.4 Terminationofcablesshallbebyconnectors

pipecomplying with BS 2035 or BS 4622, 150 jointed to the cable conductor by
mmbore and 3000 mm long.Pipe to BS 2035 theThermitweldingorbycompressionjointscomplying
shallbeshotblastedtoremoveallscaleandrust. withBS4579andclause3.03.3

11.01.4 Unless otherwise indicated, earth platesshall 11.03.5 Joints,whichareindicatedastestpoints, shall

be 600 mm x 600 mm minimum, of solid be bolted or clamped.Joints intape, other than at test
orlatticecoppernotlessthan3mmthick. points, shall be made bythetermitweldingprocessorby
riveting andsweating. Overlap of conductor shall be
11.01.5 Where the earth electrodes are formedwith not lessthan100mm.
tape, the tape shall be to BS1432, of
thesize,length,depthbelowgroundlevelandlayoutasind 11.03.6 Jointsandconnectionsshallbeprotected by a
icated. coating, which will form a sealand exclude moisture
in all weather conditions.At connections to earth
electrodes, the coatingshall cover all exposed
11.02 CONDUCTORS conductors and in
11.02.1 Earthing conductors, main earthing barsand thecaseofearthpipes,thetopsurfacetotheflanges.Protec
main equipotentbonding conductors shallbe of the tivecoatingsshallbeofawaterproof, inert, tenacious
type, size and conductor material asindicated, and material and of oneof thefollowingforms:
shall comply with clauses
11.02.2to11.902.4asappropriate. Solventcutbackthixotropiccorrosionpreventative forming
a film of resilientmattpetroleumwax;
11.02.2 TapesshallcomplywithBS1432.Where used
to interconnect copper
electrodesthetapemaybebare,butforinterconnecting

29
 ElectricalStandardSpec’s

afastdryingdurablerubberisedsprayedcoating;

aheat-shrinkclearsheathing.
11.06 INSTALLATION
11.03.7 Bolts,nuts,washersandrivetsforcoppercondu
ctorsshallbeofphosphor-bronze,navalbrassorcopper- 11.06.1 Electrodesshallbeinstalledinundisturbed
silicon;foraluminium conductors they shall be of ground.The distance between anytwo electrodes shall
stainlesssteel.Theminimumprovisionshallbe: be not less than 1.25 timesthedepthof
thelongerelectrode.
For flat strip - two M8 bolts or four 5 mmdiameterrivets;
11.06.2 Excavationsandbackfillingshallcomply with
For sheet metal - two M8 bolts; clause 6.04 as appropriate.Backfillimmediately
wherethesheetmetalislessthan2mmthickit shall be backed surrounding electrodes shall have alow specific
for an area of at least1000mm² resistivity and good water
retentionproperties;itshallbewellcompactedandwatere
d.
11.04. INSPECTIONPITS
11.04.1 Unless otherwise indicated, 11.06.3 Whereearthrodsaretobeinstalledthrough the
connectionbetween an earth conductor and its base slab of a building, electrodeseals shall be
associatedearthelectrodesystemshallbeinanenclosure. provided.As indicated, either therods shall be driven
and the seals fitted beforethe concrete is poured or
11.04.2 The enclosure shall have a the seals fitted
removabletopcoverwhichshallbeflushwithfinishedgro beforetheconcreteispouredorthesealshandedtothebuil
und level..The enclosure shall be a purposemade dingcontractorforhimtoincorporatethem in the slab
concrete inspection pit, a galvanised and the rods driven at a laterdate.Harmful ingress of
steelinspectionpitembeddedinconcrete,anearthenware water shall be avoidedwhendrivingtherods.
pipe or similar, as indicated.Theearth electrode
connection shall be just 11.06.4 Pipe electrodes shall be installed withthe
belowthelidoftheinspectionpitwithadequateaccessfort flange at the top, in 500 mm diameter boredholes.
estingpurposes.
11.06.5 Earth plates shall be installed verticallyin an
excavated hole, with the top of the plate ata
11.05 SUPPORTSANDFIXINGS minimum depth of 1000 mm below finishedground
11.05.1 Cables shall be supported and fixed level; where difficulty in achieving
inaccordancewithSection5 thisdepthismettheEngineershallbeinformed.

11.05.2 spacer bar saddles shall fix Tapes andbars, 11.06.6 Installation of conductors shall
which shall be of non-metallic material complywithSection6asappropriate.
orcorrosionresistantalloycompatiblewiththeconductor
s.Fixing of the saddles shall complywith Table
8A.The maximum spacing of
fixingsshallnotexceed600mmunlessotherwiseindicate
d.

11.05.3 Main-earthing bars shall be supportedon

insulators; they shall be not less than 25
mmclearofthebuildingfabric.

11.05.4 Forgeneralareasinsidebuildings,screwsandn
utsshallbeofcadmium-
electroplatedsteelorstainlesssteel;outsidebuildings, in
plant rooms or other locations
asindicatedtheyshouldbeof stainlesssteel.

11.05.5 Noshotfiringshallbeusedandnodrillingorwel
dingofstructuralsteelwork
shallbedonewithouttheapprovaloftheEngineer.

30
 ElectricalStandardSpec’s

SECTIONTWELVE andIP44whenusedoutsidebuildingsoratotherlocationswhe
reindicated.

Wiring Accessories, 12.01.9 Accessory boxes shall be fixed to

thefabricofthebuildingindependentlyoftheconnecting
SmallEquipmentand cableorconduit,asspecifiedforconduitboxesinTable8A
Materials .Wheretheaccessorieshaveaminimumdegreeofprotecti
on of IP44 the fixings shall not reducethatprotection.
12.01 ACCESSORIES-GENERAL
12.01.1 Unlessotherwiseindicated,accessoryboxes 12.02 SWITCHES
used with steel conduit and with 12.01Switchesshallbesinglepoleunlessotherwise
MICScablesshallbemetalandthoseusedwithmulticore indicated.Their current ratings shallbe as indicated,
d-sheathedcablesinstalledinaccordance with Section allowance being made for anyinductiveorcapacitiveload.
9 shall be of insulatingmaterial.
12.02.2 Wallmountedswitcheslocatedinsidebuilding
12.01.2 Whereaccessoryboxesareofinsulating sshallhaverockertypeactuatingmembersunlessotherwi
material the material shall have theignitability seindicated.Wheremounted adjacent to one another
characteristic ‘P’ as specified in BS476 they shall begroupedinamulti gang box with a
commonfrontplate.
12.0.3Accessory boxesshallbesuitableforflush or surface
mounting, as 12.02.3 Pullcordoperatedswitchesshallbefixed to
indicated.Unlessotherwiseindicated,metalboxesforgenera white moulded plastic mounting blocks,which in turn
luseinside buildings shall be of steel with shall be fixed to a circular conduitbox; where the
mediumcategory of protection against corrosion; for conduit boxes are flush with
usein plant rooms they shall be steel with thefinishthemountingblockshalloverlapthem.Pull
heavycategoryofprotection;andforuseoutsidebuildingsan cords shall be white or natural colour andthe lower
dinotherlocationsasindicatedtheyshallbecastironwithheav end shall terminate in a moulding
ycategoryofprotection. ofrubberorplasticsmaterial.

12.01.4 Accessory boxes shall be of adequatedepth 12.03 SPARKLESSSWITCHES

to accommodate the accessories withoutcausing 12.03.1 Sparklesswitchesshallbetiltingmercurytype.
compression of the
cable.Generallyboxesshallbe35mmdeep,butforlightin 12.04 DIMMERSWITCHES
gswitchesinstalledflushinplasterfinishwithmulti- 12.04.1 Dimmerswitchesforthecontroloftungsten
coredsheathedcablescomplyingwithSection 9, 16 mm filament lamps shall comply with BS5518.For other
depth boxes may be used. Allboxes shall have one dimmer switches the limits
fixing lug that is floating andthemethodsofmeasurementofradio-
sothatfinalleveloftheaccessorycanbeadjusted. frequencyinterferencegeneratedbytheelectronic
assembly shall be in accordance withTable 1 and
12.01.5 Earthing terminals shall be fixed insideeach clauses 7 and 8 respectively of BS800.
accessory boxand on the grids of gridswitches. A
separate protective conductor totheearthing terminal 12.05 SOCKET OUTLETS
ofthe boxshall connecttheearthingterminalof 12.05.1 Socket outlets shall be of the type
eachgrid. andratingasindicated.Pilotlampsshallbeprovidedwher
eindicated.
12.01.6 Front plates of accessories shall be
ofthematerialandfinishasindicated,butgenerallythefini 12.05.2 Socket outlets shall be switched
shofvarioustypesofaccessories in the same area shall whereindicated.On socket outlets rated at 13A
match.Forflushmountingtheplatesshalloverlapthebox andlocated inside buildingsthe switchesshall
es; surface mounting the plates shall besinglepoleandhaverockertypeactuatingmembersunl
matchtheprofileof thebox,withoutoverlap.. essotherwiseindicated.
12.06 SPARKLESSSOCKETOUTLETS
12.01.7 Wherepilotlampsarerequiredtheyshall 12.06.1 Sparklesssocketoutletsshallbeswitchedandha
comprise a neon lamp with resistor and vetheinterlockingpattern.Theyshallberatedat13Aunle
aredcolouredlens,unlessotherwiseindicated. ssotherwiseindicated.Switchesshallbetiltingmercuryt
ype.
12.01.8 Accessories with their boxes and
frontplatesshallprovideaminimumdegreeofprotection
ofIP41whenusedinsidebuildings

31
ElectricalStandardSpec’s

transformerenclosureandterminalsshallbeprovidedwithint
12.07 SOCKET OUTLETS FOR heenclosurefortwootheroutgoingcircuits.
WETLOCATIONS
12.07.1 Socketoutletsshallbeprovidedwithcovers, 12.13.4 Transformerssupplyingportabletoolsor other
which shall be screw - on.Any equipment shall comply with Section Dof BS 3535;
coverrequiredtoachievetotalenclosureandtoensure the outputs of 400VA at 110 volts and100 VA at
required degree to protection againstmoisture shall 50volts.Two socket outlets shall bemounted on the
be securely fixed to the socketoutlet. transformer enclosure, one
foreachvoltage;inaddition,terminalsshallbeprovidedw
12.08 PLUGS ithintheenclosurefortwootheroutgoingcircuitsforeach
12.08.1 Plugs rated at 13A shall be of a non - voltage.
resilientmaterialunlessotherwiseindicated.
12.13.5 Socketoutletsfor50-voltcircuitsshallbe rated
12.08.2 Fused plugs shall be fitted with fusesratedas at 5A and for 110-volt circuits they
indicated. shallberatedat16A.

12.09 SHAVERSOCKETOUTLETS 12.13.6 Aseparateterminalshallbeprovidedforeachou

12.09.1 Shaversocketoutletsshallbesinglevoltageunl tgoingconductor;bunchingofconductors in one
essotherwiseindicated. terminal will not be accepted.Conduit entries shall be
provided for input andoutputcables.
12.10 FUSEDCONNECTIONUNITS
12.10.1 Where indicated, fused connection 12.13.7 Transformers for bell or alarm circuitsshall
unitsshallbeswitchedandfittedwithpilotlamps.Switche comply with Section B or C of BS 3535,
s shall be double pole.Fuses shall beratedas asappropriate, and shall be suitably rated for
indicated. theconnectedload.

12.10.2 Whereindicated,frontplatesshallincorporatea 12.14 ROOMTHERMOSTATS

flexoutletwithaclampforanchoringtheflexiblecord. 12.14.1 Room thermostats shall comply with
BS3955.Switchesshallbesinglepole,singlethrow, and
12.11 COOKERCONTROLUNITS rated at 250 volts unless
12.11.1 Unlessotherwiseindicated,cookercontrol otherwiseindicated;theratedcurrentshallbeasindicated
units shall be rated at 45A and have a13A switched .
socket outlet with pilot lamps forbothfunctions.
12.14.2 Thermostatsshallbeadjustableandshall have
a visible indicator and a calibratedtemperature
12.12 TELEPHONECORD-OUTLETS
scale.Adjustment shall not requirea special tool and
12.12.1 Telephone cord - outlets shall be of
fixed covers shall be
astypeapprovedbytheTelephoneCompany.
providedtopreventtamperingbyunauthorisedpersons.
12.13 SAFETY
12.14.3 Noprovisionformanualoverridingofthe
ISOLATINGTRANSFORME
thermal switching shall be included,
RS
unlessotherwiseindicated.
12.13.1 Safetyisolatingtransformsshallbefixedtypean
dtheirenclosuresshallprovideaminimumdegreeofprote
12.14.4 Thermostatsshallbesuitableformountingdire
ctionofIP44.Thenominal rated input voltage shall be
ctontoacircularconduitbox.
240
voltsandtappingshallbeprovidedontheinputwindingfo
12.15 ELECTRICITY METERS
ralternativeinputvoltagesof230voltsand 250 volts.The
12.15.1 Electricity meters shall be of the
output windings shall
directconnection type complying with BS5685, class
becentretappedandthetappingconnectedtoearth.
2unless otherwise indicated.They shall be of
12.13.2 Cartridgefusesormcbsshallbeprovided to thecredittypewithdrumtyperegistersunlessotherwisein
protect the input winding and bothpolesof dicated.
eachoutgoingcircuit. 12.15.2 Maximum demand meters shall
complywithBS37andshallbeofthewholecurrenttypeun
lessotherwiseindicated.
12.13.3 Transformerssupplyingonlyhandlampsandbe
nchlampsshallcomplywithSection E of BS 3535; they
shall have an outputvoltage of 50 volts and a rated 12.15.3 Meter boards, where required, shall beof
output of 20mm thick wood chipboard complying
100VA.Onesocketoutletshallbemountedonthe withBS5669,type1

32
 ElectricalStandardSpec’s

12.16 TIMESWITCHES 12.20 INDICATORS

12.16.1 Unlessotherwiseindicated,timeswitches 12.20.1 Indicator units for alarm or call
shall be self - starting, self - winding,synchronous systemsshallincorporatethenumberofsignalsasindicat
motor type rated at 240 ed.
volts.Afuseshallprotectthemotor,whichshallbeeasilya
ccessible.Theratedcurrentoftheswitchshallbeas 12.20.2 Enclosures shall be of metal, wood orplastic
indicated. and finished as indicated.Glass
frontplatesshallbefinishedblack.
12.16.2 Time switches shall be of the plug - intype.
12.20.3 Inscriptionsshallbeasindicated.
12.16.3 Unlessotherwiseindicated,timeswitchesshall
incorporatethefollowing: 12.21 TERMINALBLOCKS
12.21.1 Terminalblocksshallcompriseconnectorscon
notlessthana30-hourspringreserve; tainedwithinamouldedhousing.

a 24 - hour dial with a single pole, singlethrow,switch; 12.21.2 Conductors shall be clamped betweenmetal
surfaces and no screws shall make directcontact with
aday-omittingdevice; conductors.The design shall besuchas to maintain
sufficient contact pressureto
anON-OFFmanual switchwhich ensureconnectionsofnegligible impedanceatalltimes.
doesnotdisturbthenormaldialsettings.
12.21.3 Metalincontactwith conductorsshallbe 85%
copper alloy and any screws shall be ofmetal that is
12.17 PHOTO - ELECTRIC electrolytically compatible with thecopper alloy.The
CONTROLUNITS moulded housing shall be ofan insulating material
12.17.1 Thesensingunitshallcompriseaphotoconducti suitable for the maximumoperatingtemperatureof
ve cell enclosed in a theconductors.
translucentplasticdomesealedtoamountingbase.
12.22 MOUNTINGHEIGHTS
12.17.2 The control unit shall comprise a 12.22.1 MountingheightsshallbeinaccordancewithTa
loadcontrolling single pole switch; its rated ble12Aunlessotherwiseindicated.
currentshallbeas indicated.
12.22.2 Where difficulty in locating
12.18 BELLSANDBUZZERS accessoriesorequipmentoccurstheEngineershallbeinfo
12.18.1 Bellsandbuzzersshallhavecontactlessmovem rmed.
entsandshallnotincorporateatransformer.

12.18.2 Bellgongsshallhaveaminimumdiameterof75
mmunlessotherwiseindicated.

12.18.3 Forbellsmountedoutsideabuilding,the
enclosure of the movement shall provide aminimum
degree of protection of IP54 and
shallhaveatappedentryforsteelconduit.

12.18.4 The base and cover of buzzers shall beof

plastics material.

12.18.5 Firealarmbellsshallcomplywithclause15.04

12.19 PUSHES
12.19.1 Pushes shall have a current rating of
1Aunless otherwise indicated and shall be
suitableforflushorsurfacemountingas indicated.

12.19.2 Boxesandfrontplatesshallcomplygenerallywi
thclause12.01.

33
 ElectricalStandardSpec’s

SECTIONTHIRTEEN 13.04.1 wherearoomthermostatcontrolsaheater, the

switch or fused connector shall bemounted in a deep
box incorporating a terminalblock to enable the
ConnectionstoAppliancesandMotors cables to the thermostat tobe connected.The terminal
block shall complywithclause12.21.
13.01 GENERAL
13.101.1 ThefollowingclausesandTable13A 13.04.2 The location of the fused connector
specify standard connection methods for forradiantheatersinbathroomsshallbeasindicated.
arangeofappliancesandmotorsandthesemethodsshallbeus
edunlessotherwiseindicated.For connections to
luminaires refer toSection14. 13.05 TOWELRAILS
13.05.1 Forwallmountedtowelrailstheconcealedwiri
13.01.2 Switches or fused connectors shall ngshallterminateinacircularconduit box located
belocated 150 mm from appliances except immediately adjacent to theconduit entry of the towel
whereotherwisestatedinthefollowingclausesorotherwi rail.A dome lid shallbe fitted o the conduit box and
seindicated. connected to theheater by steel conduit to protect the
connectingcables;thedomelidandconduitshallhaveclas
13.01.3 A protective conductor shall connect s4protection.
theearthing terminal of each appliance or motor
toanearthingterminalincorporatedintheadjacentswitch 13.05.2 For floor mounted towel rails the
or connectorbox. steelconduit shall rise form the floor and connect
tothe heater directly.The cables from the
switchorfusedconnectionunitshallbeconnecteddirectl
13.02 FLEXIBLECORDS ytotheterminalsonthetowelrail.
13.02.1 Flexiblecordsshallbeastable13Aunlessother
wiseindicated. 13.05.3 Thelocationoftheswitchorfusedconnectorsha
llbeas indicated.
Whereusedinanon-conductinglocation;
forconnectiontoclassIIorclassIIIequipment,unlessotherwi
seindicated. 13.06 COOKERS
13.06.1 Thefinalcircuitwiringshallconnectformtheco
13.02.3 Forconnectiontoappliances,whichmay require to okercontrolunittoacookerconnectionoutletlocatedim
be moved for maintenance orcleaning, the flexible cord, mediatelybehindthe appliance; the wiring shall be
shall be 1500 mmlong. concealed inthebuildingfabric.

13.03 WATERHEATERS 13.07 WASTE DISPOSAL

13.03.1 Thecablefromtheswitchorfusedconnectorsha UNITS(DOMESTIC)
llbeconnecteddirectlytotheterminalsontheheater. 13.07.1 Thefusedconnectionunitshallbelocatedadjac
enttothesink.Theflexoutletshall be under the sinkas
13.03.2 Thelocationoftheswitchorfusedconnectorsha near as possible tothewastedisposalunit.
llbeas indicated.

13.03.3 Forinstantaneouswaterheatersmounted in 13.08 SANITARYDISPOSALUNITS

bathrooms and kitchens, the 13.08.1 Conduit from the fused connection
conduitshallbeconcealedinthebuildingfabricandtermi unitshallbeconnecteddirectlytotheunitand,unlessother
nated at the heater in a circular conduit boxflush with wiseindicated,concealedinthebuildingfabric.
the wall finish.Where possible theconnection shall
enter through the back of theheater, but otherwise the
circular conduit 13.09 EXTRACTFAN
boxshallbelocatedimmediatelyadjacenttotheconduit
entry of the heater, fitted with a dome 13.09.1 Theconnectionstosmallsinglephasefansshall
lidandconnectedtotheheaterbysteelconduit. beasindicatedinTables13A
.
13.04 ROOM 13.09.2 Connectionstolargerfansshallbeasindicated.
HEATERS13.04

34
ElectricalStandardSpec’s

13.10 OTHERAPPLIANCES
13.10.1 Forappliancesnotcoveredintheforegoing,con
nectionsshallbeasindicated.

13.11 PLANT,MACHINERYANDMOTORS
13.11.1 Connectionsshallallowforvibrationandfor
belt drivers, adjustment of the motor on itssliderails.

13.11.2 Termination of armoured cables shall

besuitable for the mechanical stresses imposed,and
the length of cable between the terminationand the
first cable support shall allow
sufficientflexibilityofthecable.

13.11.3 Terminationofconduitshallbebyflexiblesteel
conduitorpliableconduitasappropriate.The flexible or
pliable conduit shallbenotmorethan1mlong.

13.11.4 Terminationofmineral-insulatedcables shall

include a 360º loop not less than150 mm diameter
immediately adjacent to thecable entry to the plant,
machinery or
motor.Aclearspaceofnotlessthan10mmshallbeallowed
atthepointwherethecablepassesitself.

35
 ElectricalStandardSpec’s

SECTIONFOURTEEN 14.01.9 Translucentcoversandreflectivesurfaces

shall be clean at the completion of theWorks.

LuminairesandLamps 14.02 STREET LIGHTINGCOLUMNS

14.02.1 Streetlightingcolumnsshallbeconstructed
14.01 LUMINAIRES and installed in accordance with
14.01.1 Luminaires shall comply with BS 4533and BS5649andshallbeofthetypeasindicated.Columnsseti
with clauses 14.01.2 to 14.01.8 inclusive.Emergency ngroundshallbefittedwithabaseplateunlessotherwisein
lighting luminaires shall comply alsowith Industry dicated.
Standard ICEL: 1001 and shall
bemarkedwithICELcertificationlabel. 14.02.2 Each column shall be fitted with a
fuseunitprovidingterminationsadequateforthecabling
14.01.2 Self- to be looped in and out and shall befitted with fuses
containedemergencylightingluminairesshallincorpora to BS 88, rated as
teonlyfluorescentlamps.Andshallbefittedwithameans indicated.Controlequipmentshallbeincorporatedasind
oftesting which shall comprise a push - button icated.
orsimilardevicethatcannotbeleftinthetestposition.
They shall be provided with a 14.03 LAMPS
meansofisolatingthelampcircuitformaintenancepurpo 14.03.1 Lamps shall be of the type and rating
ses. asindicated.

14.01.3 Unlessotherwiseindicated,fixedluminaires 14.03.2 theContractorshallinstallalllamps.

shall be Class I and hand lamps shallbeClass
IIIratedat50volts 14.03.3 Lampcapsshallbesuitableforthelampholdersl
istedinTable14A.
14.01.4 Unlessotherwiseindicated,enclosuretolumin
aires shall provide a minimum degree ofprotection of 14.04 LAMPHOLDERS
IP20 when located within buildingsand IP23 when 14.04.1 LampholdersshallcomplywithTable14A.Oth
located outside buildings, butluminaires mounted ertypesshallbeusedonlywhereindicated.
externally and less than 2mabove finished ground or
paved level shall beIP44. 14.04.2 Bayonetlampholdersinenclosedluminairessh
allhavethetemperatureratingT2.
14.01.5 Unless otherwise indicated,
luminaires,bothwithandwithoutbuilt- 14.04.3 Lampholders for use with flexible
inballastsortransformers,shallbesuitablefordirectmou cordsshallbeofthecord-griptype.
ntingonnormallyflammablesurfaces.Emergency
lighting luminaires need not complywiththis 14.04.4 Lampholdersnotinaluminaireshallhaveashad
requirement. ecarrierring.

14.01.6 Where specific requirements related 14.04.5 Lampholdersshallbeswitchedonlywhereindi

toflamepropagationandflammabilityoftranslucent cated.
covers are indicated, certificates oftests carried out
on samples ofthe materialsshall be submitted to the TABLE14ALAMPHOLDERS
Engineer. The testsshallcomplywithBS2782.
LampT Ratingwatts Lampholders
14.01.7 Terminalblocksforconnectionofthesupply ype
cables shall be adequate for the size ofconductors Fluorescent all Bi-pin
forming the loop - in wiring specifiedin clauses
8.12.2 and 9.04.10, unless separatetails are required Tungstenfil upto150 Bayonet
as in clause ament 200 B22dEdison
14.08.Whereindicated,terminalblocksshallincorporat 300&above screw
eafuseof suitabletypeandrating. E27
EdisonscrewE40
14.01.8 Ballasts for tubular
fluorescentlamps shall comply with BSEN 60920:
1991 andBSEN 60921: 1991.Power factor 14.05 CEILINGROSE
correctionshallbeprovidedandthisshallbenotlessthan 14.05.1 Ceilingrosesshallbeofinsulatingmaterial
0.85laggingunlessotherwiseindicated. having the ignitability characteristic ‘P’as specified
in BS 476.Extension flanges shallbefitted
toallsurfacemountedceilingroses

36
 ElectricalStandardSpec’s

where the wiring installation is concealed in 14.07.4 Supportofluminairesfromcabletrunkingshall

thebuildingfabric. bebymeansofproprietaryclampsorbrackets.

14.05.2 Whereplug-inconnectionsareindicated 2A, 14.07.5 Whereluminairesaresupportedfromthe

three pin socket outlets and plugsshall be provided structure other than by the conduit
suitable for mounting onto acircular conduit systemthesupportsshallcomplywithclause5.07.Where
box.Where indicated, the plugshall be retained in the luminairesarefixeddirecttothestructure the fixings
socket by means of alockingring. shall be as specified in item2ofTable8A.

14.07.6 Luminaires mounted on or recessed

14.05.2PENDANTSANDCHAINSUSP intosuspendedceilingsshallbesupportedasindicated.
ENSIONS
14.07.7 Forwallmountedluminairesthemountingheig
14.06.1 Luminairesshallbesuspendedataheight of htshallbe1900mmabovefinishedfloorlevel, measured
2050 mm above finished floor level,measured to the to the centre
lowest part of the oftheconduitbox,unlessotherwiseindicated.
luminaire,unlessotherwiseindicated.

14.06.2 A plain pendant shall comprise a 14.08 WIRINGCONNECTIONS

ceilingrose,flexiblecordandlampholder.Unlessotherw 14.08.1 Whereluminaires,otherthanthosecovered by
iseindicated,theflexiblecordshallbe clause 14.08.2, are fixed direct
0.75 mm², the insulation shall be 85º C tocircularconduitboxesoraresupportedbypendants or
rubberwithaHOFRsheathor85ºCheatresistingPVC chains, the final circuit wiring
- insulatedandthesheathshallbewhite.Wherethelamp shallterminateataterminalblockintheconduitbox.
holderhasmetalexteriortheflexible cord shall include
a protective 14.08.2 Whereluminaireshavingfluorescenttubes are
conductorconnectedtotheearthingterminalofthelamph fixed direct to circular conduit boxes,the final circuit
olderandof theceilingrose. wiring may be terminated withinthe luminaire unless
otherwise indicated.Thewiring shall enter each
14.06.3 Atubependantshallcompriseaballandsocketc luminaire at the conduitentry nearest to the terminal
overto fit a circularconduit box,and steel conduit not block and, where aloop - in wiring system is used,
less than 20 mm diameter.At conduit entry to the leave by
luminaire a backnut shallbe used. Complete pendant thesameentry;wiringshallnotpassthroughaluminaire
assemblies unless the approval of the Engineer isgiven.
shallbeprotectedagainstcorrosioninaccordancewithcla
use8.03.2,exceptwherespecificfinishesareindicated. 14.08.3 Whereluminairesaremountedonorrecessed
into a suspended ceiling, connectionshall be by
14.06.4 Achainsuspensionshallcompriseahook cover flexible cord from a plug - in ceilingrose which shall
fixed to a circular conduit box and achain having a be located not more than 500mm form the access in
load carrying capacity not the ceiling and shall befirmlysupported.
lessthantwicetheweightoftheluminaire.
14.08.4 Cablesandflexiblecordsforfinalconnections
to luminaires shall be suitable
14.07 SUPPORTSANDFIXINGS fortheoperatingtemperatureoftheluminaire.Flexible
14.07.1 Where fluorescent luminaires 1200 mmor cords for chain suspensions shall havea white sheath
more in length are supported directly by theconduit unless otherwise indicated;
system they shall be fixed to two forplainpendantstheyshallcomply withclause14.06.2.
circularconduitboxesbothofwhichshallformanintegral
partof theconduitsystem. 14.08.5 The size of final connection cables
orflexiblecords shallbeasindicated.
14.07.2 Wheretheweightofaluminaireissupported by
a conduit box or cable trunking 14.08.6 WhereMICScableisusedtherequirementsof
thefixingoftheconduitboxor trunking shall clause10.02.2shallbemet.
beadequateforthepurpose.
14.08.7 Cablesandcordspassingclosetoballast
14.07.3 Luminaries fitted with tungsten withinaluminaireshallbesuitablefortheoperatingtempe
filamentlamps and having metal backplates shall not ratureof theballast.
befixeddirectlytoaconduitboxinwhichathermoplastic
materialistheprincipalload-bearingmember.

37
ElectricalStandardSpec’s

14.08.8 Terminalblocks,otherthanthoseforming part

of the luminaires, shall comply withclause 12.21 and
requirement of clause 8.10.6shallbemet.

14.08.9 A protective conductor shall connect

theearthingterminalorearthingcontactofeachluminaire
to an earthing terminal incorporated
intheadjacentconduitbox.Wherethefinalconnectionisb
yflexiblecordtheprotectiveconductors shallformpartof
thecord.

38
 ElectricalStandardSpec’s

SECTIONFIFTEEN 15.02.5 Acorrectlyorientatedplanofthepremisesshow

ingthelocationsoffirezonesandthevariousentrances,an
doperatinginstructions for the correct action in the
FireDetectionandAlarms event
ofafireorfaultindication,shallbepositionedadjacenttoe
15.01 GENERAL achcontrolandindicatingequipment.Theyshallbeinadu
15.01.1 Firedetectionandalarmequipmentshallcompl rableform.
ywithBS5445andBS5839.
15.02.6 A logbook shall be provided to
15 01.2 The requirements related to zoning ofdetectors enablerecords to be kept of inspections and test of
and call points, circuiting and groupingof fire alarm thesystemandofincidents,togetherwiththeircauseandt
devices, circuit arrangements heactiontaken.
(openorclosed),circuitmonitoring,two-stagealarms,
repeater indicator panels, operation ofancillary services 15.02.7 Thelayoutofcontrolandindicatingequipment
and connections to a and of the plan of the premises
centralfirealarmstationshallbeasindicated.] shallbeapprovedbytheEngineerbeforemanufacturepro
ceeds.
15.01.3 Each system shall operate at 24
voltsd.c.,unlessotherwiseindicated.
15.03 STANDBYPOWERSUPPLIES
15.01.4 Allcomponentsinasystemshallbecompatible 15.03.1 Thestandbypowersupplyshallcompriseaseco
witheachother. ndarybatterywithautomaticcharger.Batteries shall be
lead acid or nickelcadmium with sealed cells as
15.01.5 Systems involving detectors shall be indicated.Thestandbypowersupplyshallhavedurationa
sodesigned that removal of one detector sindicated.
indicatesafaultbutdoesnotrenderotherdetectorsinoper
ative.Provision shall be included so 15.03.2 Suitable links shall be included that
thattestingofindividualdetectorscanbemadewithout thebatterymaybedisconnectedwithoutinterruptingthe
sounding an alarm nor necessitating thecomplete supply form the charger to the fire
system to be disabled to prevent analarm. detectionandalarmsystem.

15.01.6 MountingheightsshallbeinaccordancewithTa 15.03.3 The battery charger shall be fitted with

ble 12A, but indicating equipment amilliammetertoindicatetherateof charge.
andfiredetectorsshallbeattheheightindicated.
15.03.4 Thebatteryandchargershallbecontainedinave
ntilatedmetalenclosure.
15.02 CONTROLSANDINDICATION
15.02.1 Thefirealarmcontrolandindicatingequipment
shall incorporate a switch to enablethe audible alarm 15.04 SOUNDERS
to be silenced.The 15.04.1 Fire alarm bells shall have the
switchshallbekeyoperatedunlessotherwiseindicated. operatingmechanismcontainedwithinthedome;thedo
meshallbe200mmdiameterunlessotherwise
15.02.2 Zonealarmindicatorsshalleachcomprise two indicated.They shall be suitable
lamps connected in parallel forfixingdirecttocircularconduitboxes.
andarrangedsothatthefailureofeitherofthelamps is
apparent during the course of a routinetest. 15.04.2 Othertypesofsoundersshallbeasindicated.

15.02.3 WhereMICScablesareusedthecontrol and

indication equipment shall be 15.05 MANUALCALLPOINTS
fittedwithsurgesuppressors asnecessary. 15.05.1 Manualcallpointsshallbeofthefrangible
cover type, with a protective cover ofplastic.
15.02.4 Thecontrolandindicatingequipmentshall be
contained in an enclosure suitable
forsurfaceorflushmountingasindicatedandcomplying
withclause2.03.
Themanufacturer’sstandardfinishshallbeprovidedunlessot
herwiseindicated.

39
ElectricalStandardSpec’s

15.06 FIRE/SMOKEDETECTORS
15.06.1 Fire detectors shall be of the type
asindicated.They shall be of the detachable
type,unless otherwise indicated, so that removal
fromthe base raises a fault, but does not disable
thesystem,oranypartof thesystem

15.06.2 Allfiredetectorsshallincludevisualindication
ofoperation;wheredetectorsarelocated out of normal
view the indicator shall bemounted separately in the
location as
indicated.ThevisualindicationshallbeanLED.

15.06.3 Fire detectors shall be suitable for

fixingdirecttocircularboxes.

15.06.4 All fire alarmsystems shall be

eitherconventionaladdressable,oranalogueaddressabl
e

15.06.5 Generally “Ionisation” type

detectorsshallbeusedforsmokedetection.“Optical”det
ectorsshallbeusedwhereindicated.Insituations where
there is likely to be a degree
ofsmoke,orothercontaminantinnormaloperationeither
“Heat”,or“RateofRise”detectorsshall be used. The
Contractor shallliase with the manufacturer and
ensure that
thecorrectheadshasbeeninstalledforallapplications.

15.07 WIRING

15.07.1 The wiring installation shall comply withthe

relevant sections of this
specification.Thetypeandsizeofcablesshallbeasindicat
ed.

15.07.2 Cablesshallbeloopedbetweenequipment,andj
unctionboxeskepttoaminimum as far as practicable.
A label
inscribed‘FIREALARMJUNCTIONBOX’shallidenti
fyjunction boxes.Labels shall be in
accordancewithclause2.15.

15.08 FUTUREEXTENSIONS
15.08.1 Where future extensions are
indicatedthecontrolandindicatorequipmentandthestan
dbypowersupplyshallhaveadequatecapacity for their
operation; zone identificationsshall be left blank
unless otherwise
indicated.Theplanofthepremisesshallnotshow
thefutureextensions.

40
 ElectricalStandardSpec’s

SECTION SIXTEEN 16.03.3 Instrumentsshall provide indication

ofbattery voltage, trickle charge and boost
chargecurrents: Indication shall be provided of
EmergencyLighting batterycharger functioning and battery charger
failure.Other instruments and alarms and provision
16.01 GENERAL forremote display of alarms shall be provided
16.01.1 Emergency lighting systems shall be ofthe asindicated.
category (maintained or non -
maintained),durationandnominaloperatingvoltages,p 16.03.4 Simulation of mains failure shall be
owered by generator or secondary batteries orhave bymeans of a tamper - proof switch operated by
self - contained luminaires, as indicated.System aremovablekey.
design shall comply with BS5266 Part11988.
16.03.5 Self-contained units shall have
16.01.2 Emergencylightingequipmentshallcomply anindicatingLEDthatlightswhentheunitisenergised
with Industry Standard ICE: 1001 and, and charging the batteries. The LEDshall be easily
inaddition,luminairesshallcomply withSection14. visible to a person standing atfloorlevel.

16.01.3 Centrally powered systems shall 16.04 WIRING

complywithclauses16.02,16.03and16.04. 16.04.1 The wiring installation shall comply withthe
relevant sections of this
specification.Thetypeandsizeofcablesshallbeasindicat
16.02 BATTERIES ed.
16.02.1 Batteriesshallbeleadacidornickelcadmiumwi
thsealedoropencellsasindicated. 16.04.2 Wiring shall not be drawn into the
sameconduit,trunkingcompartmentofductingcompart
16.02.2 Batteriesshallbecontainedinanenclosureorra mentascablesofothercategory3circuits.Thecoresofem
ckmountedasindicated.Enclosuresshallcomplywithcla ergencylightingcircuits shall not be contained within
use2.03.Wherebatteriesarenotinanenclosure,insulatin the samemulticore cable, flexible cable or flexible
g covers shall be provided over all cellterminals and cord ascores ofanyothercircuits.
inter - connections. All leads shallbeinsulated.

16.02.3 Batteriesshallbemaintainedingoodcondition
on site with all necessary precautionsbeing taken to
prevent deterioration; they shallbe handed over, at
the completion of the Works,fullycharged.

16.02.4 With each group of batteries a syringetype

hydrometer, a container of distilled
waterandaplasticjugshallbeprovided.

16.03 CONTROLEQUIPMENT
16.03.1 Allthecontrolequipmentincludingmains
failure relays, contactors, battery
charger,inverter(whererequired),protectionfuses,cont
rolswitches,instrumentsandindicatorsshall be
contained in enclosures complying withclauses2.03

16.03.2 Batterychargersshallbecapableofrecharging
the batteries after they have
beendischargedforthespecifieddurationofthesystem
so that within 8 hours, or other periodwhere
indicated, the batteries can again supportthe load for
the specified duration period:
Thisrequirementshallbeachievedwithoutexceedingthe
maximumdesignchargingcharacteristicsofthebatteries
.

41
 ElectricalStandardSpec’s

SECTION SEVENTEEN 17.04 TERMINATIONS

17.04.1 CableterminationtotheleadsfromTISE
transformers shall be by straight
AviationGroundLighting throughjointscomplyingwithSections3or9asappropria
te.
17.01 GENERAL 17.04.2 TerminationtometalcasedTIStransformerssh
17.01.1 Thissectionappliesonlytotheinstallation of allbebynon-
AGL luminaires and their powersuppliers.AGL compressibleglandsofatypeasindicated.Compressiong
control cable installations rommetsshallnotbeusedonplasticcableinsulationwher
shallcomplywiththerelevantsectionsofthisSpecificatio eplasticflowmayoccur.
n.
17.04.3 Secondary
leadsfromtransformerstoluminairesshallbebyplugand
17.02 CABLES socketorstraightthroughjointsasindicated.
17.02.1 The type and size of cables shall be
asindicated.Clauses 17.02.2 to 17.02.4
inclusivespecifythose,whichwillbemostcommonlyuse 17.05 ISOLATINGTRANSFORMERS
d. 17.05.1 Isolatingtransformersshallbeofthetypeas
indicated.
17.02.2 Single core, 2000-volt grade
polytheneinsulatedandPVCsheathedcableswithorwith 17.05.2 TheprimarytappingoftypeTIPisolating
out aluminium sheath as transformers shall be adjusted to suitthe calculated
indicated.TheyshallbeinstalledinaccordancewithSecti voltage at the transformers withnominal voltage at
on6. the supply point of the circuit.Secondary tapping
shall be adjusted to suit theratedvoltageof thelamps.
17.02.3 PVC-insulatedarmouredandsheathedcables
shall comply with BS 6346. They 17.05.3 Immediately after connection of
shallbeinstalledinaccordancewithSections3and6. cablestheterminalscompartmentsofnon-encapsulated
transformers shall be filled with oilresistant, inert,
17.02.4 PVC-insulatedmulticore-sheathedcables permanently plastic
shall comply with BS 6004. They compoundhavingahighinsulationvalueandofatypeapp
shallbeinstalledinaccordancewithSection9. rovedbythetransformermanufacturer.

17.02.5 Wherecablesterminateatisolatingtransformer 17.05.4 Isolating transformers that are buried inthe

sslackcablesshallbeleftasfollows: ground shall have a minimum cover of 400mm.
attransformersburiedintheground-1250mm
attransformersinstalledinpits,orrecessed
beneathseatingrings- 17.06 INSTALLATIONOFLUMINAIRES
enoughto allow the 17.06.1 Connectionofblistertypeluminairesshallbeas
straightthroughjointson clause17.04.3unlessotherwiseindicated.Some types
he primary of blister luminaires
leadstoclearthepitor recess plus aresuppliedwithaninternalplugandsocket;insuch cases
300mm. the luminaires shall be connecteddirectly to the
isolating transformers without
anexternalplugandsocket.
17.03 JOINTS
17.03.1 Innewinstallationsstraightthroughjointsonpri 17.06.2 Elevatedluminairesshallbedirectlyconnected
marycablesbetweenisolatingtransformers totheirisolatingtransformersbymeansofflexiblecables
shallnotbeused. unlessotherwiseindicated.

17.03.2 Whereextensionsormodificationstoexisting 17.06.3 Luminaires shall be positioned so

installations are made, straight throughjoints shall be thattheaxesofthelightbeamsarealignedasindicated.Ali
kept to a minimum. Any gnment shall be done by means ofsighting devices,
changeincabletypeshallbemadeatanisolatingtransfor within the limits as
mer. indicated.Forblisterluminaireselevationandazimuthali
gnment is dependant on accurate
17.03.3 The type of joints shall be as installationoftheseatingunits;theEngineershallbeinfor
indicatedandshallcomplywithSections3or9asappropri mer where inaccurate installation
ate. preventsalignmenttotherequiredlimited.

42
 ElectricalStandardSpec’s

17.07.2 Cables shall be clipped to the poles

atintervalsinaccordancewiththeIEEWiringRegulation
s.Cable guards shall comply withclause6.10.

17.07.3 Where supports other than wood polesare

indicated, the method of fixing the cablesand guards
shall be as indicated and no drillingof the support
shall be carried out unless
theapprovaloftheEngineerhasbeenobtained.

17.08 EARTHING
17.08.1 Forinstallationsusingisolatingtransformers,
protective conductors of insulatedcopper with a cross
sectional area of6 mm²shall be laid with the main
supply cables. Theyshall be connected to the earth
terminal of eachisolating transformer and to the earth
bar at the‘B’centre.

17.08.2 Luminairesconnectedtoisolatingtransformer
s shall be bonded to the
protectiveconductoronlywhere:

theyarenotreadilyaccessibletoamanworkingformthegroun
d:
or
they are within 2 m of earthed exposedconductive parts
or earthed luminaires,(e.g.aStrobeaconinstallation).

17.08.3 Forinstallationsusingparallelconnectionswit
houtisolatingtransformers,allexposed conductive
parts of equipment shall
bebondedtotheprotectiveconductorofthecircuit.

43
 ElectricalStandardSpec’s

SECTIONEIGHTEEN

Potentially
ExplosiveAtmospheres
18.01 STANDARDSANDCODESOFP
RACTICE
18.01.1 Equipment and installation in
potentiallyexplosive atmospheres shall comply with
othersectionsofthisspecificationasapplicable.

18.01.2 Equipment shall comply with BS

1259,BS4683,BS4999,BS5000andBS5501 andother
standards as indicated.Equipment
shallbecertifiedbyBASEEFAor,withtheapprovalofthe
Engineer, by an equivalent testing authority.Copies
of certificates shall be submitted to theEngineer.

18.01.3 Installations hall comply with BS

5345andwithothercodesandstandardsasindicated.

18.01.4 Thezonalclassification,temperatureclassifica
tion,apparatusgroupandtypeofprotectionshallbeasindi
cated.

18.02 MINISTRYOFDEFENCEMILITARY
EXPLOSIVESAREAS.
18.02.1 Equipmentandinstallations,includinglightnin
g protection, in MOD military
explosivesareasshallcomplywithspecificregulations*i
ssuedbytheMODorarmedservices.

44
 ElectricalStandardSpec’s

SECTIONNINETEEN testing as described in clause 21.08.1

unlessotherwiseindicated.

LightningProtectionofBuildings 19.02.6 Connectionsfromdownconductorsformedbyr

einforcingsteelorhebuildingcontractor will make
19.01 AIRTERMINATIONS concrete clad steel frames.They will comprise
19.01.1 The entire installation shall comply stainless steel tape, not lessthan 20 mm x 3 mm,
withtherequirements of BS6651 welded onto the steelwork.The Contractor shall
allow for a length of tail
19.01.2 The type and location of air tobeleftforsubsequentconnection.
terminationsshallbeasindicated.Where indicated,
metalframedormetalcladroofsormetal copings,which 19.03 JOINTS
form part of all of an air termination, 19.03.1 Joints in conductors shall be kept to
shallbebondedacrossjointsbetweenconstituentparts.T aminimum.
he bonding may be carried out by thespecialist
roofing contractor but where this is notthe case the 19.03.2 All contact surfaces shall be
bonds shall be made as indicated;no drilling thoroughlycleanedandcoatedwithananti-
ofroofing orcoping shall be corrosiveelectricaljointingcompoundsuitablefortheco
donewithouttheapprovalof theEngineer. nductormaterial.For bi- metallic joints aseparate
abrasive shall be used to clean eachmetal.
19.01.3 Metalworkofstructures,chimneys,pipes,
cowling, plant, walkways, handrails 19.03.3 Joints between conductors of the samemetal
andsimilarcomponentsofthebuildingthatareexposed at other than at test points shall be made bythe thermit
or above roof level shall be welding process or by riveting andsweating.Overlap
bondedtothenearestairtermination. of conductors shall be notlessthan100mm.

19.01.4 Where a signal aerial is mounted on 19.03.4 Where an aluminium conductor is

thestructureitshallbeprotectedasindicated. joinedtoacopperconductor,oneofthefollowingmethod
sshallbeused:
a bi - metal connector formed by
19.02 DOWNCONDUCTORS
frictionweldinghighpuritycopperandaluminium;
19.02.1 Thetypeandlocationofdownconductors shall
thecopperconductorshallbecompletely sheathed for at
be as indicated.No
least
aluminiumconductorshallbeburiedintheground.
1000mmofitslengthwithmetalstripelectrolyticallycompati
blewithcopperand aluminium, and then clamped to
19.02.2 Conductors connecting between a testclamp
thealuminiumconductor.
on the outside of a building and an earthelectrode,
Bi - metal joints shall not be made at test
and conductors interconnecting pipeelectrodes,shall
pointsorbetweenthetestpointandearthelectrode.
be sheathed; but conductorsinterconnecting copper
electrodes may be
19.03.5 A test clamp shall be provided in eachdown
leftbare.Conductorsinotherlocationsshall besheathed
conductor; it shall be located 1 m aboveground level
where indicated.Sheaths shall be ofPVC, extruded,
unless otherwise
shrunk - on or similarly
indicated.Testclampsshallbeofcastgunmetal.
applied;thecolourshallbeasindicated.
19.03.7 Screwsandrivetsshallbeofthefollowingmater
19.02.3 Where the profile of the building
ials:
wouldcause an overhang or re - entrant loop to
For copper conductors,
beformed in a down conductor the Engineer
phosphorbronze,naval brassor high -
shallbeinformed.
tensilemanganese
brass;
19.02.4 Metalwork,includingpipework,ductworkand
for aluminium conductors, stainless
cablesadjacenttodownconductorsshallbe bonded to
steel.
them unless the distance betweenthem provides
adequate isolation.The distancenecessary to provide
19.03.8 Jointsshallbeprotectedasspecifiedinclause11
adequate isolation shall beasindicated.
.03.6
19.02.5 Where the reinforcement of a
19.04 EARTHELECTRODES
concretestructure forms the down conductors,
19.04.1 Earthelectrodesshallcomplywithclause11.01
welding ofthe
andshallbeinstalledinaccordancewithClause11.06.
Thebuildingcontractorwillcarryoutreinforcement,butthec
ontractorshallcarryout

45
 ElectricalStandardSpec’s

19.04.2 Inspectionpitsshallbeprovided,inaccordance
withclause11.04.

19.05 FIXINGS
19.05.1 FixingsshallbeinaccordancewithTable 19A,
but the Engineer’s approval of thetype of clips,
saddles and holdfasts to be usedshall be obtained
before work is
started.Themaximumspacingoffixingsshallnot
exceed900 mm. No fixings shall be made into joints
inmasonry.

19.05.2 Saddles and holdfasts shall be of

thefollowingmaterials:
for copper conductors,
gunmetal,aluminium-
siliconbronzeornaval
brass;
foraluminiumconductors,aluminium,aluminiumalloyor
stainlesssteel.
Clips shall be either of metal as above or ofoutdoors
grade polycarbonate or polypropylenewith snap on lids,
which cannot be inadvertentlyremoved.Clips and saddles
shall have
roundededgesandcountersunkscrews.Brasscomponentssh
allnotbeused.

19.05.3 Forgeneralareasinsidebuildingsscrewsandnu
tsshallbeofcadmium-
electroplatedsteelorstainlesssteel;outsidebuildings, in
plant rooms or other locations
asindicatedtheyshouldbeof stainlesssteel.

19.05.4 Noshotfiringshallbeusedandnodrillingorwel
dingofstructuralsteelwork
shallbedonewithouttheapprovaloftheEngineer.Drillin
g and cutting of the outside fabric of
thebuildingsshallbecarriedoutonlyaftertheEngineerha
sgivenapproval.

19.06 BONDINGTOINCOMINGSERVICES
19.06.1 Bondingtoincomingservicesshallbeasindicat
ed.

19.06.2 WhereaservicebelongstoaPublicStatutoryUn
dertakerthepermissionoftheEngineer shall be
obtained before connection ismade.

46
 ElectricalStandardSpec’s

SECTIONTWENTY other period where indicated.The

ContractorshallprovidetotheEngineercalculationstodemo
nstratethatthisrequirementwillbemet.
CathodicProtection
20.01 GENERAL 20.02.4 Each anode shall be buried so that thetop is
20.01.1 Cathodicprotectionshallbebyimpres not less than 1.5 mbelow ground
sedcurrentunlessotherwiseindicated. levelandsurroundedby notlessthan300mmofbackfill.

20.01.2 The following information will 20.02.5 Wherethesoilresistivity islessthan1000

beindicatedinthetenderdocuments: ohm.cmthe backfill shall be soil, whichhas passed
thelocationanddimensionsofthestructure and pipework to through a sieve with a maximummesh of 12 mm; the
be protected;thetypeof metaltobeprotected; soil shall be tamped aroundthe anodes and to a depth
theminimumpotential ofthe of 300mmabovethem.
cathodewithrespecttoastandardreferencecell;
thetypeofcoating,themethodofapplicationofthecoatingand 20.02.6 Where the soil resistivity is greater
theestimatedpercentagedamagetoitsoastoshallbeallowedf than1000 ohm.cm the backfill shall be coke
orduringinstallationandduring20-yearperiodthereafter; breezewhichhaspassedthroughasievewithamaximum
anyjointsinthemetaltobeprotectedthat are intended to mesh of 12 mm. The resistivity of thecoke breeze,
remain before any additive is made to it,shall not exceed 50
insulated;detailsofanyotherknownburiedmetalwork ohm.cm.The coke breezeshall be thoroughly mixed
and any other with 5% to 10% byweightofslakedlime.
cathodicprotectioninstallationt
hatexistswithinoradjacenttothearetobeprotected.
20.03 SOURCEOFPOWER
20.01.3 Informationonthenatureofthesoil,whether it 20.03.1 The transformer and rectifier
is aerobic or non-aerobic and if sowhether it contains unitsshallbesuppliedbyamanufacturerwithprovenexpe
sulphate-reducing bacteria,may be indicated in the rienceinmakingequipmentforcathodicprotection.They
tender documents.If shallbesuitableforthefullcurrentrangetobeexpecteddur
itisnotindicated,theContractorshallanalyzesamples of ingtheinstallation.
soil taken at various locations
acrosstheareatobeprotected;heshallensuresamplesaret 20.03.2 The equipment shall conform tothe
akenfromareasofimportedbackfillaswellasfromundist requirements of BS 148, BS 171 and BS2709 and
urbedground.Total current demand for the enclosures shall comply with clause2.03.
installation shall
bebasedonthesamplehavingthelowestresistivity. 20.03.3 Provisionshallbeincludedtoenabletheprotecti
on current to be adjusted by control
oftherectifieroutputand,wheretherearemultipole
20.02 GROUNDBEDS anode or cathode circuits, by variableresistors
20.02.1 Groundbeds shall be located within inindividualcircuits.
theareasindicated.
20.03.4 Each transformer and rectifier unit
20.02.2 Anodes shall be of silicon iron shallinclude a voltmeter to indicate the d.c.
chromeunless otherwise indicated. Each anode outputvoltage and an ammeter to measure total
shallbe fitted with a cable tail comprising a single - outputcurrent.Wheremorethanoneanodeorcathode
core polythene - insulated PVC sheathed circuit is supplied from the same unit anammeter in
cablenotlessthan10mm²;theconnectiontotheanodeshal each circuit or one ammeter withselector switches
lbemechanicallyandelectricallysound and shall be shall be provided.A
sealed against ingress ofmoisture.Details of the mainssupply'ON'indicatorlampshallbeprovided.
proposed method
ofconnectionshallbesubmittedfortheapprovaloftheEn
gineer. 20.04 CABLING
20.04.1 Cablestoanodesandcathodesshallhavecopper
20.02.3 The number and size of anodes in conductorswithpolytheneinsulationandPVCsheaths,w
eachgroundbedshallbeadequatetosustaintherequiredc ithorwithoutarmouringas indicated..
urrentfornotlessthan20years,or

47
 ElectricalStandardSpec’s

20.04.2 Cablesshallbesizedsothatthevoltagedropinac
ircuitwillnotexceed20%oftherectifieroutputvoltagew
henthemaximumcurrent anticipated in the life of the
installationflows.

20.04.4 Jointingandterminatingcablesshallcomplywi
thclause3.07exceptthatwherearmouringisincludeditne
ednotbebonded.
20.04.5 Cable connections to cathodes shall
beprotectedwithamaterialcompatiblewiththeprotectiv
ecoatingof thecathode.

20.05 TESTPOINTSANDBONDING
20.05.1 Testpointsshallbefixedtoburiedstructure or
pipes where indicated.They shallbe fixed by welding,
preferably by the
thermitprocessbuttheEngineershallapprovethepropos
edmethodoffixingbeforeworkcommences.

20.05.2 Test points shall be connected by PVC -

insulated cable to terminations within inspectionpits
or on posts as indicated; the pits shall
besimilartothosespecifiedinclause11.04.Where a
number of test points are adjacent
toeachothertheyshallbeterminatedinacommoninspecti
onpit.

20.05.3 Wherethe test specified in clause

21.14.2 show bonding across joints in pipeworkor
structure to be necessary, each bond shall bemade by
copper tape or cable connected directto the flanges by
the thermit welding
process.Thewholeofthebondshallbeprotectedinaccordanc
ewithclause20.04.5

20.06 MARKING
20.06.1 Markingofcablesshallcomplywithclause
6.11.In addition markers complying withthat clause
shall be placed above each
anodeinscribed"CATHODICPROTECTIONGROUN
DBED"; the joint to the cable tail
fromtheanodeneednotbeadditionallymarked.Testpoin
tinspectionpitsorpostsshallbeinscribed"CATHODICP
ROTECTIONTESTPOINT".

48
 ElectricalStandardSpec’s

SECTIONTWENTY-ONE 21.03.4 High voltage tests on HV cables

and,whereindicated,onLVcables,factorybuiltassembli
es and transformers shall comply
InspectionandTesting withtherequirementsforsitetestingintheappropriateBri
tishStandards.
21.01 GENERAL
21.01.1 Inspection and testing shall be done 21.03.5 Alternative methods to those set out inthe
inaccordance with the IEE Wiring Regulations, IEE Wiring Regulations may be proposed forthe
therequirementsofthisSectionandasindicated. approval of the Engineer, but they shall
benotlesseffectivethanthoseRegulations.
21.01.2 Inspectionshallincludeaphysicalcheckthatall
equipmenthasbeensecurelyfixedandthatallelectricalco 21.03.6 Where necessary to prevent damage
nnectionsaremechanicallysound. tocomponents of equipment the equipment shallbe
disconnected for the duration of the relevanttests.
21.01.3 Inadditiontothecompletionofeachinstallation
,certain testsshall be done 21.04 POWERCABLES
duringtheprogressoftheWorks,asrequiredbyclauses21 21.04.1 Testsshallbemadeimmediatelyoncompletion
.04to21.08inclusiveand21.14. of the installation of power cables todemonstrate that
the phase sequence is correctatallendconnections.
21.02 INFORMATION
21.02.1 ForequipmentsuppliedunderthecontracttheC 21.04.2 HVcablesand,whereindicated,LVcablesshall
ontractorshallobtainfrommanufacturersthe time/ betestedathighvoltageinaccordance with clause
current 21.03.4 as soon as theirinstallationis complete.
characteristicsofallprotectivedevicesforautomaticdisc
onnection of supply and provide copies 21.04.3 LVcablesnotrequiredtobehighvoltagetesteds
totheEngineerandtothepersonorpersonscarryingoutth hallbetestedforinsulationresistanceassoonastheirinstal
einspectionandtesting,inadditiontomeetingtherequire lationiscomplete.The test voltage shall be 500V
mentsofclause22.05.1 The Contractor shall be d.c.Forinstallationsratedupto500Vand1000V d.c. For
responsible for providing the Protection Grading for installations rated up to 1000V. Tests shall cover all
each protection device on the system and setting the permutations between each conductor, screen,
devices accordingly metallic sheath, armour and earth.

21.03 TESTINGMETHODS 21.04.4 Theoversheathsofcableslaidunderground

21.03.1 TheEngineershallbenotifiedofthemethod to shall be given a voltage withstandtest after
be used for each type of test and thenotification shall backfilling of the trenches is
be given not less than 28 daysbefore the final tests completebutbeforetermination.
are to be made.The
testsshallbecarriedoutinaccordancewiththemethods 21.05 ALARM,
set out in the IEE Wiring CONTROL,COMMUNICATIONANDM
Regulations,subjecttotherequirementsofclauses21.03. ONITORINGCABLES.
2to21.03.5inclusive. 21.05.1 Cables shall be tested as soon as
theirinstallation is complete to ensure that the
21.03.2 Fortestingcontinuityofprotectiveconductorsa coresare continuous, that they have not been
ndequipotentialbondingana.c.sourceshallbeusedunles crossedand that the insulation resistance is
stheEngineeragreesotherwise. satisfactory.Insulationtestsshallcoverallpermutations
betweeneachconductor,screen,metallicsheath,armour
21.03.3 Themethodusedtoverifytheeffectivenessofthe andearth.
protectionaffordedbyaresidual current - operated
device shall give theoperating time and the current 21.05.2 Forpolyethyleneanddrypaper-insulated
used shall communications cables the insulationresistance for
notexceed100%ofthenominalsettingofthedevice.For a each conductor shall be not lessthan 1500 ÷ L
fault-voltage operated device megohms, where L is the cablelength in
thetestvoltagebetweentheexposedconductivepart and kilometres.The measured
earth shall not exceed 50 volts.Inaddition to the tests resistanceofeachconductorshallnotexceedthecalculate
simulating an dresistancebymorethan5%;theEngineerwillmakethec
appropriatefaultconditionanytestfacilityincorporatedi alculatedvalueavailable.
nthedeviceshallbeoperatedtotestitseffectiveness.

49
ElectricalStandardSpec’s

21.05.3 Where repairs or extensions are madeto dry 21.13 POTENTIALLY

paper - insulated cables, gas EXPLOSIVEATMOSPHERES
pressuretestsshallbemadeinaccordancewithAppendix 21.13.1 Installationsinpotentiallyexplosiveatmosphe
3of this Specification. res shall be inspected and tested inaccordance with
all the relevant requirements ofthis Section and with
21.06 CONDUITSANDTRUNKING the requirements of BS5345.
21.06.1 Whereconduitiscastin-
situinreinforcedconcreteitshallbecheckedforfreedom 21.14 CATHODICPROTECTION
from blockage and steel conduit shallbe tested for 21.14.1 Cathodic protection installations shall
electrical continuity as soon as theshutteringhas betestedduringthecommissioningperiodinaccordance
beenremoved. withCP1021.

21.06.2 Steelconduitandtrunkingsystemsshallbeinsp 21.14.2 Beforepipeworkandstructureiscoveredbybac

ectedandtestedbeforeany wiring is installed; under kfillingeveryjointintheprotectedmetalworkshallbetest
loorductingandflushfloortrunking shall be inspected ed.Wheretheresistance is not sufficiently low in
and tested before screeding. relation to thetotal circuit to allow adequate current
to
21.07 EARTHELECTRODES pass,thejointshallbebondedinaccordancewithclause20
21.07.1 The resistance of each earth .05.3.
electrode,whetherforearthing
ofprotectiveconductors,lightning protection or an 21.14.3 Contactwithburiedpipeshallnotbemadebypro
electrical system, shallbe checked immediately after beunlesstheapprovaloftheEngineerhas beengiven.
installation of
theelectrodesandtheresultssubmittedtotheEngineer. 21.15 RECORDSANDCERTIFICATES
21.15.1 Inspectionandtestresultsshallberecorded on
21.08 LIGHTINGPROTECTION forms provided by the
21.08.1 Where the reinforcement of a ContractorandapprovedbytheEngineer.Twocopiessha
concretestructureisindicatedtoformthedownconductor ll be submitted to the Engineer within 7 daysof
s, clause 19.02.5 refers, the electricalcontinuity of the eachtest.
welded reinforcing bars shall
betestedaftereachpourofconcreteiscompleted. 21.15.2 When all inspections and tests resultsare
satisfactory a Completion Certificate and
21.08.2 At the completion of the whole anInspectionCertificateshallbegiventotheEngineernot
lightningprotection installation it shall be inspected laterthanthedateorthecompletion of the Works.The
andtestedinaccordancewithCP326. certificates shallbe given in the form laid down in the
IEE WiringRegulations for electrical installations,
21.09 EARTHFAULTLOOPIMPEDANCES BS
21.09.1 Themeasuredearthfaultloopimpedanceforeac 5839forfirealarmsystemsandBS5266foremergencylig
hcircuitshallbecheckedagainstthemaximumvalueasin htingsystems.
dicated.WherethemaximumvalueisexceededtheEngin
eershallbeinformed. 21.15.3 The values of prospective short -
circuitcurrent and earth fault loop impendence at
21.10 FIRE DETECTION AND theorigin of the installation shall be recorded on
ALARMSYSTEMS theInspectionCertificates.
21.10.1 Fire alarm systems shall be
inspected,testedandcommissionedinaccordancewithB
S5839.

21.11 EMERGENCY LIGHTINGSYSTEMS

21.11.1 Emergencylightingsystemsshallbeinspected
andtestedinaccordancewiththe"three yearly"
inspection and test procedure laiddowninBS5266.

21.12 AVIATIONGROUNDLIGHTING
21.12.1 Aviationgroundlightinginstallationsshallbei
nspected inaccordancewithall therelevant
requirements of this Section and withAppendix4of
this Specification.

50
 ElectricalStandardSpec’s

SECTIONTWENTY-TWO requiredinconnectionwiththeWorkstogetherwiththeoveral
lsizeandweightofequipment.

DrawingsandDocumentsbyContractor 22.03.2 Where the Engineer agrees, holes

maybemarkedoutonsiteinsteadofbeingshownondrawi
22.01 EXTENTOFPROVISION ngs.
22.01.1 Unlessotherwiseindicated,theContractorshal
lprovidethedrawingsanddocuments specified in 22.04 AS-INSTALLEDDRAWINGS
clauses 22.02 to 22.05inclusive. 22.04.1 As-
installeddrawings,includingdiagramsandschedules,sh
22.01.2 General layout drawings shall be drawnto a allshowalltheinformation necessary so that each
scale of 1:50 and detailed layout assemblydrawings installationcanbeoperated,maintained,inspectedandte
to a scale of 1:20; if more detail isnecessary scales of stedsoastopreventdanger,asfarasisreasonably
1:10, 1:2 and 1:1 may beused. practicable.They shall
incorporatetheinformationnecessaryfortheidentificati
22.01.3 The numbers of sets of drawings onofthedevicesperformingthefunctionsofprotection,is
anddocumentstobesuppliedshallbeasindicated. olationandswitching,andtheirlocations.Thevaluesofpr
ospectiveshortcircuit current and earth fault loop
impedance atthe origin of the installation shall be
22.02 INSTALLATION DRAWINGS recorded ontheappropriatesystemdiagram.
ANDDOCUMENTS
22.04.2 Thedrawingsshallincludethosesetoutinclaus
22.02.1 Installationdrawingsanddocuments,detailsof
e22.02.2
theContractor’sproposalsfortheexecutionoftheWorks
andshallincludeeverything necessary for he
22.04.3 Circuit details including loading,
following
origin,route, destination and where buried, the
purposes:toillustrateindetailthearrangementofthevari
depthbelow finished ground level shall be shown
oussectionsof theWorksandto
foreachcable,conduit,trunkingandducting.Conductors
identifythevariouscomponents;tointegrateth
izeandmaterialandthetypeofinsulation of all cables
eWorkswiththedetailofthe building and
shall be shown togetherwith the number of cores in
otherinstallations
each cable or thenumber of cables in each conduit,
22.02.2 Installationdrawingsshallinclude: general trunking
layout drawings showing the location orducting.Whereidentificationisbycolourofinsulation
ofallequipmentincludingcable,cabletray,conduit,trun or sheath this shall be shown.Jointsanddraw-inboxes
king,ductingandearthelectrodes; Detailed layout shallbeshown.
drawings showing the location of all equipment
22.04.4 Whereincomingsupplycablesareinstalled by
including cable,cabletray,conduit, trunking and
others they shall also be shown
ducting in switch rooms and plantrooms; Assembly
asdescribedinclause22.04.3
drawingsoffactory
builtequipmentandsitebuiltassemblies;
22.04.5 Drawingsshallindicatewhetherconduit,trunki
Detailedlayoutdrawingshowingsectionsthroughceilin
ngorductingissurfacemounted,concealed in ceiling
gvoidsandverticalshafts; Systemdiagrams, circuit
spaces, in wall chases, infloorscreeds orcastin-situ.
diagrams and wiring diagrams for all installations
and equipment.
22.04.6 Allearthingconductors,mainequipotential
bonding conductors, main
22.02.3 Diagramsshallcomply with BS
earthingterminalorbar,protectiveconductorsandsupple
5070.Interconnection diagrams shall indicate the
mentaryequipotentialbondingconductorsshallbeidenti
type of cable, conductor size and terminal
fiedwithfunction,origin,route,destination, conductor
numbering.
size and material, type ofinsulation and where
buried, the depth below finished ground level.Test
22.03 BUILDERS’WORKDRAWINGS
points shall be indicated.
22.03.1 Builder’sworkdrawingsshallshowfullydimen
sioned details of all builders’ work 22.04.7 Earth electrodes shall be identified as to
their type;dimensions,materials and depth below
finished ground level.The nature of thesoil and any
treatment that has been given to it or special fill that
has been used in the installation shall be identified.

51
 ElectricalStandardSpec’s

22.04.8 Detailsofeachitemofequipment,includinglumi a description ofthe extent and manner

naires,shallincludeelectricalcharacteristics,classification,d ofoperation,includingdurationperiodsofstandbysystems;
egreeofprotection against ingress of solids and liquids,
class of protection adescriptionofthemethodusedforcompliance with
againstcorrosionandmanufacturer’snameandreference. Regulation 413- 3 of
theIEEWiringRegulationstogetherwithtime/current
2.04.9Diagrams shall comply with clause characteristics for all
22.02.3andwherenecessarytheyshallbesupplementedwith protectivedevicesforautomaticdisconnectionofsupply;
physicalarrangementdrawings to assist the location and a copy of the inspection certificate and all thetestrecords;
identificationof componentpartsofequipment.
a copy of any certificates of compliance
22.04.10 LayoutdrawingsforAGLequipment withrelevantstandardsor schemes as requiredbyclauses
shallincludelocationaldimensions. 1.05and1.05.3;

22.04.11 Drawingsofthelightningprotection comprehensive instructions for the switchingon,

system shall include identification ofthose elements operation, switching off and isolation
of the building fabric used as airterminations and andfordealingwithemergencyconditions;
down conductors.Details ofconnection to structural
steel frames or to instructions for any precautionary measuresnecessary.
thereinforcementofaconcretestructureshallcomply
with clause 22.04.7.Test clamps shallbeidentified. instructions for servicing, including
frequencyandmaterialstobeused,tomaintaintheequipmenti
22.04.12 Forunderfloorandceilingelectrichea ngoodandsafecondition;
tinginstallationsthelocationofcables shall be
accurately dimensioned and thecoldloopresistances the names and addresses of suppliers of allmajor
indicated. components together with the type andmodel reference,
serial number, duty ratingandtheordernumberanddate.
22.04.13 During the course of the
WorkstheContractorshallmaintainafullydetailedrecor 22.05.2 Maintenance and operating instructionsshall
dofallchangestoensurethattheAsInstalleddrawingsarei be indexed and contained in ring binderswith stiff
nallrespectsaccurate. covers.The name of the site shall beprinted on the
front and spine with, where
22.04.14 Eachdrawingshallbeinaccordance morethanonevolumeisnecessary,asuitableidentificatio
with BS 308 to ensure suitability formicro- n title.The date of completion of
filmingandshallbeondurabletranslucentmaterial,other theWorksshallbeincludedonaflyleaf.
thanpaper,ofastandard size AO to A4 in accordance
with BS3429.The Words“AS INSTALLED’ shall 22.05.3 Copies of manufacturer’s data may
beplaced in 19 mmblock letters adjacent to beincorporated to supplement the descriptions
thetitleblockofeachdrawingtogetherwiththename of andinstructions required in clause 22.05.1 but
the site and the section of the Works,the title of the shallnotreplacethem.Only
installation, the date of completionof the Works, datarelevanttotheWorksshallbeincluded;wherenon-
theContract number and relevantdataappearsonthesamesheetitshallbeincluded;
thenameoftheContractor.IfrequiredtheAsInstalleddra where non-relevant data appears
wingsshallbeproducedonAutoCADandprovidedtothe onthesamesheetitshallbeclearly markedtoshow that it
Engineeronmagneticdisc. is not applicable.The data shall becross referenced
within the text and included inthe index; if possible,
22.04.15 AdraftofeachAsInstalleddrawingsh it shall be contained in
allbesubmittedtotheEngineerbeforefinalissueis made. theringbinders,butwherethisisnotpossiblesuitably
protectedboxfilesorfoldershallbeprovided, identified
22.05 MAINTENANCEANDOPERATING in accordance with clause22.05.2
INSTRUCTIONS
22.05.1 For each electrical installation, 22.05.4 Adraftofthemaintenanceandoperating
systemandindividualequipmentformingpartoftheWor instruction shall be submitted to
ks,themaintenanceandoperatinginstructionsshallinclu theEngineerbeforethefinaldocumentsareissued.
de:

52
 ElectricalStandardSpec’s

APPENDIXONE

LISTOFSTANDARDS
InadditiontoBritishStandards,thefollowingstandardsarereferredtointhisSpecification:

1 ElectricitySupplyindustryStandards:
ESI90-
9Polymericinsulated,combinedneutral/earth(CNE)cableswithsolidaluminiumphaseconductorsandconcentricaluminiumwi
rewaveformneutral/earthconductor.

ESI43-1011kVsinglecircuitoverheadlinesoflightconstructiononwoodpoles.ESI43-

30Lowvoltageoverheadlinesonwoodpoles.

2 InternationalElectromechanicalCommission:
IEC502Extrudedsoliddielectricinsulatedpowercablesforratedvoltageform1kVupto30kV.

53
 ElectricalStandardSpec’s

APPENDIXTWO

SPECIMENSITECLEARANCECERTIFICATE

DepartmentoftheEnvironment
PropertyServicesAgency
EXCAVATIONOFTRENCHESFORSERVICES-SITECLEARANCECERTIFICATE
Contractor:
Name......................................................
Address ......................................................
......................................................
......................................................
Establishment:
Name......................................................
Address ......................................................
......................................................
.......................................................
ContractNo...........................................
AsfarasIknowtheareaindicatedontheaccompanyingmap:
*1. isfreeofallcables,drainsandotherundergroundservicesandthatexcavationoftrenchesforcablelaying
inthatareamayproceed forthwith.
*2 includethecables,drainsandotherundergroundservice,whicharelistedontheattachedsheetsnumbered
toinclusive,andalsomarkedonthemap.
*3 includecables,drainsandotherundergroundservicesthelocationofwhichareunknown:theContractor
shallberesponsibleforlocatingandavoidingthem.

The issue ofthisCertificateissubjecttotheconditionsandrequirementsofclauses

6.04.1and6.04.2ofStandardSpecification(M&E) No.

Signed ........................................
Name(inblockcapitals)........................................
Grade ........................................
Department ........................................
Address ........................................
*delete as
appropriate

W2361

54
 ElectricalStandardSpec’s

APPENDIXTHREE 8 Proofshallbeprovidedthatthesuppliersas‘dry’
haveguaranteedtheCO2being used and that the
cylinders have passedthe tests specified in the Report
GASPRESSURETESTFORDRYPAP of the HomeOffice Gas Cylinders and Containers
Committee(1968)publishedbytheHomeOffice,FireDe
ER-INSULATEDCABLES partment.

1 Where repairs or extensions are madeto dry 9 To prevent moisture being carried
paper - insulated cables, gas intothecable,gasshallonlybeuseddowntoapproximatel
pressuretestsshallbemadeinaccordancewiththisAppen y1/3theinitialcylinderpressure.
dix.
10 If there is difficulty in obtaining dry
2 Test shall be made after the cable hasbeen CO2,dry air may be used subject to the approval
re - bedded and covered by a 50 mm ofthe Engineer. The requirements of
deeptampedlayerofsievedsoil,butbeforeitisjointed. paragraphs8and9forCO2shallapplytotheair.

3 Asmallholeshall be cut in the leadsheath

close to each end of the cable and athreaded brass
test insert plumbed to each hole.Thecableends
shallbesealed.

4 Usingthebrassinserts,thecablesheath shall be
pressurised to 140kN/m² gaugeusing dry CO2 gas
until equal gauge readingsare obtained at both ends
of the cable.The gassupply shall then be
disconnected and
precisegaugereadingsnoted.Thereshallbenoalterationi
nthegaugereadingsoverthefollowing 24 hours,
allowance being made forany change in temperature,
for the cable to
beacceptedasbringgastight.Onsatisfactorycompletion
of the test the brass insets shall
beremovedandtheholesplumbedover.

5 After each joint has been made and

theplumbing completed a suitable threaded brasstest
insert shall be plumbed to the top of thesleeve so that
the joint can be pressure tested.Using this inset, the
joint shall be pressurised
toapproximately140kN/m²gaugewithdryCO2gas.The
plumbsshallthenbetestedforporosityusingasoapsoluti
on.
Should a plumb be found to leak it should becompletely
remade.On satisfactory completionof the test the brass
insert shall be removed andtheholeplumbedover.

6 Reasonablenoticeoftheintentiontoperform
these tests shall be given for them to
bewitnessedbytheEngineer.

7 The Contractor shall provide the

CO2apparatus including gas cylinder and stand,
highpressure cock, high pressure gauge,
reducingvalve,lowpressurevalve,flexiblepipeconnecti
on, pressure gauges 120 to 170 kN/m²and any other
equipment required for carryingout the test, and a
competent operator who is
toberesponsibleforpreventingorremovingifnecessarya
nyaccumulationof CO2gas.

55
 ElectricalStandardSpec’s

APPENDIXFOUR of the loop cable in circuit, expressed inkilometres.

Thecontinuityresistanceofseriescircuits shall be
TESTSFORAVIATIONGROUND measured and the
valueobtainedmustaccordwiththeestimated value of 3.02
LIGHTIN ohms per 1000mof6-
GINSTALLATIONS mm²cableplus0.4ohmperseriestransformer.

1 In addition to the inspections and ParallelCircuits

testspecified in Section 21 the tests specified in 7 Test shall be made as for series
thisAppendixshallbedone,asappropriate. circuits,except that a 500-volt test set shall be used
andthetestforcontinuityresistanceisnotrequired.
SeriesCircuits
2 Isolatingtransformersshallbetestedbefore
installation to ensure that single ends, orthe centre
points of the secondary windings, arebonded to the
cases of the transformers,
andthattheinsulationresistancebetweentheprimarywin
dingsandthecases,withthesecondary windings bonded
to the cases, is notless than 50 megohms.The
insulation test shallbemadewitha1,000-
volttestset.Transformers with an insulate resistance
of lessthan50megohmsshallnotbeinstalled.

3 After completion and backfilling of trenchestests

shall be made to prove that the secondarywindings of
transformers are connected to theprotective
conductor and to the earth
electrodesortheearthbarinthe‘B’centre.

4 After a certificate from the Contractor that

allexposed conductive parts in the installation
areearthedhasbeenacceptedby
theEngineer,testsforinsulation resistance shall be
carriedoutas follows:
Initially
After the installation has been
operatedatfullintensityfornotlessthansixhours,andwhileth
eisolatingtransformers arestillwarm
Finally
Atleastthreehourslaterwhentheisolatingtransformers
havecooled.

5 Alltestsshallbecarriedoutconsecutively and
the Engineer shall accept
thetestresultsforeachbeforethenexttestismade.

6 Each insulation resistance of the

circuitshallbetestedusing a 1000-volt
testset.The conductors at the two ends
ofeach of the primary series loop
circuits,shall be connected together and the
testvoltageappliedfor15secondsminimumoru
ntilthereadinghasstabilised before reading
he insulationresistance.The acceptable
insulationresistance is 50 ÷ (N+L)
megohms, witha minimum resistance of one
megohm,whereNisthenumberofisolatingtran
sformers,andListheactuallength

56